JP7047162B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, image data to be read from a CGROM that stores compressed data of still images and moving images displayed on a liquid crystal display, decompress the read compressed data, and output to the liquid crystal display. Is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-159026

However, as described in Patent Document 1, for example, when the compressed data is read from the CGROM and the image data to be output is generated, if the amount of data is large, the loading process takes time. In this case, the watchdog reset may be applied even though the load process is proceeding normally, which is not preferable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably advancing a loading process.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A read-only storage area in which game data related to the game is stored (for example, sub-main 205).
0 and CGROM2060)
A volatile storage area (for example, SRAM 210) in which game data related to the game can be read and written.
0b and built-in VRAM2370)
A transfer execution means for executing a load process of reading the game data stored in the read-only storage area and writing the game data to the volatile storage area (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the data load process of FIG. 93).
Watchdog timer and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The transfer executing means is
An upper limit value setting means for setting an upper limit value of the time required for the load process (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1651) and
When the execution time of the load process does not exceed the upper limit value set by the upper limit value setting means (for example, when S1654 is YES determination), the clear means for clearing the clock of the watchdog timer (for example, S1655). Host control circuit 210 that executes processing
0) and,
The gaming machine is
Abnormality determination processing (for example, step S503, step S51) capable of determining whether or not an amplification means capable of amplifying a game sound (for example, a digital audio power amplifier 262) is normal.
1. The process of step S515 or the like is provided, and the abnormality determination process can be executed by a plurality of different processes (for example, processes of step S503, step S511, step S515, etc.), and one predetermined process (for example, 1). When a part of the abnormality determination process (for example, step S503, step S511, step S515) divided into a plurality of different processes is executed in the frame), a part of the remaining abnormality determination process or a part of the remaining abnormality determination process in the predetermined process from the next time onward. It is characterized by being configured so that everything is executable.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the upper limit of the time required for the load process is set, and if the execution time of the load process does not exceed the set upper limit, the timekeeping of the watchdog timer is cleared. Further, when a part of the abnormality determination process divided into a plurality of different processes is executed in one predetermined process, a part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processes can be executed in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. To.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably proceed with the loading process.

It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the figure which shows the operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. This is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above to the right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. This is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the voice / LED control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the output signal of the voice / LED control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a control block diagram for demonstrating an example of volume control by a host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic connection configuration diagram between the built-in relay board and the speaker of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the display control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic connection block diagram between the sub-board and the CGROM board (NOR type) of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic connection block diagram between the sub-board and the CGROM board (NAND type) of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the AND circuit provided in the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver provided in the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of a big hit of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selectivity of a main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. This is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the drawing control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of power-on processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game permission process. (A) A flowchart showing an example of the setting process, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game return processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-off occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting check process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving number subtraction process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a message setting process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a table which shows an example of the selection rate of the limiter number in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value. In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, it is a figure which shows an example of a mode in which a gaming ball passes through a right gate of continuous operation of an accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main processing executed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example for demonstrating the sub-device input discrimination information created in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-device input processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. An example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is shown, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 65. It is a figure for conceptually explaining the backlight control process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing which accompanies the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing which shows the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, it is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for explaining a first embodiment of a process of adjusting the brightness of a backlight and various LEDs. .. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, it is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for explaining a second embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. .. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, it is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for explaining a third embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. .. It is a flowchart which shows an example of RTC acquisition processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation control main processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of composition reproduction control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the amplifier check process for use in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the amplifier check process for deep bass in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check process which performs the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (collective) check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the more preferable form of the sound amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a more preferable form of the amplifier check process for normal use amplifier and the amplifier for deep bass in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. An example of a more preferable form of a normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention is shown, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 83. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 1st Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 4th Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 5th Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an attenuation table which shows an example of the luminance attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) corresponding to the emission intensity of strong, medium, and weak LEDs in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the connection state of an LED port, an LED and a solenoid in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the data load processing which is executed as one of various initialization processing by a host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number initialization processing which is executed as one of various initialization processing by a host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number periodical update process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, (a) a flowchart showing an example of random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, and (c) an example of random number 3 acquisition processing are shown. The flowchart is a flowchart showing an example of (d) random number 4 acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number acquisition processing which is executed when a random number is used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. This is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for explaining a modified example of the sub-random number process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reception interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory initial operation process which is executed as one of various initialization processes by a host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a production system command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the variation start command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial position restoration operation processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving the demo command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hit system command reception time processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu task executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu redisplay process is executed. This is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A screen indicating that the backup clear process was executed without the setting change process, (c) the backup clear process without the setting change process was executed, and a start port error winning error occurred. This is the screen after the notification period has elapsed, indicating that the backup clear process has been executed. It is another example of the hall menu task executed by the host control circuit, and is the flowchart in the case of executing the setting determination process which determines the suitability of the setting value information by a host control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu processing executed by a sub CPU. This is an example of the error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, and is the flowchart which continues from FIG. 117. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can perform a page update in a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen which each history data was cleared in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the initial screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example when "setting display" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example when "Page" is selected. It is a figure which shows the example of the page update screen which is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and can perform page update. It is a flow diagram which shows an example of the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen which can confirm a setting value is displayed in the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the maintenance process executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the modified example 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. be. It is an example of the password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the example of the screen which is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the input password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, the setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set value can be confirmed is displayed. It is a flow diagram which shows an example of the operation procedure up to. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the volume switch which generates the volume password applied to the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. be. It is an example of the volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a flow diagram which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which constitutes the gaming system which concerns on modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the portable wireless communication terminal and the server apparatus of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the 2D code in the pachinko gaming machine of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2D code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG.

[1. Configuration of gaming machines]
[1-1. Appearance composition]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Figure 2 shows
It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention.
FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a group of operation buttons. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 shows
It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in front view. Therefore, for example, "left" in the right direction of the drawing is described as "left" in the front view because the drawing is a rear view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Moreover,
The front surface is the surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is the surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a display device 16, and a gaming board unit 17. , A payout unit 18, and a board unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 has an opening 2 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.
1 is provided. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and the glass door 13 and the glass door 13 on the front surface side.
It supports a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a display device 16, and a game board unit 17.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A protective glass 23 having transparency is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, on the upper part of the glass door 13, the speaker 24 and the LED 2 are
5 is arranged. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting means for producing a notification by light, an effect, or the like.
As long as the light emission effect can be executed, the light emission effect is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, a lamp or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 includes a main button 662 and a select button 664.
And have. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a and a lower select button 6.
It has 64b, a left select button 664c and a right select button 664d. In the following, when referred to as select button 664, the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664
It means a general term for d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, on the upper plate 26 or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is located in the lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores a game ball, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 is launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The game balls that are rented out and the game balls that are paid out as prize balls are
It is paid out to the upper plate 26 from the payout port 61. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launch device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a launch handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player in the launch device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device in response to the operation.

The display device 16 displays the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol (hereinafter, the big hit determination of the special symbol may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game, for example, a liquid crystal display. The device is used. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of a big hit determination, an effect image during a big hit, a demo effect image, and a special. The number of pending symbols variable display (variable display) is included. The display device 16 (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

In this embodiment, one display device 16 is used to display the above-mentioned various effects images.
However, two liquid crystal display devices may be provided and the two liquid crystal display devices may be used to display the effect image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). Sub-control board 40 to have, and payout / launch control circuit 300 to control payout / launch of game balls (
A payout / launch control board 50 having a payout / launch control board 50 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a power supply circuit 3 for supplying power.
A power supply unit 60 having a 38 (see FIG. 9 to be described later), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) are provided.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 40 is configured as a one-board board (a board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs on one board), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 40 is not limited to this. (For example, host control circuit 2100, audio / LED control circuit 2200
, Display control circuit 2300, etc.).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Inside the main board case that houses the main control board 30, there is a setting switch 332 that is operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 that is operated when changing or confirming the set value, and a performance display monitor. 334 and error notification monitor 336 (both see FIG. 9 described later) are housed. For example, the performance display data and set values described later are displayed on the performance display monitor 334. For example, an error code or the like described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. The setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security, and are referred to as a pachinko gaming machine 1 management manager (hereinafter referred to as "game machine management manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The inside of the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding parts of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are turned off. When there is a notch and the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back surface, the game machine management It also includes those that allow the responsible person to access the configuration switch 332 and / and the configuration key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. Center unit 174, ordinary electric accessory unit 400, attacker unit 500,
It includes a passage gate 49 and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are transparent panels 17.
It is provided on the front side of 2. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 is a display device 16.
The accessory group 1000 of the upper accessory and the like (see FIG. 7) arranged in the upper part of the display area of the above is provided. Since at least one of these accessory groups 1000 and the actuating members constituting the accessory or the accessory functions as an operable effect based on the result of the special lottery, they will be referred to as a director below. There is also.

The transparent panel 172 has an opening 17 in a portion where a display area of the display device 16 described later is arranged.
22 is formed. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the traveling direction, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 26 has two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, "outer rail 26a" and ""
It is called "inner rail 26b". ). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is a transparent panel 1
It is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of 72.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged above the game area 20 and is located above the game area 20.
The flow area of the game ball in the above is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right-handed hitting". It is possible to distinguish by the player.

The attacker unit 500 includes a first starting port 420, a large winning opening 540, and a special electric accessory 6.
It is a unit body that integrates 00. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9).
When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward and the shutter 61.
It is equipped with a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives 0. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is a large winning opening solenoid 62.
By driving the shutter 610 with 0, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540, and it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to the closed state. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later. It is done when it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it shall mean both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in this embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (
Although it is the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that a game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity for the display device 16 and the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later, to display the result of the big hit determination. It is something to give. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the first start port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421,
A jackpot determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of gaming balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27. (Ejected). The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handed strike.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory unit 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is in the game area 20.
It is located at the lower left of. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, most of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the display device 16, and it is difficult to arrange the display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity to display the result of the big hit determination on the display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74 described later. It is something to give. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441,
A jackpot determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of gaming balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27. (Ejected). The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right and a starting port solenoid 46.
The power of 30 (for example, see FIG. 9) and the start port solenoid 4630 is powered by the blade member 462.
A power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting to 0 is provided. The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the start port solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins a prize in the second starting port 440 or is a pachinko gaming machine 1 from the out port 450.
It is discharged to the outside of. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and a predetermined number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passing gate switch 49a is provided at the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The attacker unit 500 includes a first starting port 420, a large winning opening 540, and a special electric accessory 6.
It is a unit body that integrates 00. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The attacker unit 500 is located at the lower right of the game area 20.
In recent years, it has been required to make the display device 16 larger, and in order to arrange various members such as the attacker unit 500 in the game area 20, it is necessary to avoid the enlarged display device 16. be.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9).
When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward and the shutter 61.
It is equipped with a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives 0. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is a large winning opening solenoid 62.
By driving the shutter 610 with 0, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540, and it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to the closed state. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. Will be done at.

The general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 are located at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning openings 5 are located.
6 is arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. In addition, general winning openings 53, 54, 55.5
General winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a are arranged in No. 6 (see FIG. 9).
.. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. General winning opening switch 53
When a game ball is detected at a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are discharged (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27). ).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 is three.
The number of prize balls for the general prize opening 53, 54, 55, 56 is 10, and the number of prize balls for the large prize opening 540 is 1.
It is set to 5 each. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball).
Is placed in. The out opening 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting openings or the winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 26 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. A symbol hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76 are provided.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to the open state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary hit"), the display L
The combination of lighting and extinguishing of ED71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second
The difficulty of winning a game ball to the starting port 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols has executed the number of times of execution of the variable display of the reserved ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as).
It is called "the number of pending variable display of ordinary symbols"). The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols has a display L.
The number of pending fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of ED72a and 72b. For example, if the execution of the variable display of a normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LE
As D72a lights up, the display LED 72b goes out. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED is displayed.
72b lights up. In addition, if the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times,
The display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. Display LED
When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. Display LED
When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

As described above, the display LED group 7 of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74
In 3a and 74a, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition from the normal gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player is made. decide. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440. That is, if the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the big winning opening 540
Is released. The round game is shifted to the jackpot game state in which the game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reservations for the special symbol variation display"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. 1st
The special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 have display LEDs 75a.
The number of pending changes in the special symbol is displayed by turning on / off the 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly has a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 30.
It is composed of 0 and a power supply circuit 338. Hereinafter, each of these configurations will be described in the order of the main control circuit 100, the payout / emission control circuit 300, the power supply circuit 338, and the sub control circuit 200 for convenience.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state. In this embodiment, the main RA is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101.
Although M103 is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start storage, and
The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol corresponding to the upper limit of four times is stored as the start storage, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start storage, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start storage, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101.
The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 is used when the power is cut off (power is turned off).
For example, by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, the main RAM 1
It holds various data stored in 03.

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, and the like.
A start port for driving the blade member 4620 of the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74, the first special symbol hold display unit 75, the second special symbol hold display unit 76, and the ordinary electric accessory 460. The solenoid 4630, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The external terminal board 323 to be used is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes a first start port switch 421 and a second start port switch 44.
1, Passing gate switch 49a, Count switch 541, General winning opening switch 53a ・
54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, etc. are connected. Main control circuit 100
When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied from the member. Further, a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is connected to the main control circuit 100.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is for changing the set setting value at the time of the setting change processing described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are used by a third party other than the person in charge of managing the gaming machine (the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are used.
For example, it is housed in a main board case so that it cannot be easily accessed by a player).

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. A payout device 350 for paying out a game ball, a launcher 15 for firing a game ball, a card unit 360, and the like are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout device 350 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

[1-2-2. Payout / launch control circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and a prize ball control command.
Upon receiving the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, a predetermined signal is transmitted to the payout device 350 to control the payout device 350 to pay out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the launch solenoid (shown) is based on the rotation angle (rotation amount) thereof. It supplies power to the wheel and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 (relay board 2010) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the display device 16, control related to the sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to the light of the LED 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout / launch control circuit 300 has a payout device 3 for paying out the game balls.
50, a launching device 15 for launching a game ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to an operation of a game field administrator, and the like are connected.

[1-2-3. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

A power switch 35 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are the main control circuit 100 as described above.
However, instead of this, it may be connected to the power supply circuit 338. Even in this case, it is preferable that the pachinko / pachislot machine is housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the person in charge of managing the pachinko / pachislot machine (for example, a player) cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the above case correspond to each other. When the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager, and the back surface is exposed. , Also including those that allow the pachinko / pachislot machine manager to access the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. This specific work area will be described later, but it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear process described later is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the performance of a predetermined operation, or the aggregation may be performed at all times so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a total history totaling means that aggregates all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present. It is provided with a history aggregation means for each set value that executes aggregation of the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the totalization of all the base values described above. All the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the base value for each set value is performed, the history totaling means for each set value executes the total for the base value for each set value. The base value for each set value aggregated by the history aggregation means for each set value is the main CPU 10.
1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set setting value but also the base value for other setting values other than the set setting value can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

The main CPU 101 has both a total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and a set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by a game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of these can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of a specific set value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base value of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. To display the base values of all set values in a list, or to display both the base values by set value and the base values by set value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes a total history totaling means and a history totaling means for each set value.
In addition to these, or instead of the setting value-based history aggregation means, a setting change history aggregation means that aggregates the setting change base value based on the game history from the execution of the setting change process described later to the present is provided. You can do it. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, all or part of the total base value and the base value for each set value and / and the base value for each set value after the setting change is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.
Information based on the past game history of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily confirmed.

In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering a special electric accessory (large winning opening) or an ordinary electric accessory. The ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by the character) may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed with respect to the total number of shots, and may be displayed with the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). Moreover, you may display them according to the setting.

Further, an error code described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation processing described later is in progress, and the like. can. It should be noted that during the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[1-2-4. Sub control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 shows the circuit configuration inside the sub control circuit 200 and the sub control circuit 2.
It is a block diagram which shows the connection relationship between 00 and its various peripheral devices.

The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100, and as shown in FIG. 10, the relay board 2010 and the sub-board 2020.
(First board), control ROM board 2030, and CGROM (Character Generator ROM)
A substrate 2040 (second substrate) is provided. The sub-board 2010 is the relay board 2010.
, Connected to the control ROM board 2030 and the CGROM board 2040. In the sub control circuit 200, the sub board 2020 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CG ROM board 2040) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

In the sub control circuit 200, as shown in FIG. 9, the effect button 62 is operated to O.
The effect button switch 621 that is N / OFF and the main button 662 are operated to turn it on and off.
Main button switches 6621 that are turned off, select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned on and off by operating each select button 664a to 664d, and
Although the accessory detection sensor group 1002 for detecting that the accessory group 1000 is in the initial position is connected, these figures are omitted in FIG. Also, in reality, each select button 6
Select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to 64a to 664d are provided, respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as a select button switch 6641 for convenience. Further, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is provided as many as the number of motors provided corresponding to the movable accessory.

The relay board 2010 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and transmitting the received command to the sub board 2020.

When the sub-control board is the above-mentioned one-board board as the receiving means for receiving the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control board itself may have a function as a receiving means. However, the command may be received as a result via the relay board or the like.

Further, when the sub control board is composed of a plurality of boards, any board may be provided with the receiving means, and even in this case, it is interpreted that the sub control board has the receiving means. can do. Also in this case, even when a sub-control board composed of a plurality of boards receives a command via a relay board or the like, information related to the command by any of the boards constituting the sub-control board as a result. It is also possible to express that the sub-control board has received the command if it recognizes.

The sub-board 2020 is provided with a host control circuit 2100, an audio / LED control circuit 2200, a display control circuit 2300, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 250, and a built-in relay board 2600. Of these, at least the host control circuit 2100, voice / LED
The control circuit 2200 and the display control circuit 2300 are configured as one board.

The host control circuit 2100 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub control circuit 200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and is a CPU processor, subwork RAM 2100a, SRAM 2100b, RTC (real-time clock), and the like. It includes a watchdog timer. The host control circuit 2100 includes a voice / LED control circuit 2200, a display control circuit 2300, and a built-in relay board 2600 in the sub-board 2020.
Connected to. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the control ROM board 2030.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 includes subwork RAM 2100a and SRAM (Static).
RAM) 210b. The subwork RAM 2100a is a storage device that acts as a temporary work storage area when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes, and is a storage device that acts as a temporary storage area for work.
The 100 stores various flags and variable values required when executing various processes. R
The AM2100b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the subwork RAM 2100a. In this embodiment, the temporary storage area of the host control circuit 2100 is R.
Although AM is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a literate storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area.

The voice / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 and the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, and is based on the control signals (sound request and LED request described later) input from the host control circuit 2100. This circuit controls the sound reproduction operation by the lamp group 25 and the light emission operation by the lamp group 25. Therefore, functionally, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 includes the voice controller 2200a and the lamp controller 2.
Has 200b. The voice controller 2200a and the lamp controller 2200b are substantially included in the sound lamp control module 2260 described later. The internal configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

In this embodiment, when the control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the voice / LED control circuit 2200 are transmitted to the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, the voice / LED Communication between the control circuit 2200 and the lamp group 25 is performed by SPI (Se).
It is performed by the communication method (a kind of serial communication method) of rial Periperal Interface). again,
In this embodiment, the lamp group 25 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

The display control circuit 2300 is connected to the display device 16 and displays an image (decorative pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on the control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 2100. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations when displaying with. The display control circuit 2300 includes a display controller (first display controller 2380 and second display controller 2390 described later) and a built-in VR.
It has AM (Video RAM) 237.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the SDRAM 2500 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the CGROM board 2040. Further, the display controller in the display control circuit 2300 is directly connected to the display device 16 without going through the relay board. The internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

The SDRAM 2500 is composed of a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate2) SDRAM.
Further, on the SDRAM 2500, images (moving images and still images) displayed by the display device 16 are displayed.
In the drawing control process of, various buffers for temporarily storing various image data are provided. Specifically, for example, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

The built-in relay board 2600 includes a host control circuit 2100 and a voice / LED control circuit 2200.
It is a relay board that receives various signals and various data output from, and transmits the received various signals and various data to the speaker 24, the lamp group 25, and the accessory group 1000.

Further, the built-in relay board 2600 is an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 2.
It has a 610 and a digital audio power amplifier 2620 (amplification means). In this embodiment, the I2C controller 2610 and the digital audio power amplifier 2620
Is mounted on the same relay board, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay board on which the I2C controller 2610 is mounted may be provided separately from the relay board on which the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is mounted. ..

The I2C controller 2610 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 and the motor controller 2700 of the accessory group 1000. That is, the host control circuit 2100 is I2C.
It is connected to the accessory group 1000 via the controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. Then, the control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100 are input to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700.

In this embodiment, the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700
Communication between them is performed by the I2C communication method (a kind of serial communication method). Further, in the present embodiment, one or more motors are included in the accessory group 1000, and the motor controller 270 is included.
Within 0 is one or more motor drivers for driving each motor. In addition, FIG.
0 indicates an example in which only one accessory group 1000 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this.
A plurality of accessory groups 1000 may be provided.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 directly uses the motor of the accessory or the actuating member constituting the accessory among the accessories constituting the accessory group 1000 without using the motor controller 2700. It may be configured to be driven, or a control circuit for motor control may be provided separately. Further, in the present embodiment, one control circuit controls a plurality of motor drivers (motors), but the present invention is not limited to this. In this embodiment, 1
One or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers) by the above (one or more) control circuits
It may be configured to control, or one motor (one or more) by one or more (one or more) control circuits.
It may be configured to control the motor driver), or one motor (one motor) by one control circuit.
It may be configured to control the motor driver).

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has an audio / LED control circuit 2200,
And, it is connected to the speaker 24. That is, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620. Therefore, the audio signal or the like output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

The control ROM board 2030 is provided with a sub-main ROM 2050. Sub-main R
In the OM 2050, various programs for controlling the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the host control circuit 2100 and various data tables (see, for example, FIGS. 21 to 28 described later) are stored. Then, the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the host control circuit 2100).
The CPU processor) executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub-main ROM 2050.

In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 2050 is applied as a storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like used in the host control circuit 2100, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means, for example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. Storage medium may be applied. Also, each of the programs may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub-main ROM 2050.

The CGROM board 2040 is provided with the CGROM 2060. CGROM2060
Is composed of NOR type or NAND type flash memory. Also, CGROM2
In the 060, for example, image data displayed on the display device 16 and audio data reproduced by the speaker 24 (sometimes referred to as sound data in this specification) are stored. At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 2060, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 2060 without being compressed.

In this embodiment, various ROM boards (control ROM) are used in the sub control circuit 200.
Although the configuration in which the substrate 2030 and the CGROM substrate 2040) and the sub-board 2020 are connected by a board-to-board connector has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into a port such as a socket provided on the sub-board 2020, and the sub-board 2020 may be configured by a single board having a ROM function or having the ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 2020 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. Also, RO
When the sub-board 2020 is composed of a single board having the M function or the ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 200 is on the sub-board to be used according to the type of memory used as the CG ROM. The circuit may be provided with a switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit, or a switching means for switching the information of the circuit on the sub-board to be used according to the type of the memory.

Further, in the present embodiment, various storage means (sub-main ROM 2050, CGROM 206)
0, built-in VRAM2370, SDRAM2500) and the corresponding control circuit, the magnitude relationship of the data communication speed is determined by the built-in VRAM2370> SDRAM2500.
> Sub-main ROM 2050 ≈ CGROM 2060. That is, in this embodiment,
The communication speed between the built-in VRAM 2370 and various circuits in the display control circuit 2300 is the fastest, followed by the communication speed between the SDRAM 2500 and the display control circuit 2300. Then, the communication speed between the sub-main ROM 2050 and the host control circuit 2100, and C.
The communication speed between the GROM 2060 and the display control circuit 2300 is the slowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that of the present embodiment, and the communication speed between each storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different. May all be the same.

Here, possible configurations of the various storage means described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the storage means for storing information about image data (compressed (encoded) image data) is information about transparency data (alpha table described later) that can be used when setting transparency for image data. A configuration example that is the same as the storage means (CGROM2060) has been described. That is, "
A configuration example in which the "first information storage means" is physically the same as the "second information storage means" has been described.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "first information storage means" is "second.
It may be composed of a storage means (storage medium) physically different from the "information storage means".

Further, the "information storage means" as used herein means not only a storage means such as CGROM2060, but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, and the like. good. Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" may be different data storage areas or different tables in the same storage means. Further, the mode may be stored in different register addresses. That is, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification is different not only when the storage means (storage medium) are physically different, but also when they are physically the same storage means (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, it also includes the case where the data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) are different in the storage means.

The meaning of the above-mentioned "information storage means" in the present specification is the above-mentioned "third information storage means" (SDRAM2500) and "fourth information storage means" (built-in VRAM2370).
) Is also applicable. Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" to the "fourth information storage means" may be composed of physically different storage means (storage media), or the "first information storage means" to. The "fourth information storage means" may be composed of different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" are configured in one storage means (CGROM2060) with different data areas, and the "third information storage means" is used. , A storage means (CG) including a "first information storage means" and a "second information storage means".
It is composed of a storage means (SDRAM2500) that is physically different from the ROM 2060), and also has "
The "fourth information storage means" is a storage means physically different from the storage means (CGROM2060) including the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" and the "third information storage means" (SDRAM2500). Although an example of configuration with (built-in VRAM2370) has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. Whether the "information storage means" is composed of a data area or a storage means, and how the combination of the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means is used. It can be appropriately set according to, for example, the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the game machine. For example, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" to the "third information storage means" are configured by different data areas in one storage means, and the "fourth information storage means" is the "fourth information storage means". 1 Information storage means "
-It may be configured by the storage means physically different from the storage means including the "third information storage means".

[1-2-5. Voice / LED control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 shows the internal circuit configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200, as well as the voice / LE.
It is a block diagram which shows the connection relationship between D control circuit 2200 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit part. In FIG. 11, for the sake of simplicity, the illustration of the relay board and the like provided between the voice / LED control circuit 2200 and various peripheral devices and circuit units is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 includes an LSI (Large-Scale Integr).
ation) It includes an interface 2210, a memory interface 2220, a digital audio interface 2230, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, a sound lamp control module 2260, a main generator 2270, and a multi-effector 2280. Voice / LED control circuit 2200
The connection relationship of each part in the inside is as follows.

In the voice / LED control circuit 2200, the sound lamp control module 2260
Is connected to a memory interface 2220, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, a main generator 2270 and a multi-effect unit 2280. Further, the command register 2250 is a sound lamp control module 2260.
Besides, it is connected to the LSI interface 2210. Also, the main generator 22
70 is a memory interface 22 in addition to the sound lamp control module 2260.
It is connected to 20 and the multi-effect unit 2280. Further, the multi-effect unit 2280 is connected to the memory interface 2220 and the digital audio interface 2230 in addition to the sound lamp control module 2260 and the main generator 2270.

Next, the configuration of each part in the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described.

The LSI interface 2210 includes a host control circuit 2100 and a command register 22.
It is an interface circuit used when input / output operation of a control signal or the like (for example, sound request, LED request, etc.) is performed with 50. That is, the command register 2
The 250 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 via the LSI interface 2210.

The memory interface 2220 is an interface circuit used when input / output operations such as voice data are performed between the sub-main ROM 2050 and each of the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effect unit 2280.

The digital audio interface 2230 is an interface circuit used when an audio signal or the like is output from the multi-effect unit 2280 to the speaker 24. Further, the digital audio interface 2230 outputs an audio input signal to the multi-effect unit 2280.

The peripheral interface 2240 is an interface circuit used when input / output of a lamp signal or the like (LED data or the like described later) is performed between the lamp group 25 and the sound lamp control module 2260. Also, the peripheral interface 2240
The physical system (SPI) when data is output to the LED driver included in the lamp group 25.
As channels), three physical systems are provided. In this embodiment, as described later, two physical systems (physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and physical system 1 (SPI channel 1)) are used.

The command register 2250 is composed of a large number of registers (for example, a large number of voice control registers) accessed from the host control circuit 2100. The command register 2250 sets the function control of the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effect unit 2280. Further, the command register 2250 is used for each interface (LSI interface 2210, memory interface 2220, digital audio interface 2230, peripheral interface 2240).
Also set the operating conditions of.

It should be noted that each register constituting the command register 2250 has an IC (Integrated Circu).
It) is installed, and each register is configured by a memory chip whose operation is stabilized by memory access control. When registers having such a configuration are used, the load on the signal bus to which each register is connected is reduced, so by increasing the number of memory chips (registers),
The capacity per memory module (capacity of the command register 2250) can be easily increased.

The sound lamp control module 2260 comprehensively controls the voice reproduction operation and the like, and controls the operation of each component (each block) in the voice / LED control circuit 2200 according to the setting contents of the command register 2250. .. Sound lamp control module 2260
As shown in FIG. 11, the simple access controller 2260a and the sequencer 226
It has 0b, a lamp control unit 2260c, and a peripheral control unit 2260d.

The simple access controller 2260a is a circuit unit that collectively processes commands.
The sequencer 2260b has various sequencers (automatic reproduction function units) for controlling automatic reproduction operations such as lamp lighting and voice. Then, each sequencer controls various operations according to a timer and step conditions (for example, conditions set for each step process during sequence reproduction such as LED animation and voice described later).

The lamp control unit 2260c calculates the set luminance value in all channels (8 channels) in which the LED data described later can be set, and transmits the calculation result to the outside (LED driver). Further, the peripheral control unit 2260d is a lamp control unit 2260c.
Physical transmission control is performed when transmitting the calculation result data output from the LED driver to the LED driver.

The main generator 2270 is a circuit unit that generates an audio signal. Specifically, the main generator 2270 acquires predetermined voice data stored in the CGROM 2060 based on the control signal input from the sound lamp control module 2260, and uses the acquired voice data as a predetermined voice signal. Convert to. This main generator 2270
Decoder 2270a that reproduces compressed data divided into reproduction channels CH1 to CH32
And the channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) that adjusts the volume, and the decoder 227.
It includes a channel mix unit 2270c that mixes the reproduced sound of 0a, and a remix unit 2270d that executes a final mixing operation.

The multi-effect unit 2280 has a mixer that synthesizes an audio signal input from the main generator 2270 and an audio input signal input from the digital audio interface 2230, and various effectors for giving various acoustic effects to the audio. Then, the multi-effector 2280 transmits the audio signal synthesized by the mixer, the output signal from the effector, and the like via the digital audio interface 2230 to the speaker 2.
Output to 4.

FIG. 12 is a drawing illustrating an output signal of the voice / LED control circuit. CGROM206
In 0, a maximum of 8192 types of sequence code groups and a maximum of 8192 types of SAC data groups are stored. The sequence code and SAC data are specified by the sequence code number and SAC number having a length of ¹³ bits, respectively, and have a relationship of 8192 = 213.

In the case of this embodiment, 16 sequences (SQ0 to SQ0 to) that operate in parallel as the sequencer 2260b.
SQ15) is provided, and four series (SAC0 to SAC3) operating in parallel are provided as the simple accelerator controller 2260a. Corresponding to this configuration, the command register 2250 is provided with a voice control register RGj2 for controlling sequencers (SQ0 to SQ15) and a voice control register RGj1 for controlling SAC (SAC0 to SAC3).

Then, when the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor writes the SAC number and its attached information to the predetermined voice control register RGj1 for SAC control based on the transmission operation of the voice command, the corresponding simple The access controller 2260a starts to function, and the simple access controller 2260a writes a group of setting data specified by the SAC number to a group of voice control registers instructed by the SAC data. In the present embodiment, complicated setting operation can be completed by transmitting one SAC number and its attached information.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor inputs the sequence code number and its attached information to the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer 2260b (SQ0 to SQ7) based on the transmission operation of the voice command. Upon writing, the corresponding sequencer SQi starts functioning and writes the set of setting data specified by the sequence code to the set of voice control registers specified by the sequence code.

Here, in the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7), a plurality of (up to 8) sequence code numbers and loop information for the production of each sequence code number are stored in the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for any sequencer SQi. Can be entered. Therefore, for example, for the sequencer SQi, n + 1 sequence code numbers (X0, X1).
, ..., Xn) is specified, the setting operation of the sequence code number X0 → the setting operation of the sequence code number X1 → ... The setting operation of the sequence code number Xn is executed in order. Therefore, the audio effect corresponding to the setting operation is executed.

Further, since loop information such as the number of repetitions can be specified for each sequence code number, the voice effect specified by the sequence code number is repeated a predetermined number of times and then specified by the next sequence code number. Can be migrated.

As described above, the data to be set in the sequencer SQi is diverse, and it is necessary to appropriately set these sequence code numbers and accompanying data in the voice control register RGj2 for sequencer control. Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire sequence code number and accompanying data are divided in 1-byte units, and the divided 1-byte data and the register address of the sequencer control register RGj2 in which the 1-byte data should be set are divided. A set of SAC data is secured in CGROM2060 (hereinafter, this is referred to as sequencer activation SAC data).

Then, the host control circuit 2100 activates the simple access controller 2260a by designating a predetermined SAC number in the voice control register RGj1 for SAC control. Here, of course, the SAC number specifies the SAC data for starting the sequencer. Then, based on the operation of the SAC (Simple Access Controller), necessary data is expanded in the sequencer control register RGj2. Therefore, the sequencer SQ
The setting operation of the activation data of 0 to SQ15 is easy.

By the way, as described above with respect to FIG. 12, a plurality of operation units (sequence steps) separated by a step end code (FFFEH) are described in a group of sequence codes specified by one sequence code number. After all, after executing all the plurality of sequence steps specified by one sequence code number, the plurality of sequence steps specified by the next sequence code number will be executed.

Since the standby time can be set for each sequencer, the first sequence step (writing operation of a group of setting data) is started after the standby time indicated by the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor. , Step end code (FFFE
When the execution up to H) is executed, the next group of setting data is further written to the group of voice control registers after the waiting time. As the waiting time, a single time information can be set for each sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7). For example, in the preceding sequence step, the waiting time applied to the subsequent sequence steps is set. By doing so, the waiting time for each sequence step can be set arbitrarily.

Further, to continue the explanation of the internal configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200, as shown in FIG. 11, the output signals of 6 channels of the channel mix unit 2270c (mixed L0, mixed R0).
, Mixed L1, Mixed R1, Mixed SUB0, Mixed SUB1) are subjected to digital filter processing based on the operation parameters specified in the predetermined voice control registers of the command register 2250 in the multi-effect unit 2280, and then the total volume 2290 (TV0). ~ T
It is supplied to V3) and amplified based on the total volume value TV.

The total volume value TV is defined by the operation parameter written in the corresponding voice control register. As described above, this operation parameter is, in principle, a setting switch (hardware) operated by a staff member in this embodiment. It is specified based on the wear switch). However,
When the player operates the volume switch (screen operation) during the game operation (however, while waiting for the audio effect), the total volume TV is specified (changed) based on the set value. note that,
When the player operates the volume switch, the total volume TV is based on the set value.
Channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) in place of or in addition to being specified
) May be specified (changed).

[1-2-5-1. Speaker volume control]
Next, the volume control of each speaker 24 executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit.

The sounds such as game sounds output from each speaker 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) are the audio signals of the total volume TVs 0 to 3 output to all channels and the individual audio signals of all channels. By multiplying the audio signal for each playback channel output to the channel, the volume is controlled by the volume transition operation in which the volume value of the audio signal is gradually transitioned.

The "audio signal" has volume information (for example, information such as wattage), and can be simply called "volume". For example, in this specification, "audio signal for each reproduction channel" may be referred to as "volume for each reproduction channel".

The audio signals of the total volume TVs 0 to 3 are the audio signal by the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch and the user volume control 2 by the volume setting screen.
Total value of audio signal output by 820 and debug volume control at the time of debugging 28
It is defined by multiplying it with the audio signal output by 30. Volume control 2810 by hardware switch, user volume control 2820 by volume setting screen
And the host control circuit 2100 that executes the debug volume control 2830 during debugging.
Corresponds to the "first volume control means" of the present invention.

Further, the volume of each reproduction channel is obtained by multiplying the audio signal of the primary volume and the audio signal of the secondary volume. The audio signal of the primary volume is the audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840 affected by the volume adjustment and the audio signal output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 not affected by the volume adjustment. It is defined by the total value. In the first reproduction channel primary control 2840, for example, a control for changing the volume of a normal game sound (that is, an audio signal (hereinafter the same)) is performed based on an operation of changing the volume by a player or the like. Will be. The second playback channel primary control 2850 is a control that outputs a specific game sound (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) at a constant volume regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Is done. This constant volume may always be the maximum volume. In this way, the second playback channel primary control 2850, which is not affected by the volume adjustment, is controlled so that a specific game sound is output at a constant volume, so that it can be specified only in a specific playback channel, not the whole. It is possible to execute control to keep the volume of the game sound constant. Further, the audio signal of the secondary volume is a volume incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number, and is output by the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880. First playback channel primary control 284
0, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850, and the host control circuit 2100 for executing the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data correspond to the "second volume control means" of the present invention.

In this way, the sound output from each speaker 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) is the volume of the total volume TV0 to 3, the volume of the primary volume which is the volume of each playback channel, and the secondary. Since it is defined by multiplying the volume of the volume, it is possible to give diversity to the volume of the game sound. In particular, since the volume of the total volume TVs 0 to 3 is also defined by the volume output by the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and at the time of debugging. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of.

In addition, regarding the volume of normal game sounds, the volume can be changed based on the operation of changing the volume by the player or the like, but specific sounds such as error sounds and alarm sounds at the time of illegal acts are specified. As for the game sound, a constant volume is output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 regardless of whether or not the operation for changing the volume is performed. Therefore, it is not possible to hide the occurrence of an error or an illegal act, and it is possible to enhance security.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume control 28 by a hardware switch 28.
10 has, for example, three stages of large, medium, and small. In addition, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen has 7 stages, and [small] = [1], [1] in conjunction with the hardware switch.
Medium] = "4], [Large] = "7].

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the volume of a specific sound such as an error sound can be maintained only by the control by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850. It is possible to easily perform volume control such as changing the volume according to the volume adjustment for other normal sounds while maintaining the volume.
Regarding the processing by the host control circuit 2100 when the volume is adjusted,
It will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90.

[1-2-5-2. Connection configuration between digital audio power amplifier and speakers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a connection configuration between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 provided in the built-in relay board 2600 and its peripheral circuits and the speaker 24 will be described. FIG. 14 is a connection configuration diagram between the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24. In FIG. 14, the speaker 24 is a built-in relay board 26 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion.
Indicates a state in which it is not connected to 00.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the speaker box 24a provided with the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

The built-in relay board 2600 includes a digital audio power amplifier 2620 and an LC circuit 26.
30 and a connection terminal group 2640 including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal), and
Two resistors 2650, 2660, a capacitor 2670, and a NOT circuit (logic circuit) 26
Has 80 and.

The digital audio power amplifier 2620 amplifies the input audio signal (audio data), outputs the amplified audio signal to the speaker 24, and drives the speaker 24. The LC circuit 2630 is composed of a resonance circuit including a coil and a capacitor. Also, NO
The T circuit 2680 is a logic circuit that inverts the level of the input signal and outputs it.

The clock input terminal (MCK) and data input terminal (SDATA) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200. The clock signal (master clock signal) output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the clock input terminal (MCK) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and the audio / LED is input to the data input terminal (SDATA). The audio signal (audio data) output from the control circuit 2200 is input.

Further, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the built-in relay board 26 via the LC circuit 2630, respectively.
It is connected to the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of 00. In the present embodiment, an example in which two output terminals of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the present invention may be appropriately changed according to the function and specifications of the speaker 24. Can be done.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has a mute terminal (MUTE: audio output control terminal). When the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has a first output terminal (1st output terminal (amplitude value)).
The output of the audio signal from the OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) is stopped, or
It has a function to make these output terminals grounded via high resistance (hereinafter referred to as mute function). That is, in the digital audio power amplifier 2620, when the level of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the built-in relay board 2600 are the first. It has a function to generate a state in which the output of the audio signal to the connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped.

On the other hand, the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal (MUTE) is HIGH.
When it is a level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has a first output terminal (O).
The audio signal is output from the UTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2).

The third connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 via the resistor 2660. Further, the output terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 is connected to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. The signal wiring between the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the resistor 2660 is the resistor 2.
It is connected to the power supply voltage (+ 5V) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via 650. Further, the signal wiring between the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 and the resistor 2660 is connected (grounded) to the grounded (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the capacitor 2670. Further, the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the ground (GND) terminal.

As shown in FIG. 14, the speaker 24 is attached to a speaker box 24a composed of a wooden frame. Further, the speaker box 24a is provided with a connection terminal group 24b including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal). And the speaker box 24
The first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of a are connected to the speaker 24 via signal wiring. Further, the third connection terminal (specific connection terminal) of the speaker box 24a is electrically connected to the fourth connection terminal by the signal wiring W1.

As shown in FIG. 14, the harness 3000 is configured by bundling four signal wirings. Then, one of the four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings is connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600, respectively. On the other hand, the other four connection terminals (fifth connection terminal to eighth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings are the speaker box 2.
It is connected to each of the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of 4a. That is, the built-in relay board 26
The harness 300 is located between the first connection terminal of 00 and the first connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.
Connected by signal wiring between the 1st connection terminal and the 5th connection terminal in 0, the built-in relay board 260
Harness 3000 is located between the 2nd connection terminal of 0 and the 2nd connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.
It is connected by the signal wiring between the second connection terminal and the sixth connection terminal. Further, the harness 3 is located between the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the third connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.
The built-in relay board 2 is connected by signal wiring between the 3rd connection terminal and the 7th connection terminal in 000.
The harness 30 is located between the fourth connection terminal of the 600 and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.
It is connected by signal wiring between the 4th connection terminal and the 8th connection terminal in 00. As a result, the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

The number of signal wirings included in the harness 3000 is not limited to four, and may be appropriately changed according to, for example, the specifications of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, the connection configuration between the two, and the like. The harness 3000 has at least a signal wiring for connecting the output terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, and a signal wiring for grounding the mute terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 via the speaker box 24a. Should be included.

As described above, when the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24 are connected via the harness 3000, the first output terminal (OUTM1) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is connected.
The second output terminal (OUTM2) is connected to the speaker 24 via the harness 3000. In addition, the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is
It is grounded via the NOT circuit 2680, the harness 3000, and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.

As a result, when the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620) via the harness 3000, the LOW level voltage signal is input to the NOT circuit 2680, so that the digital audio power amplifier 2620 The level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of is the HIGH level. In this case, the first output terminal (OUTM1) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620.
And the audio signal is output to the speaker 24 from the second output terminal (OUTM2).

On the other hand, the speaker 24 is a built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 262).
If it is not connected to 0), the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is in an open state. In this case, since the power supply voltage (+ 5V) is input to the NOT circuit 2680, the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 becomes the LOW level, and the digital audio power amplifier. The above-mentioned mute function of 2620 is activated.

That is, the speaker 24 is a built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2).
If it is out of 620), the audio signal from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 to the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600. A state is generated in which the output of is stopped. As a result, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (output terminal) and the built-in relay board 2600
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a resonance phenomenon between the first and second connection terminals of the above, and prevent the occurrence of a malfunction such as a failure of the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 and the voice / LED control circuit 2
Digital audio power amplifier 26 regardless of software control by 200
Twenty mute functions can be activated. Therefore, for example, in a situation where the speaker 24 is disconnected from the built-in relay board 2600, the host control circuit 2100 and the voice / LE
Even if the D control circuit 2200 recognizes that the output stop control of the audio signal is performed, the audio signal may be erroneously output due to a bug (defect) in the program, or the speaker 2
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a structure in which the gaming board cannot be replaced unless the 4 is removed from the harness 3000, the speaker 24 and the harness 3000 are mistakenly replaced after the replacement of the gaming board is completed.
Even if a situation occurs such as when the door is closed and the audio output is started without connecting to, the mute function of the above-mentioned digital audio power amplifier 2620 operates in terms of hardware. In this case, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be reliably protected, and the safety of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the harness 3000 and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a. It is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600. In such a configuration, the signal level of the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is LO.
When it is W, the signal level of the 4th connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is measured to determine whether or not this factor is due to the grounding of the 4th connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600. Digital audio power amplifier 262
The digital output operation from 0 can be managed more accurately.

[1-2-6. Display control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the display control circuit 2300 and a connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units.

As shown in FIG. 15, the display control circuit 2300 includes a memory controller 2310, a command memory 2320, a command parser 2330, a moving image decoder 2340, a still image decoder 2350, an SDRAM controller 2360, a built-in VRAM 2370, and a first unit.
Display controller 2380, second display controller 2390, and 3D
(Dimension) A geometry engine 2400 and a rendering engine 2410 are provided. The connection relationship of each part in the display control circuit 2300 and the connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuits are as follows.

In the display control circuit 2300, the memory controller 2310 is the command parser 2
It is connected to 330, a moving image decoder 2340 and a still image decoder 2350. In addition to the memory controller 2310, the command parser 2330 is connected to the command memory 2320, the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. The video decoder 2340 includes a memory controller 2310 and a command parser 2330.
Besides, it is connected to the SDRAM controller 2360. The still image decoder 2350 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330.

Further, in the display control circuit 2300, the SDRAM controller 2360 has a built-in VRAM 2370 and a first display controller 2380 in addition to the video decoder 2340.
And connected to the second display controller 2390. The built-in VRAM 2370 is connected to the first display controller 2380, the second display controller 2390, and the rendering engine 2410, in addition to the still image decoder 2350 and the SDRAM controller 2360. In addition, the 3D geometry engine 2400 has a command parser 2
Besides 330, it is connected to the rendering engine 2410.

The SDRAM 2500 is a memory controller 2310 in the display control circuit 2300.
And connected to the SDRAM controller 2360. Further, the CGROM board 2040 is
It is connected to the memory controller 2310 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the command memory 2320 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the display device 16 is connected to the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 in the display control circuit 2300.

Next, the configuration of each part in the display control circuit 2300 will be described.

The memory controller 2310 mainly controls communication between various external memories (CGROM board 2040 and SDRAM 2500) and the display control circuit 2300. For example, the memory controller 2310 performs processing such as transmission / reception of an address designation signal of an external memory to be controlled, memory read / busy management, and data stored at a designated address for various memories (effect data). , Command data, etc.).

The command memory 2320 is a built-in memory for storing a command list. In addition to the command memory 2320, the command list includes the SDRAM 2500 and the CGROM board 2.
It can also be stored in 040 (CGROM2060).

The command parser 2330 uses the designated memory (command memory 2320, SDRAM).
Get the command list from 2500 or CGROM2060). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the type of memory (command memory 2320,) in which the command list is arranged in the system control register (not shown) in the display control circuit 2300 by the host control circuit 2100.
SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060) and its starting address are set. Then, the command parser 2330 accesses the start address in the memory specified in the system control register (not shown) and acquires the command list.

Further, the command parser 2330 analyzes the acquired command list to generate a specific control code, and outputs the control code to the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. In this embodiment, each image processing module in the display control circuit 2300 operates based on the control code output by the command parser 2330.

The moving image decoder 2340 decodes the moving image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the moving image decoder 2340 outputs the decoded moving image data to the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM). Video decoder 2
The moving image data (decoding result) output from the 340 is stored in the movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500.

The still image decoder 2350 decodes the still image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the still image decoder 2350 outputs the decoded still image data to the built-in VRAM 2370. The still image data (decoding result) output from the still image decoder 2350 is temporarily stored in a sprite buffer described later provided in the built-in VRAM 2370.

The SDRAM controller 2360 Rs the decoded video data and still image data.
Storage processing in AM, built-in VRAM2370 and CGROM board 2040 or SDRAM2
It is a controller that controls operations such as image data transfer processing with and from 500.

The built-in VRAM 2370 operates as a work RAM for executing various processes such as a decoding process and a rendering process in the drawing control process by the display control circuit 2300.
Further, the built-in VRAM 2370 and C performed in each processing process in the drawing control processing described later.
In the image data transfer process between the GROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500.
Various image data are temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM 2370.

Each of the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 acquires a rendering result (drawing result) generated by the rendering engine 2410, and outputs the rendering result to the display device 16. As a result, the display device 1
A predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of 6. When two display controllers are provided as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one display control circuit 2300 (
With one chip), two screens can be provided on the display device 16 and each screen can be controlled independently.

The 3D geometry engine 2400 performs a process of converting 3D information into 2D information (projection conversion process) based on a control code input from the command parser 2330, and an fin conversion such as enlargement, reduction, rotation, and movement of a figure. Performs (graphic conversion) processing. Then, the 3D geometry engine 2400 outputs the result of the conversion process to the rendering engine 2410.

The rendering engine 2410 refers to a texture source (SDRAM 2500 in this embodiment) in which stretched still image data and moving image data are stored, and performs rendering (drawing) processing on the image data. Then, the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to the rendering target (in this embodiment, the built-in VRAM2370 or the SDRAM 2500).

The term "rendering" as used herein means editing data decoded according to specified information such as enlargement / reduction and rotation of a moving image (in this embodiment, information output from the 3D geometry engine 2400). It is to be. Further, the "rendering engine" referred to here also includes, for example, a "rasterizer" and a "pixel shader". Therefore, in the rendering engine 2410, similar to the pixel shader, the ARGB value (A: alpha value indicating transparency (opacity), R: luminance value of red component, G: green component) for image data in pixel units. The calculation process of the luminance value of B: the luminance value of the blue component) is also performed.

[1-2-6-1. Connection configuration between display control circuit and CGROM]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration that can deal with different types of CGROMs (NOR type or NAND type) connected to the display control circuit 2300. Here, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the display control circuit 2300 provided in the sub-board 2020.
The connection configuration between the peripheral circuit and the CGROM mounted on the CGROM board will be described.

FIG. 16 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040a when the CGROM is a NOR-type CGROM2060a (NOR-type flash memory). Further, FIG. 17 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040b when the CGROM is a NAND type CGROM2060b (NAND type flash memory). Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the CGROM board is detached from the sub-board 2020 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion, but in reality, both boards are connected via a board-to-board connector. Be connected.

(1) Configuration of sub-board First, the internal configuration of the sub-board 2020 will be described. As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 16 and 17, the configuration of the sub-board 2020 when the NOR-type CGROM 2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a is such that the NAND-type CG is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b.
It is the same as that when ROM2060b is mounted.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the sub-board 2020 is provided with a display control circuit 2300, and bidirectional balanced transceivers 3010 and AND are provided as peripheral circuits thereof.
A circuit 302 (AND gate) is provided. Further, the sub-board 2020 is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3030 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the display control circuit 2300 via various buses.

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has four input / output terminals (terminal A in FIG. 16).
It has 0 to terminal A3) and the other four input / output terminals (terminals B0 to terminal B3 in FIG. 16) connected to each of the four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to terminal A3). Further, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has input / output terminals A0 to input / output terminals A3 and input / output terminals B.
It has two control terminals (terminal OE and terminal DIR in FIG. 16) for switching and controlling the communication direction of the signal between 0 and the input / output terminal B3.

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has input / output terminals A0 to input / output terminals A according to the combination of the signal levels of the voltage signals applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR, respectively.
3 and the communication direction of the signal between the input / output terminal B0 and the input / output terminal B3 is switched. Thereby, even if the communication direction (communication operation) is inconsistent for some reason, the safety of the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be ensured. The communication direction switching control operation in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 will be described in detail later. Further, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 used in the present embodiment is
It is also possible to support a system having two power supplies of 3.3V and 5V.

The display control circuit 2300 has four input / output terminals (terminals GMA31 / GR in FIG. 16).
B3 to terminal GMA28 / GRB0) are provided. This input / output combined terminal GMA31 / GR
The CGROM2 of the B3 to input / output combined terminal GMA28 / GRB0 has a NOR CGROM.
When it is 060a, it acts as an output terminal of the address bus, and when the CGROM is a NAND type CGROM2060b, it acts as an input terminal of a ready / busy signal.
Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with 26 output terminals (terminals GMA27 to GMA2 in FIG. 16) that act as output terminals for data related to the address of the data storage area in the CGROM (address designation data, etc.). Will be.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 has two CG memory chip enable output terminals (FIG. 1).
Terminal GCE_0, terminal GCE_1) in 6 are provided. In this embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has two CG memory chip enable output terminals (GCE_0, GCE_).
1: It has two memory spaces corresponding to (specific output terminals), and information such as a memory type, a bus width, and an access timing is set in each memory space. However, in the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has a configuration that cannot be supported (used) when the ROM in the synchronous mode and the ROM in the asynchronous mode are mixed.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with a plurality of data bus input terminals for acquiring image data (compressed data of moving images / still images) from the CG ROM via the data bus.

The electrical connection of the components provided on the sub-board 2020 is as follows.

Display control circuit 2300 input / output combined terminal GMA31 / GRB3 to input / output combined terminal GM
The A28 / GRB0 is a bidirectional balanced transceiver 30 as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17.
It is connected to each of the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminal B3 of 10. The input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, respectively. That is, the input / output combined terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output combined terminals GMA28 / GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 via the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively. To.

Further, the output terminal GMA27 to the output terminal GMA2 of the display control circuit 2300 are the terminal group 30.
The CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1 and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1 are connected to the 9th connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal of 30, respectively, and the terminal group 30
It is connected to the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal of 30 respectively. Further, the plurality of data bus input terminals of the display control circuit 2300 are respectively connected to the corresponding connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030.

The control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is connected to the fifth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, and the control terminal OE is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 302. One input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE.
Connected to _1. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 of the sub board 2020 are connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal provided on the sub board 2020, and the eighth connection terminal is connected.
The connection terminal is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided on the sub-board 2020.

(2) Configuration of CGROM Board (NOR Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM board 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM2060a is mounted will be described with reference to FIG.

When the NOR type CGROM2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a, the CGR
The OM board 2040a is provided with a NOR type CGROM2060a, various signal wirings (buses), and a terminal group 3110 including a plurality of connection terminals connected to the CGROM2060a via various buses.

The first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a are connected to the CGROM2060a.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, since the CGROM 2060a is a NOR type flash memory (random access type flash memory), the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the ninth connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are used. The connection terminal is connected to an input terminal (not shown) of the address bus of the CGROM 2060a. Further, the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the CG memory chip enable input terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 2060a, and the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are CGROM of the display control circuit 2300.
CG used when acquiring image data (compressed video / still image data) from 2060a
It is connected to the data output terminal of ROM 2060a.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a is connected to the eighth connection terminal via the signal wiring W2, and the eighth connection terminal is CG.
It is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided on the ROM board 2040a. That is, CGR
When the OM2060a is a NOR type flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is grounded via the signal wiring W2. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040a.

The number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 is the CGROM provided on the sub-board 2020.
It is the same as the number of connection terminals of the terminal group 3030 for board connection. And the CGROM board 20
When connecting (mounting) 40a to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a is connected to the connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a.
The connection terminals, ..., 37th connection terminal, ... Are connected to the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., the 37th connection terminal, ... Of the sub-board 2020, respectively.

(3) Configuration of CGROM Board (NAND Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM board 2040b on which the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted will be described with reference to FIG. The CGROM substrate 2040b shown in FIG. 17
The same configuration as the CGROM substrate 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM2060a shown in FIG. 16 is mounted is designated by the same reference numeral.

When the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b, CG
The ROM board 2040b is provided with a NAND type CGROM2060b and a transistor circuit 312 as a peripheral circuit thereof. Further, on the CGROM board 2040b,
Various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3110 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the CGROM 2060b via various buses are provided.

The first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the drain terminal of the transistor circuit 312. The gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312 is connected to the CGROM 2060b, and the source terminal is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b. That is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal are connected to the CGROM 2060b via the transistor circuit 312.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, the CGROM2060b is a NAND flash memory (
Since it is a sequential access type flash memory), the transistor circuit 312
The gate terminal of, that is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 is CGRO.
It is connected to a ready / busy output terminal (not shown) provided on M2060b.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal via the signal wiring W3, and is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal. The terminal is connected to a power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b. That is, when the CGROM 2060b is a NAND flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal via the signal wiring W3.

Further, the eighth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b.

Further, the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the CGROM2060b. At this time, the 9th connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal are C.
It is connected to an input terminal (not shown) for data relating to an address provided in GROM2060b, and the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal are connected to a CG memory chip enable input terminal provided in CGROM2060b. Further, the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are connected to the data output terminal (not shown) of the CGROM2060b used when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the CGROM2060b. To.

Even when the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b, the number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is the same.
The number is the same as the number of connection terminals of the terminal group 3030 for connecting the CGROM board provided on the sub-board 2020. Then, when the CGROM board 2040b is connected (mounted) to the sub board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the connection terminal of the sub board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 17, CGR
The first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., the 37th connection terminal, ... Of the OM board 2040b are connected to the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., the 37th connection terminal, ... Of the sub-board 2020, respectively. To.

[1-2-6-2. Communication operation between display control circuit and CGROM]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, the operation when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the CGROM will be described. Note that FIG. 18 is a truth table showing the correspondence between the input signal and the output signal in the AND circuit 302 provided on the sub-board 2020, and FIG. 19 is a bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 provided on the sub-board 2020. The signal level applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR in
It is a truth table showing the correspondence with the communication direction.

(1) Operation of AND circuit and bidirectional balance transceiver As shown in FIG. 18, the AND circuit 302 has a HIGH level signal (HIGH level signal) at both input terminals.
The control terminal O of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 only when the voltage signal) is input.
A HIGH level signal is output to E, and a LOW level signal is output to the control terminal OE under other input conditions.

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has a LOW control terminal OE as shown in FIG.
When a level signal (voltage signal) is input and a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR, the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are input.
Acts as an output terminal, and input / output terminals B0 to input / output terminals B3 act as input terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is the direction from the display control circuit 2300 toward the CGROM.

Further, in the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, when a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE and a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR, the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are input / output. The terminal A3 acts as an input terminal, and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminal B3 act as output terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is the direction from the CGROM to the display control circuit 2300.

When the combination of the signal level input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and the signal level input to the control terminal DIR is a combination other than the above (HIGH to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010). When a level signal is input), the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are in the HIGH impedance state (“Z” in FIG. 19). ), That is, the state equivalent to the open state, and the display control circuit 2300 and CGRO
No communication is performed between M.

(2) Communication operation between the display control circuit and the CGROM (NOR type) Here, first, the CGROM board 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM2060a is mounted.
Is connected (mounted) to the sub-board 2020.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the LOW level signal is output to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010. The level signal is input. The signal levels of the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 are set in the hardware initialization process (see FIG. 63 described later).

In the present embodiment, the amplitude values of the output signals from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals) preset by the sub control circuit 200 differ depending on the type of the CGROM, so that the display control circuit The amplitude value of the signal output from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 provided in the 2300 changes depending on the type of storage means. However, the mode in which "the amplitude value of the output signal changes according to the type of CGROM" is not limited to this mode. As described in the modification 7 described later, the display control circuit 2300 detects the type of the connected storage means, and based on the detection result, from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals). The amplitude value of the output signal may be set.

Further, the sub-board 2 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is connected.
As shown in FIG. 16, the fifth connection terminal of 020 is grounded via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a and the signal wiring W2, so that a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040a equipped with the NOR type CGROM 2060a is connected to the sub board 2020, the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are used as output terminals as shown in FIG. It works and I / O terminal B0 ~
The input / output terminal B3 acts as an input terminal. That is, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 30
The communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060a in No. 10 is the direction from the display control circuit 2300 toward the CGROM 2060a.

In this case, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub board 2020 and the CGROM board 204
The signal wiring connected via the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of 0a can be used as an address bus, and the display control circuit 2300 normally performs the memory address designation operation for the NOR type CGROM2060a. Can be executed. As a result, the display control circuit 2
The 300 can directly specify an address via the address bus and perform a data read operation.

(3) Communication operation between the display control circuit and the CGROM (NAND type) Next, consider the case where the CGROM board 2040b on which the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub board 2020.

Also in this case, in this embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals CGE_0 and CGE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is used. Is input with a LOW level signal. That is, in this embodiment, the types of CGROM are NOR type and N.
In any of the AND types, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is a CGR.
Since it is connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal via the fifth connection terminal of the OM board 2040b and the signal wiring W3, a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040b equipped with the NAND type CGROM 2060b is connected to the sub board 2020, the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are used as input terminals as shown in FIG. It works and the input / output terminal B0
-The input / output terminal B3 acts as an output terminal. That is, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3
The communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and CGROM2060b in 010 is CGR.
The direction is from OM2060b toward the display control circuit 2300.

In this case, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub board 2020 and the CGROM board 204
The signal wiring connected via the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of 0b can be used as the communication wiring of the ready / busy signal. That is, in this case, the NAND type CGROM2
Display control circuit 2300 when reading data from 060b by sequential access method
The ready / busy signal referred to by CGROM 2060 can be transmitted to the display control circuit 2300. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 has a NAND type CGROM2.
The memory state (ready / busy state) acquisition operation can be normally executed for 060b.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the type of CGROM is changed, the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be normally executed without changing the configuration of the sub-board 2020. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, the optimum CGROM can be selected in consideration of data capacity, communication speed, price, and the like. Further, for example, when manufacturing a new pachinko gaming machine 1, the sub-board 2020 used in the pachinko gaming machine manufactured in the past is diverted from the conditions such as data capacity and communication speed, and only the type of CGROM is changed. Even in such cases, it can be easily dealt with. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CGROM can be selected according to the embodiment, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be selected.
Extensibility can be guaranteed.

Further, in the present embodiment, by using the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010,
The first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020, and the CGRO
The first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the M board 2040 can be used as data input / output combined terminals. In this case, the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 20
It is not necessary to separately provide the data input terminal and the output terminal corresponding to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the 40, and the space of the sub board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040 can be saved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is used.
The "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be switched according to the type of the CGROM. However, the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM as used herein means all aspects of transmission / reception of various information between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

For example, the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM referred to in the present specification.
Not only the transmission / reception mode between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM of the data (image data (compressed data of moving image / still image)) required for displaying the information related to the effect operation on the display device 16, but also in the CGROM. The transmission / reception mode when communicating the information specifying the address of the data stored in the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM, and the display control circuit 2
It means that the 300 includes a transmission / reception mode when receiving a ready / busy signal from the CGROM. The present invention is not limited to this, and the "communication mode" referred to in the present specification may mean only the communication mode of the portion where the transmission / reception mode of information changes according to the type of CGROM.

[2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the ordinary symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random values (for example, jackpot determination random value and symbol determination random value) are used from various counters (for example, a jackpot determination counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 20).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random values are stored by the special symbol start winning prize, and one condition is that various data such as random values are stored, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern). ) Is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. , And an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variation display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has occurred, the big hit game state control process for performing the big hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game state control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, a normal game state different from the big hit game state is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, the game state in which the "big hit" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as "normal game state") and the probability of being determined as "big hit" are A gaming state that increases from the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high probability gaming state") and a gaming state in which a special symbol start winning prize is easily obtained as a result of the normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "short-time gaming state"). ) And so on. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for symbol determination, etc.) extracted at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a random value for jackpot determination) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is called "holding", and the holding various data is called starting storage.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is suspended. The variable display of the special symbols is started in order. In the following, various data on the reserved special symbols are also referred to as "reserved balls".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first starting mouth winning and second starting mouth winning) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol starting prize. It is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the special symbol until. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a total of 8 of the 4 first special symbols and the 4 second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball has been won (whether or not the “big hit” has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on a determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 20). See the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning prize, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the normal hit is set. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variation display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "normal hit", a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of the above-mentioned various winnings, in particular, the possibility of winning the special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not obtained, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the game ball is paid out depending on the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as the extraction method of various random number values, a soft random number method that generates random number values within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random numbers may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. Figure 2
1 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a table.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the selection rate of the hit type (hereinafter referred to as “main symbol”) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the fluctuation time of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. (Variable display time) It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200. In the following description, the main C not shown in FIGS. 21 to 24.
The terms PU101 and main RAM103 are used, which are shown in FIG.

In explaining the probability of the jackpot shown in FIG. 21, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol from the counter for determining the jackpot, and the main R
With reference to the first special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown) stored in AM103,
The jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as "the jackpot determination of the first special symbol") is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol from the counter for determining the jackpot.
With reference to the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown) stored in the main RAM 103, the jackpot determination for the extracted jackpot determination random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol jackpot determination"). I do. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing" as in the big hit determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)” is set in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ) Relationship between the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data"). Is stipulated.

In this embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for a range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “high probability game state”. When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”. When the gaming state is the "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". In addition, in the time saving game state, the time saving number of times is also the main CPU1.
It is managed by 01, and the number of time reductions is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol changes once.

In the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined to be a normal hit (normal hit probability) in the normal hit determination is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state. for that reason,
In the time-saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric accessory 46 going from the closed state to the open state, that is, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. However, in the time-saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability as compared with the non-time-saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency at which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three aspects of the above three aspects may be combined.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF.
The main CP is in any of the normal game state, the probability change time-saving game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, and the time-saving game state in which the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON.
It is configured to be controlled by U101.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether the first special symbol is a jackpot or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether the second special symbol is a jackpot or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in a low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 for setting 1, about 1/290 for setting 2, and about 1/20 for setting 3. 1/280, setting 4 about 1/270, setting 5 about 2
It is 1/60, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 30 in setting 1.
1/2, setting 2 is about 1/29, setting 3 is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5
Is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is 0 to 65.
Since it is set as a fixed value in the range of 535, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the range of random numbers for jackpot determination, which is a fixed value (0).
~ 65535), the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218 in setting 1 and 22 in setting 2.
By setting 6 pieces, setting 3 to 234 pieces, setting 4 to 243 pieces, setting 5 to 252 pieces, and setting 6 to 262 pieces, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value. In addition, the number of jackpot determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, and 4 in setting.
24 pieces in, 25 pieces in setting 5, and 26 pieces in setting 6.

Further, also in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, and 280 minutes for setting 3. 1. Setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. In addition, a high-probability gaming state with a relatively high jackpot probability (probability change flag ON)
When, the jackpot probability for each setting value is 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, 1/28 for setting 3, 1/27 for setting 4, and 26 minutes for setting 5. 1. Setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, with respect to the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the range of random numbers for jackpot determination, which is a fixed value (0 to 65535).
), The number of jackpot judgment value data is 218 in setting 1, 226 in setting 2, and setting 3.
By setting 234 in, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high-probability gaming state, setting 1 is 21 pieces, setting 2 is 22 pieces, setting 3 is 23 pieces, and setting 4 is 2 pieces.
There are 4 pieces, 25 pieces in setting 5, and 26 pieces in setting 6.

It should be noted that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In the present embodiment, the set value has 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6, but it is not always necessary to be 6 stages, and any plurality of stages can be set arbitrarily.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is different when the set value is different.
Not limited to this, a common jackpot probability may be set for a plurality of set values. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 and The jackpot probability common to setting 6 (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the big hit determination random number which is a fixed value is set. By changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the method for differentiating the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this, and the jackpot judgment value is not limited to this. By making the number of data common to all settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218, which is common to all settings, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (big hit probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2. Range from 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), setting 3 is 0 to 6
The range of 1039 (big hit probability is 1/280), the range of 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability is 1/270), the range of 0 to 56679 in setting 5 (big hit probability is 1/260),
Setting 6 is in the range of 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101
By generating a random number for jackpot determination within a range corresponding to the set value, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the numerator (number of jackpot judgment value data)
Since the jackpot probability can be changed by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot judgment) that has more digits than the number of digits, the number of jackpot judgment value data is set according to the set value with the range of random numbers for jackpot judgment as a fixed value. Compared to the changing method, it is possible to set the jackpot probability for each set value in detail.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit judgment value data is set to all. It is not always necessary to make it common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 30).
In setting 2, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 219, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, it is set to 1/0). , The number of jackpot judgment value data is 220, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot determination value data is 221.
The range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment is in the range of 0 to 59669 (the jackpot probability is about 1/270).
In setting 5, the number of jackpot determination value data is 222, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260), and in setting 6, the jackpot determination value data is set. The range (width) of the jackpot judgment value data and the jackpot judgment random number is set to the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even if both are changed according to the set value, the jackpot probability for each set value is higher than the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the jackpot judgment random number as a fixed value. It is possible to make detailed settings.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the above-mentioned total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 in the setting check process (see FIG. 42) of step S72 and step S82 described later. , In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number is set as the set value. It may be checked whether or not it is within the corresponding range, and / and whether or not the number of jackpot determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number or / and the number of jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (step to be described later). (When it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[3-2. Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 22
In the example shown in, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 22 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability) based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. 25.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 25.
It is determined to be either 0%) or Special Figure 1-4 (distribution probability 25.0%). Special figure 1-
1 is a big hit with 4 rounds, the probability change flag OFF, and the number of time reductions of 100 times. Special Figure 1-2
Is a big hit with 4 rounds, a probability change flag ON, and a time reduction that continues until the next big hit game state is executed (the time reduction flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started). Special figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time reduction number of 100 times. Special figure 1-4 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 variablely displays the first special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 23 described later, and then the determined main symbol. Executes the control to stop with.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag is ON as in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4). After the jackpot gaming state is completed, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started, so-called "probability variation loop machine". In such a probabilistic loop machine, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the next jackpot gaming state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is played. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag as in Special Figure 1-1 and Special Figure 1-3). (If it is a big hit that does not turn ON), after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to a low-probability gaming state without being controlled to a high-probability gaming state.

When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as the special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or the special figure based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Determined to be 2-2 (distribution probability 50.0%). Special figure 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time reduction number of 100 times. Special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 variablely displays the second special symbol over the fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 23 described later, and then the determined main symbol. Executes the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes a control to stop the special symbol at the determined lost symbol.

The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and the probability change flag is OF.
If it is F, the game state after the big hit game state ends is the low probability game state (probability change flag is O).
It is controlled by the game state set in FF). In the following, the number of rounds is 4, the probability variation flag O
FF, big hit of 100 times of time reduction (for example, big hit of special figure 1-1) is "4R normal big hit"
The jackpot with 4 rounds, the probability change flag ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-2) is called "4R probability variation jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, probability variation. Flag OFF, big hit with 100 time reductions (for example, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 2-1)
The jackpot) is called "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, the jackpot of Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2). ) Is referred to as "10R probability variation jackpot".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always O.
Although it is set to N, it is not always limited to this, and whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF is set according to the main symbol determined based on the extracted symbol determination random number. You may decide.

[3-3. Fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the flow until the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU
101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined can be different depending on the set value (that is, the fluctuation time and the effect content). The contents of the table shown in FIG. 23 are stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, the execution probability of the reach effect may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, or the fluctuation time in normal fluctuation may become shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases.
These are omitted in FIG. 23.

As shown in FIG. 23, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined using a table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be determined by using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol is the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the effect selection. It defines the relationship between the random number range, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern), the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time, and the effect content. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probabilistic time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are not distinguished. Further, as for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, different random number ranges are set according to the set values.

The reach determination random number range is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter, and the extracted reach determination is performed. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit determination using the random number value for big hit determination when starting the variation display of the special symbol, but when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 in settings 1 and 2. It is specified in ~ 25, it is specified in 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and it is specified in 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time reduction game state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set 1. 2 is 0 to 1
It is specified as 0, it is specified as 0 to 11 in settings 3 and 4, and it is specified as 0 to 1 in settings 5 and 6.
It is stipulated in 2.

As described above, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the setting 3・ Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

In the present embodiment, when deciding whether or not to execute the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and is set to the setting 5. It is common with 6, but it is not limited to this, and it may be different in all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is an explanation of the case where the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, but when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The random number range for effect selection is a random number used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter, and selects the extracted effect. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 is a random number for effect selection stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state and the result of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). To determine the variation time of the special symbol using. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is executed is determined. It is determined as follows. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 200.
The random number range for effect selection determined to 00 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 1 and 2.
Is specified in 0 to 57, and in settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 58, and in settings 5 and 6.
Then, it is stipulated in 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is stipulated, and in settings 5 and 6, 60 to 8
It is stipulated in 9. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Will be decided. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 10,000.
The random number range for effect selection determined in msec (normal fluctuation A) is specified in 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4, and in settings 5 and 6. It is specified in 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B), is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change time-saving game state) (
When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability change flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2.
In settings 3 and 4, it is specified as 0 to 58, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59.
In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change time-saving game state) (
When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is a loss and the reach effect is not executed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and in settings 3 and 4.
Is specified in 0 to 50, and in settings 5.6, it is specified in 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B), is
In settings 1 and 2, it is specified in 52 to 99, in settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 51 to 99, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 50 to 99.

Since the main symbol is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, what is the determination of the fluctuation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a jackpot is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change time-saving game state) (
The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability change flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is a jackpot is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time), is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and in settings 3 and 4.
Is specified as 0 to 2, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 4
The random number range for effect selection determined to 5000 msec (time saving and medium super reach B) is defined as 50 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 6.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the variation of the special symbol As for the time, the setting 3 and 4 are more likely to be determined to have a shorter fluctuation time than the settings 1 and 2, and the setting 5 and 6 are more likely to be determined to have a shorter fluctuation time than the setting 3 and 4. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lottery). As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game state when viewed in a unit time will increase, and the probability that the jackpot game state will be executed within a unit time will also increase. It is possible to execute an advantageous game.

In this embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and is common to setting 5 and setting 6. Although it is common, it is not limited to this, and all the setting values may be different.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined in common for all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of is different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and the effect content. For example, if the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", the variation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, the main control circuit 10
A symbol designation command for specifying the main symbol determined by 0 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, FIG. 22
An example of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selection rate shown in is described. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 24 are the sub-main RO of the sub-control circuit 200.
It is stored in M2050.

When the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the decorative symbol is stopped based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command regardless of the set value. Determine the design. For example, the main control circuit 10
When the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from 0 is the special figure 1-2, the host control circuit 2100 has an embodiment in which all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol). Since the distribution probability is 0%, all the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in this embodiment) are the same even-numbered symbols (distribution probability 30.0%), or all the decorative symbols are the same. It is determined to be an odd-numbered symbol (distribution probability 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is a "7" symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the player can recognize that the jackpot has a high degree of profit, another symbol (for example, the "V" symbol) is used as the specific symbol. Is also good.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 24 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, A symbol other than the symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 24 are
For example, at least one of all the decorative symbols corresponds to a symbol in which the decorative symbol is different from the other decorative symbols.

As described above, according to FIG. 24, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is the jackpot determination of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Whether it is the result of the big hit, whether the game state after the big hit game state is finished is a big hit controlled to the high probability game state, and whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state is 10R. Can vary depending on.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 22 is a special figure 1-1, a special figure 1-3, or a special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON). Regardless of the set value, all decorative symbols are always stopped in the same even-numbered symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first embodiment").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol (other than the specific symbol "7" symbol) regardless of the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as "second aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol regardless of the set value, or all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the device stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are 10R probability variation big hits, but since Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, it is a big hit in the normal gaming state. It is highly possible that you won. In addition, special figure 2-2 shows the second starting port 44.
Since it is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to 0, it is highly possible that the big hit was won in the high probability game state or the short-time game state.

In this way, when stopped in a specific mode, the profit degree for the player is the largest 10R.
When the probability variation jackpot is confirmed and all the decorative symbols are stopped in the same odd-numbered symbol, the probability variation jackpot (4R probability variation jackpot or 10R probability variation jackpot) is determined. On the other hand, when stopped in the first aspect, it is confirmed that the profit degree for the player is not the maximum 10R probability variation jackpot, but the possibility of the 4R probability variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the player may be notified of which jackpot the jackpot is when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or the jackpot game. It may be notified while the state is being executed, or it may be notified when the jackpot game state ends. Further, although it is not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high-probability gaming state is the high-probability gaming state even though the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state. It may be controlled to a so-called "latent probability change state" in which the player is not clearly shown to be controlled.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, but the specifications are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, it goes without saying that the following explanation is an example and is not limited to this.
[4-1. Modification example of fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a modification of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, there are cases where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation example of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 25 counts the number of executions of the number of variations of the special symbol (that is, the number of lottery of the special symbol). It is equipped with a counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means is reset, for example, at the start of the big hit gaming state, and starts counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 25, in another example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect is performed. It is performed according to both the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the time when the jackpot game state ends and the set value.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time when the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, a random number range for reach determination is determined to execute the reach effect. Is specified in 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set 1 and 2.
Is specified in 0 to 10, in settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 5, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a loss,
In settings 1 and 2, the execution probability of reach effect is twice as high as in settings 3 and 4, and in settings 3 and 4, the execution probability of reach effect is 5 times higher than in settings 5 and 6 (settings 1 and 2). Then, the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 compared to the settings 5 and 6).

In this way, the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the time when the jackpot game state ends is 100.
When it becomes 1 time or more, the number of changes of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0.
Compared with the case of ~ 1000 times, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the jackpot game is also performed for the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where the number of fluctuations is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1.
In the case of 000 times, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach), is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and setting 3 and 2.
In 4, it is specified as 0 to 58, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 8 in settings 3 and 4.
It is specified in 9, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 1. It is not specified in ~ 4, and 0-9 in settings 5 and 6.
It is stipulated in 9. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, but not in settings 5 and 6. .. Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 40,000 mse.
The random number range for effect selection determined for c (normally medium super reach B) is 9 for all settings 1 to 4.
It is specified in 0 to 99, and is not specified in settings 5 and 6. Therefore, in a so-called big hit situation where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the set value set is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is determined to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of executing the reach effect that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit. The number of changes in the special symbol per hour (that is, the number of lottery) becomes even higher. As a result, the expectation that the number of times the big hit game is executed when viewed in a unit time is higher is higher, and the probability that the big hit game is executed within the unit time is also higher.

Further, when the number of changes of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the big hit game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will be significantly different depending on the set value. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called big hit is made, the set value set for the player is set without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving the game ball to the player). By giving a guessable opportunity, it is possible to give the player fun. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect, but in this embodiment, it is expected that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value is. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to continue the game even if the reach effect is executed infrequently.

In the present embodiment, the starting point at which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted is set to the time when the jackpot gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a high-probability gaming state occurs after a predetermined period has elapsed. The starting point can be any time point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends in the so-called ST machine that ends, or when the time-saving gaming state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value, but 1001 It doesn't have to be more than once. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that it is addictive.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes a predetermined number or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value, but the set value. What is significantly different depending on the situation is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit and the time when the game is actually controlled to the big hit game state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 is
A predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "ending time") is provided between the end of the jackpot game state and the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300) displays the opening effect at the above-mentioned opening time.
6 is displayed, and the ending effect is displayed on the display device 16 at the above ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production showing that the result of the special lottery was a big hit,
A production to congratulate the fact that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production to teach a game method (for example, right-handed) in the big hit game state, and the like are performed. In the ending production, the production showing the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, the production showing the number of times the big hit game state is continued (the number of consecutive villas), and the game state after the big hit game state is over are high-probability games. An effect showing that the state is controlled, an effect that teaches a game method in the game state after the jackpot game state is over (for example, returning to left-handed), and an effect that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And so on.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of fluctuations (that is, the number of lottery) of the special symbol per unit time, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed by the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 where the higher the set value is, the higher the expected ball output value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is), a large amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. The opening time, the interval time, and
Of the above ending times, all or at least one time may be configured to become longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the set value with the higher expected ball output value, the longer the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time, all or at least one of them. However, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in unit hours.

The main CPU 101 has a starting port (first starting port 420, second starting port 4) even when the opening time, ending time, and jackpot gaming state are controlled.
When the winning of the game ball to 40) is detected, various random numbers are extracted, and step S to be described later Step S
The setting check process (see FIG. 42) of 74 and step S82 is executed. Then, when it is determined in this setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (
In (NO) in step S721 described later, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S7 described later) even if the game is controlled to the big hit game state.
22) It becomes impossible to advance the game.

[4-2. Big hit distribution and stop design of decorative design Modification example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the first modified example and the second modified example regarding the jackpot distribution (selectivity of the main symbol) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these second variants. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the 1st modification and the 2nd modification will be described. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. In addition, FIG.
6 is a diagram showing a first modification example of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of. Further, FIG. 28 is a modified example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.
It is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[4-2-1. First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 28. In addition, FIG.
The contents of the table shown in FIG. 6 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 28 are stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the first modification, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. With probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5,
It is determined to be one of Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, and Special Figure 1-8. However, in this first modification, special figure 1-1 and special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", special figure 1-2 and special figure 1
-4 is "4R probability variation jackpot", special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "
"10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2-4 are "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol with a common probability in settings 1 to 4.
Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability)
Distribution probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 12)
.. 5%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 12.5%) , Decide on one of them. On the contrary,
In setting 5, the main symbols are the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 15.0). %), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%)
, Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-7
It is determined to be either (Distribution probability 15.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbols are set to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%),
It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both are 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit types are common, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both).
For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6).
) Is higher than the selectivity of Special Figure 1-4 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) ().
Common to settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in Special Figure 1-6 and Special Figure 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. ((
For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6).
) Is higher than the selectivity of Special Figure 1-8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) ().
Common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the host control circuit 2100
As shown in FIG. 28, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 (probability change flag is ON). When it is a 4R normal jackpot or a 10R normal jackpot that is not set), for example, the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 16 is always controlled to stop in the first mode regardless of the set value.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.) regardless of the set value. 0%
) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first aspect (selectivity 25.0%) regardless of the set value.
, Or control to stop in the second aspect (selectivity 75.0%). Here, the high setting value (
For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6).
) Is higher in the selectivity of Special Figure 1-4 (15.0% in setting 5 and 20.0% in setting 6).
Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both 4R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, there is a high probability that the decorative symbol will stop in the second aspect (a mode having a higher expectation for the player than the first aspect).

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 50.0%). Here, as described above, with high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), special figure 1
The selection rate of Special Figure 1-8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher than the selection rate of -6 (10.0% at setting 5 and 5.0% at setting 6). Is higher. Therefore, Special Figure 1-6 and Special Figure 1-
Even though the jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots) is the same as 8, at the high setting value, the decorative pattern is the most specific mode (for the player) as compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). The probability of stopping in a mode with a high degree of expectation is high.

Similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 21
00 is a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50) regardless of the set value.
.. It is controlled to stop at 0%). In addition, the main design is special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot)
When the above is the case, the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selection rate of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific mode is high.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is feasible to enable the stop mode of the decorative symbol to be different depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), it is assumed that the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[4-2-2. Second variant]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In addition, FIG.
The contents of the table shown in No. 7 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the second modification, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. do not have. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a probability variation attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker is detected while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the high probability gaming state, and the probabilistic attacker is reached. When the jackpot gaming state ends without the entry of the game ball being detected, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. In this way, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability gaming state based on the entry of a gaming ball into a probabilistic attacker is also a so-called “probability-changing loop machine”.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the second modification, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the game ball is controlled in the jackpot game state in the mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. Is controlled by. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions when the jackpot is a big hit in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is 100 times, and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". If it is a big hit, the time reduction will continue until the next big hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker" is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the probability change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (almost 100%). It is controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to). In addition, the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker" is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is launched toward the placement portion of the probability change attacker (for example, the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high-probability gaming state with a probability of almost 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". The jackpot is called a "probability variation jackpot".

However, if it is "a mode in which it is easy for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker", it is controlled to a high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker when the mode is such that the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. The mode may be controlled to a high probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the mode.

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter.
For example, apart from the large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5) having a probabilistic attacker inside, it is conceivable to provide another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker. Then, an embodiment in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-4,
In the case of special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2-4), the big winning opening 540 is controlled to open the big hit game state, and the game ball enters the probabilistic attacker. When the mode is difficult (for example, Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1-5, Special Figure 1-7, Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3), the large winning opening 540 is used. By controlling the jackpot game state in which the other big winning openings are opened without opening, it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect as long as it is possible to create an aspect in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probabilistic attacker and an aspect in which the game ball is easy to enter.

Further, as described above, when a large winning opening 540 having a probabilistic attacker inside and another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker are provided, a large winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state. You may make the setting difference in the mouth. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easier to select a big hit game state in which other big winning openings are opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is easier than other big winning openings. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened, such as the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 27, in such a second modification, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1-4, Special Figure 1-5, Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, and It is decided to be one of the special figures 1-8. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", and the special figure 1-.
2 and special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation jackpot", special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2
-3 is "10R normal jackpot", and special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2-4 are "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol with a common probability in settings 1 to 4.
Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability)
Distribution probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 12)
.. 5%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 12.5%) , Decide on one of them. On the contrary,
In setting 5, the main symbols are the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 15.0). %), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%)
, Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-7
It is determined to be either (Distribution probability 15.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbols are set to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%),
It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both are 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit types are common, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both).
For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6).
) Is higher than the selectivity of Special Figure 1-4 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) ().
Common to settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in Special Figure 1-6 and Special Figure 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. ((
For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6).
) Is higher than the selectivity of Special Figure 1-8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) ().
Common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the host control circuit 2100
As shown in FIG. 28, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 (probability change flag is ON). When it is a 4R normal jackpot or a 10R normal jackpot that is not set), for example, the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 16 is always controlled to stop in the first mode regardless of the set value.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.) regardless of the set value. 0%
) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first aspect (selectivity 25.0%) regardless of the set value.
, Or control to stop in the second aspect (selectivity 75.0%). Here, the high setting value (
For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6).
) Is higher in the selectivity of Special Figure 1-4 (15.0% in setting 5 and 20.0% in setting 6).
Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both 4R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, there is a high probability that the decorative symbol will stop in the second aspect (a mode having a higher expectation for the player than the first aspect).

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 50.0%). Here, as described above, with high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), special figure 1
The selection rate of Special Figure 1-8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher than the selection rate of -6 (10.0% at setting 5 and 5.0% at setting 6). Is higher. Therefore, Special Figure 1-6 and Special Figure 1-
Even though the jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots) is the same as 8, at the high setting value, the decorative pattern is the most specific mode (for the player) as compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). The probability of stopping in a mode with a high degree of expectation is high.

Similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 21
00 is a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50) regardless of the set value.
.. It is controlled to stop at 0%). In addition, the main design is special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot)
When the above is the case, the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selection rate of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific mode is high.

As described above, in the second modified example as well, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the jackpot type is the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make it possible for the stop mode of the symbol to be different. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the composite probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In both the first modification and the second modification described above, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value by making the selection rate of the main symbol different according to the set value. is doing. That is, the host control circuit 2100 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, according to the set value. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control by the host control circuit 2100.

According to the first modification and the second modification described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the time saving inrush rate. It will be possible.

[5. Outline of drawing control method]
Here, an outline of the drawing control process executed by the display control circuit 2300 when the control signal of the drawing request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. Note that FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow of image data (moving image data and still image data) at the time of drawing control processing.

In the present embodiment, the data (compressed data) of the image (moving image and / or still image) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display device 16 is stored in the CGROM 2060 in the CGROM board 2040. Then, when the control signal of the drawing request is input to the display control circuit 2300, the display control circuit 2300 first reads the image compressed data from the CGROM 2060 and decodes (decompresses) the image compression data. At this time, when the video compressed data is read, the display control circuit 2300
When the moving image compressed data is decoded by the moving image decoder 2340 in the image and the still image compressed data is read out, the still image compressed data is decoded by the still image decoder 2350 in the display control circuit 2300.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 writes the decoding result (image expansion data) of the image data to a predetermined buffer designated as the texture source. In this embodiment, as a texture source, a movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM) is used.
A texture buffer and a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM2370 are specified. For example, when displaying one moving image, the decompressed moving image data (decoding result) is SDR.
It is written to the movie buffer in AM2500. Further, for example, when displaying one still image, the expanded still image data is written to the sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 2370.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 specifies a rendering target for writing the rendering (drawing) result of the image data. The rendering target is, for example,
The frame buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM) and the built-in VRAM 2
A frame buffer or the like provided in the 370 can be specified.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 operates the rendering engine 2410 to perform rendering processing on the decoding result of the image data written in the texture source, and writes the rendering result to the rendering target. In this process, rendering processing is performed according to designated information (various information input from the 3D geometry engine 2400) such as enlargement / reduction and rotation of the moving image.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 displays the rendering result (display output data) written to the rendering target on the display screen of the display device 16.

In this embodiment, two frame buffers are prepared as rendering targets. Then, when the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to the frame buffer, the frame buffer in which the rendering result is written is switched for each frame. For example, when the rendering result is written to one frame buffer in a predetermined frame, the rendering result is written to the other frame buffer in the next frame, and the rendering result is written to one frame buffer in the next frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the process of writing the rendering result to one frame buffer and the process of writing the rendering result to the other frame buffer are alternately switched and executed for each frame.

Further, in the flow of the rendering result writing process and the display process described above, the rendering result written to one frame buffer in a predetermined frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (on the other hand). The frame buffer function of is switched from the drawing function to the display function). Further, the rendering result written to the other frame buffer in the next frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 one after another (the function of the other frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). That is, in the present embodiment, the rendering result display processing in one frame buffer and the rendering result display processing in the other frame buffer are alternately switched and executed for each frame.

[6. Overview of audio playback control method]
Next, an outline of the audio reproduction processing executed by the audio / LED control circuit 2200 when a sound request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the audio / LED control circuit 2200.
It will be described back to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the audio data output to the speaker 24 is stored in the CGROM 2060. The audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 is phrase compressed data specified by a 13-bit length phrase number NUM (000H to 1FFFH), and is a series of background music songs (BGM) or a set. Directing sound (notice sound) etc. is up to 819
Two types (= 213) are stored corresponding to the phrase number NUM. The phrase number NUM is specified by a set value (operation parameter) of a voice command transmitted from the host control circuit 2100 to the command register 2250 of the voice / LED control circuit 2200.

The voice command is used for Individual Write, which transmits a set value of 1 byte length to the voice control register of any one of the many voice control registers built in the voice / LED control circuit 2200, or a series of N consecutive voice commands. Bloc that transmits N set values in a group to the voice control register group of
Used for k Write applications.

In any case, the voice control register to be accessed is specified by a register address having a length of 1 byte, and the storage capacity of each voice control register is 1 byte. Then, in this embodiment, a large number of voice control registers are secured by dividing into seven register banks. That is, since the register bank is divided into seven, the total number of voice control registers is, in principle, a maximum of 7 × 256.

In this embodiment, in all the register banks, the specific register address is a voice control register for register bank setting. Therefore, in order to specify any one of the 7 × 256 voice control registers, the register bank is written in the voice control register for bank setting by the preceding voice command, and then the voice control belonging to the register bank is performed. The register is specified by the register address having a length of 1 byte.

By the way, in the operation of setting the set value in the voice control register, it is not always necessary to directly specify the register address of the voice control register to be set, and the SAC data (Simple Access Code Data) stored in the CGROM 2060 or Sequence code
Code) can also be specified to complete a series of configuration operations for a group of voice control registers. Then, in order to realize such an operation, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is equipped with the simple access controller 2260a (simple access controller) shown in FIG.
) 4 and 16 sequencers 2260b (Sequencer) are built-in.

SAC (Simple Access) for operating the simple access controller 2260a
Explaining from Code) data, SAC data is the register address of the voice control register (
1 byte) and the value set in the voice control register (1 byte) correspond to a maximum of 512
It is a set (= 1024 bytes) of data group and means an aggregate terminated by a SAC end code (FFFFH) (see FIG. 12).

In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of such SAC data can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 sets a 13-bit length SAC number to a voice control register for SAC control (see FIG. 12). ), Simple access controller 2260
a can be made to work. Simple access controller 2260a that started the function
Reads a group of SAC data specified by the SAC number in order from the CGROM 2060, and sets the set value indicated by the SAC data in the voice control register indicated by the SAC data.

Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 only needs to write (register) the SAC number in the voice control register for SAC control, and performs a series of setting operations without individually specifying the register address of the voice control register. Can be instructed. A standby time (standby information as attached data) that defines the start timing of a series of setting operations can be set in the voice control register for SAC control, and the SAC number to the voice control register for SAC control can be set. It is also possible to delay the setting start timing to the voice control register by the simple access controller 2260a from the writing timing of.

Subsequently, the Sequence Code for operating the sequencer 2260b (Sequence Code)
) Will be explained. Similar to the SAC data, the sequence code is also a plurality of sets of data in which the register address (1 byte) of the voice control register and the set value (1 byte) of the voice control register correspond to each other (see FIG. 12). However, unlike the SAC data, the sequence code can specify a plurality of operation steps (plurality of sequence steps) that can be intermittently executed after a predetermined waiting time.

In addition, each sequencer SQ0 is stored in the voice control register for sequencer control.
~ SQ15 can include a waiting time (waiting information) that defines the start timing of the setting operation, the presence / absence of repeated operation, and the number of repetitions (loop information). Therefore, the sequence code identifies a series of audio effects that are executed over a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 12, a plurality of operation steps are separated by a step end code (FFFEH), and the end of the plurality of operation steps is terminated by a sequence end code (FFFFH). In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of sequence codes can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 uses a sequencer (Sequencer) to provide a sequence code number having a length of 13 bits and attached data that defines the operation of the sequencer. ) By writing to the voice control register for control, a series of setting operations can be instructed to the sequencer 2260b.

In this embodiment, only the necessary sets of such SAC data and sequence code are CG in advance.
A group of SAC data and a group of sequence codes stored in ROM 2060 are stored in the ROM 2060.
It is specified by the SAC number or sequence code number. Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, Write
The intended voice command includes not only the case of specifying the direct setting operation to the voice control register but also the case of specifying the indirect setting operation via the simple access controller 2260a and the sequencer 2260b.

In order to realize the above operation, the host control circuit 2100 and the voice / LED control circuit 22
00 is a parallel signal line (data bus) capable of transmitting and receiving 1-byte data, a 2-bit length operation management data line (address bus) capable of transmitting operation management data, and reading / writing (read / wri).
te) A 2-bit length control signal line that can control the operation and a chip select signal line that selects the voice / LED control circuit 2200 are connected.

The parallel signal line is realized by the data bus of the host control circuit 2100, and the operation management data line is realized by the address bus of the host control circuit 2100. And voice
The upper 6 bits are common to the LED control circuit 2200, and the lower 2 bits are 00, 01, 10
When the host control circuit 2100 executes an I / OREAD instruction or an I / OWRITE instruction for these port number PORTs, the chip select signal CS is assigned. The circuit is configured to be at the active level.

The data output to the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address bus when the I / OREAD instruction or the I / OVERITE instruction is executed becomes the operation management data A0 to A1 for the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and these 2 bits A0. Based on ~ A1, it is specified whether the 1-byte data of the data bus at that time is a register address, write data, or read data.

That is, if the address data is [00], the data of the data bus at that timing is evaluated as the register address, while if the address data is [01], the data of the data bus at that timing is write data or read. It becomes data. I / ORE
The read data is when the AD instruction is executed, and the write data is when the I / OWRITE instruction is executed.

Therefore, the transmission operation of the voice command for writing the predetermined set value to the predetermined voice control register issues the I / OWRITE command while changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice / LED control circuit 2200. It is realized by executing it continuously. Specifically, the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are changed from [00] to [01], while the 1-byte data of the data bus is changed from [register address of voice control register] to [voice control register]. By changing to [Data to be written to], the operation of transmitting a predetermined voice command is realized.

The write data has a multi-byte length and is controlled, as in the case of transmitting the SAC number (13 bits), the sequence code number (13 bits), and the control data (standby information, loop information, etc.) accompanying the SAC number (13 bits). When the register addresses of the register are continuous, the operation management data A0 to A1 of [01] are repeated in the order of [00] → [01] → [01] → [01], and a plurality of bytes of write data are transmitted. ..

The voice command transmitted in this way will be voice / LE after that unless there is a communication error.
It is effective inside the D control circuit 2200. However, if a communication error is found, such as data with multiple byte lengths not matching each other, the voice command will not be effective.
Then, the error flag of the voice control register is set, and this error flag (status information STS) sets the operation management data A0 to A1 of the address bus from [01] to [10].
] Can be received by executing the I / OREAD instruction.

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation management data A0 to A1 are subjected to [00] → [01] → ...
In the final cycle of transitioning from [01] to [10], error information of a plurality of bit lengths (FFH at the time of abnormality) can be acquired. Then, by retransmitting the voice command that could not be properly transmitted in parallel, the voice effect can be appropriately advanced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness that the audio production is suddenly interrupted.

On the other hand, the data reading operation by the I / OREAD operation is performed by the voice / LED control circuit 220.
It is realized by continuously executing the I / OWRITE instruction and the I / OREAD instruction while changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of 0. If the read data has a length of a plurality of bytes, the I / OREAD instructions are continued for the required number of bytes.

Specifically, first, as an I / OWRITE operation, for the port number PORT in which the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [00], [the register address of the voice control register that stores the operation status, etc. ( 1 byte length)] is output. Next, for the port number PORT in which the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [01], I
By executing the / OREAD instruction, necessary data such as operation status can be acquired from a predetermined voice control register.

The voice reproduced by the voice / LED control circuit 2200 having the above configuration is voice / L.
As a digital audio signal of the ED control circuit 2200, a 5-bit signal (SCLK, LRO, S)
It is transmitted to the digital audio power amplifier 2620 in the format of D0, SD1, SD2) and is transmitted to the digital audio power amplifier 2620.
It is class D amplified by the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and supplied to each speaker as an analog audio signal. Specifically, the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the lower speaker for bass, and the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the player. Four ordinary speakers arranged almost aligned in the vertical and horizontal positions (see, for example, FIG. 13 (L0, R0, L1, R).
It is supplied to 1) and two deep bass (vibration) speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (SUB0, SUB1).

[7. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 51. However, in the following description (described of the processing in the main CPU 101), the power switch 35, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the performance display monitor 334, the error notification monitor 336, the external terminal board 323, and the hall computer 700.
Although each term of is used, these are shown in FIG.

[7-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU
In 101, the power-on processing (step S10), the setting processing related to the set value (step S20), and the game return processing (step S30) are executed in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when a power failure occurs or the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to an OFF operation of the power switch 35 or the like, Performs the processing when a power failure occurs, which will be described later.

[7-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S13). And after that, main C
The PU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices having a built-in CPU (step S14).
..

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the switch related to the set value (step S1).
5). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S20, for example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates the switches related to the setting (step S15), then performs a read process (step S16) for each switch, and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. Step S17 (FIG. 31)
In the game permission process (see), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is, for example, RW.
It is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, such as when the work area of M (main RAM 103) is not normal. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON (
Step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status at the time of the previous power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change process is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure can be identified. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON until the power is cut. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power is cut off. Further, even when a power failure occurs during the abnormal state of steps S722 to S727 described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. In the initial state where the power has not been turned on yet, or when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure status identification flag is OFF. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 has the status identification flag ON (when the power is cut off).
If YES) in step S1710, the game proceeds to step S1720, and if the power failure status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710), the game permission flag is turned OFF.
After making (step S1750), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The check of this work area also includes a check of whether or not the set value data set is within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in the present embodiment).

The work area of the main RAM 103 is a general work area in which data is cleared when the backup clear process described later is performed, and data is retained without being cleared in principle even when the backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. For example, performance display data, set value data, and the like are stored in this specific work area. It is the data which shows the set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of "0" to "5" corresponds to each of the set values "1" to "6" in six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S1730), it moves to step S1740, and if it is not normal, that is, it is abnormal (NO in step S1730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, the set value data is within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in this embodiment).
If not, the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned ON. Is determined to be. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or an abnormal state (step S171).
If the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), it is determined that the game permission flag is OFF. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process is terminated. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power failure that occurs during the normal game, the power failure that occurs during the setting confirmation process, and the power failure that occurs during the setting change process are regarded as normal power failures, and is referred to as a normal power failure, which will be described later in step S722.
The power failure generated in step S727 is regarded as an abnormal power failure.

In step S1770, whether or not the power of the main CPU 101 is turned on (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 is performed) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. It is determined whether or not, and the setting key switch signal is ON (
If YES) in step S1770, the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 is the backup clear switch 3
Whether or not the pressing operation of 30 is performed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON is determined, and if the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the process proceeds to step S1790 and the backup clear signal is OFF. If it is, step S18
Move to 10.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

As described above, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the previous power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. Y in step S1770
ES) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, the setting key 3
When both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the 28 is turned on, the game permission flag is set to ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to O.
Set to N and end the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process, which will be described later, needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. When the process of step S1810 is performed, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission process. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the hall personnel are not in a state where the game can be executed by checking the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 (the game permission flag is OFF). Is). In this embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the setting key 32
The game permission flag can be set to ON only when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the 8 is turned ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. In the above, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed. Instead, after the process of step S1810 is performed, the process returns to step S1740 and the game permission flag is turned ON. (Speaking in FIG. 32, step S17
The processes of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped until it is determined to be YES in 80).

[7-1-2. Setting process]
33 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 33 (b) is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B is that the processing when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and other processing (step). The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 moves to step S22, and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S2).
4) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not executed, and the setting process is terminated.

The main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22).
If the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the setting change process (step S24) is performed and the setting key switch signal is ON (Y in step S22).
ES) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step) is executed if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28) and changes the setting (step S28). S
24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not executed, and the setting process is terminated. If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). Processing (step S24
) And the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not executed either).

That is, if the previous power failure is a normal power failure that occurred during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, it is determined to be YES in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. If the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). The game returns to the game return process (step S30) without executing any of the above, and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, even if the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure or the previous power failure is a normal power failure, if the power failure occurs during the setting change process, it is determined as NO in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. And backup clear flag ON
The setting process ends without executing any of (step S28). Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). (That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and controlled to the setting change state), the set value is confirmed. Only in the case, the setting change process (step S24) is executed to move to the game return process of step S30, and after this game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24).
, Setting confirmation process (step S26) and backup clear flag process (step S2)
The game returns to the game return process (step S30) without executing any of 8). However, in this game return process (step S30), an abnormal time process (see step S38 in FIG. 37 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 (a), if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the power is turned on. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 at that time or the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330, any of the setting change processing (step S24), the setting confirmation processing (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28). The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or / or the previous power failure is abnormal, as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 (b). In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. You may do so. If a power failure occurs during the setting change process or if the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. Regardless of this, by forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24), when the power is turned on without operating the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a decision.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 33A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. It is finished. Similarly, FIG. 33 (
Even in the flowchart shown in b), if NO is determined in step S21, the setting change process (step S24) is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. Is running. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and regardless of the determination result, the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S24). May be executed.

[7-1-2-1. Setting change process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. Step S24 (FIG. 33)
The setting change process of (see) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be terminated with the same setting value as the set setting value. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process.
Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, step S1790 (FIG. 3).
Since the game permission flag is set to ON in (see 2), the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes the backup clear process. This backup clear process will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing from the start to the end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323. The setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 has the setting value information of the performance display monitor 3.
Notification is set so that it is displayed on 34. The set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 has the set value data "3".
The setting value "4" corresponding to "" is displayed. However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, the number does not necessarily have to be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data "0" to "5" are changed to "A" to "F", respectively.
When the set value data stored in the register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but it is determined in advance because the previous data is discarded. The initial value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a performance display monitor such as a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8"). It may be controlled so as to be displayed at 334. When the main CPU 101 displays a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. You may do it.

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can know that the setting change process is in progress by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the setting key switch signal of the main CPU 101 is OFF.
If it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF (step S2470).
NO), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520 and the set value stored in the register. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless it is YES in step S2470), step S2510, step S2520, and step S244.
The process from 0 to step S2470 is looped (the processes of step S2510, step S2520, and step S2440 to step S2470 are repeated).

In the main CPU 101, the setting switch 332 was pressed (step S2510).
In the subsequent step S2450, the notification is set so that the updated set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, in the main CPU 101, the setting key switch signal is OFF (step S24).
Unless it is determined as YES) in 70, the set value data stored in the register is cyclically increased from "0" to "5" each time the setting switch 332 is pressed (when the set value data is "5"). When the setting switch 332 is pressed, it returns to "0"). As a result, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0", or the circulation may be increased and circulated depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to perform both reduction and reduction.

In step S2470, the setting key switch signal of the main CPU 101 is OFF.
If it is determined that (YES in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2480. Moving to step S2480, the main CPU 101 has steps S2510 and S25.
20 and the loop of steps S2440 to S2470 are terminated.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed,
The set value is confirmed. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is determined based on the execution of the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determined as YES in step S2470), and the setting key switch signal is turned off. The setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, step S24).
If only looping from 40 to step S2470), the set value data stored in the register is only updated, and the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

The setting key switch signal is turned off in step S2470 (step S247).
Even if the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again after it is determined to be YES in 0), the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is not detected as ON), and the power off operation (power switch 35 OFF) is performed. The set value cannot be changed unless the operation) is performed. At that time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CP.
The U101 displays the set value data stored in the register on the performance display monitor 334, and displays the set value data.
You may be able to confirm the settings (perform the setting confirmation process). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure,
Forcibly regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 (the status of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal). When the setting change process (see FIG. 34) is executed (see FIG. 33 (b)), the setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). Will be done. As described above, when the setting change process (step S24) is executed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 is set to step S24.
It is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF without immediately determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470) in 70. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S2480 (determines the set value). In this case, the main CPU 101 detects that the setting key switch signal is turned on, and further detects that the setting key switch signal is turned off, so that it can be determined as YES in step S2480. Well, even if it does not detect that the setting key switch signal is ON, the setting key switch signal is ON.
It may be determined as YES in step S2480 by detecting that it is turned off from.

In the above, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is stated that the setting change process is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, main C
The PU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. In addition, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure recovery is performed in the setting change state when the power failure occurs (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, and then the state is maintained. At the time of recovery from power failure, the process of returning to the held state may be executed regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

The setting key switch signal is turned off in step S2470 (step S247).
When it is determined as YES) at 0, an initialization command is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100 as a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned off, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed. It becomes.

When the setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 33) is completed, step S20 (FIG. 30)
The setting process of (see) is completed, and the process proceeds to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30).

If the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is executed, the game can be executed for a certain period after the game is started, or the game. Information that suggests that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of, information that suggests that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change process, the setting value has been changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process (for example, the setting value has been changed by two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4). The information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on, for example, the display device 16. For example, the variation pattern of the effect or decorative pattern performed on the display device 16 or the like can be changed between when the setting change process is executed and when the setting change process is not executed, or changed to a higher setting value by the setting change process. It is possible to make it different when it is set and when it is changed to a low setting value, and when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. Is also good.

In addition, the output period of the above-mentioned setting change security signal and the error notification monitor 336.
The period during which the setting changing code is displayed is from the start of the setting change process to the execution of the end process of the setting change process. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. Further, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, or when the process of step S2480 is executed. As a result, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may notify that the setting is being changed, that the set value has been changed, and that the setting change has been completed.

[7-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear process in step S2420 (see FIG. 34). This backup clear process is a process for clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear process, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

First, the main CPU 101 determines in step S2421 whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and the backup clear flag is ON (step S24).
If it is NO) in 21, the process proceeds to step S2422.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 is RWM (main RAM 103).
Clear the work area of. However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 should be cleared together with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. In this backup clear process, it may be only partially cleared.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. To. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. In addition, when the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game permission flag is turned off.
Then, the game permission flag may not be turned on unless the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 34) is performed.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 has information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared).
Is set to be displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU
101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is, for example, a command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The indicated image is displayed on, for example, the display device 16.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 34), in step S2450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the setting value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Set notification. Similarly to this, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, it is preferable to set the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[7-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. Step S26 (FIG. 33)
The setting confirmation process of (see) is a process for confirming the set setting value. The set value is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 7 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323.
It is sent to 00. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 has the setting value information of the performance display monitor 3.
Notification is set so that it is displayed on 34. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating the set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays "4" corresponding to the set value data "3" as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the setting key switch signal of the main CPU 101 is OFF.
If it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF (step S2650).
NO), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless it is YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (step S26).
The process from 20 to step S2650 is repeated).

In step S2650, the setting key switch signal of the main CPU 101 is OFF.
If it is determined that (YES in step S2650), the process proceeds to step S2660. Moving to step S2660, the main CPU 101 is in steps S2620 to S26.
Each process of 50 is completed.

The setting key switch signal is turned off in step S2650 (step S265).
When it is determined as YES) in 0, a power failure recovery command is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and performs setting confirmation processing. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 33) is completed, step S20 (FIG. 30)
The setting process of (see) is completed, and the process proceeds to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30).

[7-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. Step S30 (FIG. 30)
In the setting process of (see), on the premise that the game permission flag is ON, a process of returning to a state in which the game can be executed is performed. The game return process will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31),
The main CPU 101 executes the error processing in step S38. This abnormal processing will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32 and performs a process of activating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 moves to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON. If the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If a power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs the initial setting of the work area that requires the initial value at the time of restoration of the power failure.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power failure is a high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs a notification setting indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command has
The setting value information about the set setting value is also included. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30), and a series of power-on processes are completed. This makes it possible to execute the game. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure recovery has occurred or a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 shifts to the backup clear process in step S39. Since this backup clear process is the same as the backup clear process (backup clear process shown in FIG. 35) in step S2420 shown in FIG. 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear process in step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when the RWM (main RAM 103) is initialized.

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 receives a command at the time of RWM initialization (
The process of transmitting the initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200 is performed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30).
A series of power-on processing is completed. This makes it possible to execute the game. The above initialization command has completed the setting change process (the backup clear process is also executed).
It functions as a command indicating that the backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed.

In addition, the output period of the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal and the error notification monitor 336.
The period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed is from the start of the setting confirmation process to the execution of the end process of the setting confirmation process. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

[7-1-3-1. Processing in case of abnormality]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of abnormality. The processing at the time of abnormality in step S38 (see FIG. 37) is the processing in step S31 (see FIG. 37) as described above.
This is a process executed when it is determined that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31).

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the host control circuit 2100 receives an abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the display device 16 under the control of the host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300). Will be.

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to send an abnormal command. for example,
The host control circuit 2100 determines that the backup is defective when the normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may try to do it.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level.
Then, in the main CPU 101, the power failure detection signal is turned ON (YES in step S384).
), The process proceeds to step S385, and the process when a power failure occurs is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101
Loops from step S382 to step S384 (step S382 to step S).
The process of 384 is repeated).

[7-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level.
When the voltage drops to a predetermined level, processing is performed when a power failure occurs.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, a checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly held at the time of power recovery. In this way, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure status identification flag in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, if the power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process, the main CPU 101 identifies the situation at the time of the power failure. Set the flag to ON and set it to OFF if it occurs during the setting change process.

When the main CPU 101 finishes the processes of steps S3851 to S3853,
The process proceeds to step S3854, prohibiting access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and entering an infinite loop to prepare for a power supply stop.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process when a power failure occurs is started, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 1 of this embodiment
The 01 is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but when the processing when a power failure occurs is entered, the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process is entered when the power is cut off due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop shown in FIG. 39 is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main CPU 101 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

In addition, instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103), a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying electric power. In this case, when the power is cut off,
It is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area, so that the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[7-1-4. Flow of power-on processing as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the person who performs the operation (
For example, the flow of power-on processing from the viewpoint of hall personnel, etc.) will be briefly explained.

[7-1-4-1. Flow of setting change process]
First, the setting change process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to perform a power off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned ON.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and the operations related to the setting among all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332).
Only is enabled, the setting change process is started, and the setting can be changed.

When the setting change process is started, the error notification monitor 336 displays the setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands at the time of initializing the RWM). send)
Is executed, a voice indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, although the display indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is not performed, the display area of the display device 16 indicates that the backup clear processing has been executed in place of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24. It may be displayed in.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is periodically increased and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but when the set value is "6", the information indicates the setting switch 332. When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

When the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state ends and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting changing code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled among all the switches, and all the other switches remain disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[7-1-4-2. Flow of setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process executed on the condition that the game permission flag is ON internally, and is not executed when the game permission flag is OFF internally.

In order to confirm the set value, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is turned on while the power is not turned on, provided that the game permission flag is turned ON internally. The power switch 35 is turned on without pressing the power switch 35.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 is enabled among all the switches, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. Will be.

When the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display monitor 334 is displayed.
The performance display (base value) is displayed in, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled.
All other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during a normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[7-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal processing]
As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally turned off, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. Moreover, when the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35, the backup process without the setting change process (details will be described later) is performed, or simply. If only the operation to turn on the power is performed, the error processing is executed. The flow of processing in the event of an abnormality will be described below.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, and then the operation related to the setting among all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332).
Only is enabled (internally, abnormal processing is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is enabled is to enable the game permission flag to be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

When the error processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating that the error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the abnormal processing is started, the operations related to the setting are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal processing is started, no response is made regardless of which operation is executed, and the pachinko game is in a state where the game can be executed unless the above-mentioned setting change processing is performed after turning off the power switch 35. Machine 1 cannot be restored. It should be noted that the invalidation of the operation of all switches means that each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, and each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example,). LED25) includes those in a controllable state.

[7-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure
The main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection process is shown in FIG. 41.
Will be described later with reference to.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700, and the like. To.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the value of each saved register (step S57). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[7-2-1. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S64).
In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (not shown) is based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the ball passage detector (not shown).
Random value) is extracted. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[7-2-1-1. Start opening winning detection process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 is the first start port switch 4.
It is determined whether or not the game ball is detected in 21 (step S71). First start port switch 42
When the game ball is detected in 1 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 is
The process proceeds to step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 holds the number of the first start opening winnings (the number of the first special symbols held).
It is determined whether or not there are less than four (step S74). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S75. When the number of reserved pieces is 4 (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and steps S
Move on to the process of 80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied.
The process of storing in 3 is performed (step S76). As a result, the first random number extracted
The variable display of the special symbol is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S77).
In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination for the first special symbol are based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S78).
The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25), and selects the variation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , Perform the process of determination.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 25, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process is stored. The pattern specification command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S79). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold number overflow command for the first start opening winning, and proceeds to step S81. The hold quantity overflow command for the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the first start opening prize has been given when the hold number of the first special symbol is the upper limit (for example, 4), and the command is sent to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 42, the reason why the hold number overflow command for the first start opening winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that the set value data is normally determined in the setting check process in step S72 described later. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 is in step S8.
Move on to the process of 2. When the game ball is not detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S)
NO in 81), the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as in step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 holds the number of the second start opening winnings (the number of the second special symbols held).
It is determined whether or not the number is less than four (step S84). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S85. When the number of reserved pieces is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied.
The process of storing in 3 is performed (step S86). As a result, the second random number extracted
The variable display of the special symbol is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87).
The second special stop symbol determination process is also the same as the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the random number value for symbol determination extracted for the second special symbol, and the second special symbol. With reference to the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the jackpot selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S88).
This fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 is referred to in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).
) Refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol, and as a result of the jackpot determination, a process of selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening winning (step S89). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

If the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process in step S72 or the setting check process in step S82 is performed. You may try to do only one of them.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is four (NO in step S84). However, the main CPU 101 starts by discarding various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 without transmitting the hold number overflow command of the second starting opening winning to the sub control circuit 200. The oral prize detection process has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[7-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101, and the setting check process is performed in steps S72 and S82 (see FIG. 42 for both).
It is the same process as. The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, step S1720 (
The same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in (see FIG. 32) may be performed, but in the present embodiment, emphasis is placed on checking whether or not the set set value is normal. I have.

As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”. Therefore, here, the setting value data is “ Whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5" is determined. The setting value data is "
If it is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process is terminated. When the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (step S72)
For NO) in 1, the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is in the variable display (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724, and when it determines that the special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 42) with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25) has elapsed. The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

For example, when the main CPU 101 is displaying a variation of a special symbol, the starting port 4 is displayed.
When the game ball wins at 20, 440, the setting check process of step S72 (or step S82) may be executed during the variation display of the special symbol (before the variation display of the special symbol ends). The main CPU 101 is not normal in this setting check process (
When it is determined as NO) in step S721, even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the variable display is not displayed), the game permission flag is turned off and an abnormality is obtained. Perform time processing. In this case, the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off and the setting change process is executed. Therefore, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol in the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, it is controlled so that power is not supplied from the payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) to the launch solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired and it is impossible to play the game.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to the abnormality processing in step S727.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, even if the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. The main CPU 101 is
When the process of step S725 is completed, the process proceeds to step S726.

In the abnormality processing in step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same processing as the abnormality processing in step S38 (see FIG. 37). That is, the processes of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 38 are performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence process of step S385, that is, FIG. The processes of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in 39 are performed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 1
If the set value data stored in 03 is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it becomes impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. Unable to play the game. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed, for example, in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S721 that the set value data is not appropriate, even if the variation display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless the data is input and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 related to the above hold are cleared. That is, whether the various data on hold are based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420.
All are cleared regardless of whether it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the hold from being processed based on the abnormal set value, and it is possible to improve the security.

Further, as described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 is set in step S724. Prohibits the stoppage of the second special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol is the second special symbol. Similarly, the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440.
When it is determined that the set value data is not normal in (NO in step S721).
Further, in step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol is the first special symbol. ..

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (step S7).
NO in 21), in step S725, the main CPU 101 is not only when the special symbol whose variable display is reserved is the first special symbol, but also when it is the second special symbol.
The variable display of the second special symbol is prohibited. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is reserved is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol is the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed not only when the power is turned on (see step S1730 in FIG. 32) but also when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440.
Not limited to this, for example, during the setting confirmation process (see step S24 in FIG. 33), during the setting change process (see step S26 in FIG. 33), and during the execution of the backup clear process (see FIG. 35).
, When the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the passing gate switch 4
When passing is detected by 9a (see Fig. 9), when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops, etc.
The setting check process may be performed at a predetermined timing. The above predetermined timing is an example list. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or part of the above timings). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, it is not possible to immediately turn off the game permission flag and proceed with the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the big hit game state. However, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the setting value data is determined to be abnormal in the setting check process and the timing at which the game cannot be executed may be staggered. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable to perform various judgment processes (for example, big hit judgment process) in a state where the set value data is not normal, the change display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time without performing various judgment processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol by losing it.

Although not shown in FIG. 43, the game permission flag is OF in step S722.
When set to F, it is preferable that if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the normal symbol is also prohibited from stopping. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[7-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a main control main process by the main CPU 101.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S91), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 has the main RA in steps S93 and S94.
Depending on the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in M103,
A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 is performed in the main RAM 103. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the sub control circuit 200 and the payout / launch control circuit 30.
0. Generates a game status command related to game information data to be transmitted to the hall computer 700 and stores it in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97).
). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU1
01 returns to the process of step S92.

[7-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101.
The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure.
Indicates the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 45, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 is the main RAM 103.
Read the value of the control status flag stored in. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S102 to S110 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S102 to S110 to be executed. Also, the main CPU
101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S102).
.. In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, and when the reserved number is not “0”. (When there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 46.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103).
.. In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag is set to the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, this step S1
After the waiting time set in the process of 03 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104).
.. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the big hit is determined when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S103 has elapsed. Determine if the result is a "big hit". When the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S105) described later in the control state flag, and sets the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S1).
05). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number.
And, it is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 closes the large winning opening 540, so that the main RAM 1
Update the variable located at 03. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is,
By this process, after the time for monitoring the residual ball in the large winning opening set in step S107 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107).
.. In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the above conditions are satisfied,
The main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval time) in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 has an open upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds).
Is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S106) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S10).
9). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S109. The main symbols described above are Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-8.
And in the case of any of the special figures 2-2, the main CPU 101 controls to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state, and the above-mentioned main symbols are the special figures 1-1, the special figures 1-3, and the special figure 2-3. In the case of any one of the special figures 2-1 the game state is controlled to be set to the low probability game state (probability change flag OFF).

Next, when the big hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of pending numbers (start storage information) by “1”. do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the variation of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this processing, after the processing of step S110, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check processing (step S1).
02) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various values are sequentially set in the control state flag to advance the special symbol game. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the jackpot gaming state and the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the control status flags to "00", "01", "02", and "08". Set in order. This will result in
The main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), and special symbol display time management process (step S1).
04) and the special symbol game end process (step S110) are executed at predetermined timings in this order.

Further, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", "03". do. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and jackpot start interval management process (step S).
105) is executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the jackpot gaming state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CP
The U101 includes the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S106), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S107), and large winning opening reopening waiting time management processing (step S108).
) Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main C
The PU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 is in the process of opening the large winning opening (step S1) described above.
06), the jackpot residual ball monitoring process (step S107), the jackpot end interval process (step S109), and the special symbol game end process (step S110) are executed at predetermined timings in this order to end the jackpot game state. ..

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 51 described later) in step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 44 also branches the process flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[7-3-1-1. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 is the main RAM.
The control state flag is read out from the predetermined storage area in 103 by the load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101
Ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 is in step S1.
Move on to the process of 13.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is "0". Main CP
When the U101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0" (step S11).
YES in 3), move to the process of step S114, and the number of reserved 2nd starting opening prizes is "0".
(NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". Main CP
When U101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (step S11).
NO in 4), move to the process of step S115, and the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0".
If it is determined that the above is true (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is pending. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four reserved fluctuation displays (reserved balls) of the first special symbol is performed. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. Is included.

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4), respectively.
Shift to 3). At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU again
101 transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning the start opening, and is set to the jackpot determination random value previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss" (big hit determination) based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both see FIG. 42) in the waiting time timer. .. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings. In this embodiment, the main CPU 1
01 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and is in variable display or pending. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol of. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variation display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol is performed. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. In addition, the start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes
For example, a random value for jackpot determination or a random value for design determination extracted at the time of winning the second starting port 440,
Data showing the determined fluctuation pattern and the like is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117, executes the processes of steps S118 and S119, and then ends the special symbol storage check process.

[7-3-2. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S13).
1). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process ("02".
If it is determined to be (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 is set to the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time).
Determines whether or not is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the variation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (step S13)
NO in 2), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S132).
), The main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S1)
YES in 33), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S134. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S133),
The main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU1
01 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 issues a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol to the main RAM.
The process of setting to 103 is performed (step S138). As a result, the sub control circuit 200
Is sent a jackpot start command.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses a jackpot type determination table (FIG. 22, FIG. 26 or FIG. 27).
Refer to), set the round number upper limit value (large winning opening opening number upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command) in the main RAM 103, and set the round number display LED pattern flag (step S139). ). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value indicating the special symbol game end process (““
08 ”) is set (step S141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[7-3-2-1. Time reduction number subtraction process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a time reduction number subtraction process by the main CPU 101.
The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, main C
The PU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151).
.. The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes 0. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of times set as the time reduction counter is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[7-3-3. Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (YES in step S161), the main C
PU101 shifts to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S161), the main CPU 10
1 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S1).
64). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value indicating the special symbol game end process (““
08 ”) is set (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (
Step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S1)
YES in 66), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S167. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S166),
The main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S168). If it is a probabilistic jackpot (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S168),
The main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S172). In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table (FIGS. 22 and 26).
Or, referring to FIG. 27), a jackpot with 100 time reductions (for example, Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-).
3. When it is (3, special figure 2-1 etc.), set 100 times in the time reduction counter, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-). 8
, Special figure 2-2, etc.), set 10000 times to the time reduction counter. However, the time reduction counter that is set when the time reduction is continued until the next big hit game state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall. Any number of times that cannot occur realistically will do. In this way, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall in the time reduction counter, the time reduction is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Furthermore, when the jackpot is 100 times of time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set in the time reduction counter), and when the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game state is executed, flag processing is performed. (As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state is continued).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S).
173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag.
That is, the process of setting the jackpot flag, which is set to ON in the predetermined area of the main RAM 34, to OFF is performed.

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[7-3-3-1. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure
The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S182. When the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S).
183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main C
PU101 shifts to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. Table pattern 2 is shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).
Among the fluctuation time determination tables of the special symbol shown in, the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) corresponds.

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. Table pattern 3 is shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).
Among the fluctuation time determination tables of the special symbol shown in, the table pattern when the time reduction flag is ON (both big hit and loss) corresponds.

[7-4. Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101.
The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical value described in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 51 (
"00" to "04") indicate a normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 is the main RA.
Read the normal symbol control status flag stored in M103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of steps S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192).
.. In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol, and the number of reserved symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is executed after the determined normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed by the process of step S192.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193).
.. In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. A value indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) (““
02 ”) is set, and the waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194).
.. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a normal symbol control state flag having a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and is a big hit when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, by this process, it is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, the result of the big hit judgment is "big hit"
If not, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S195) described later. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the big hit determination is determined to be "big hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 is the blade member 46 of the ordinary electric accessory 460.
In order to close 20 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the variable located in the main RAM 103 is updated. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196).
In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending fluctuation display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol next time. Furthermore, the main CPU 101
Sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control status flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU1
01 ends the normal symbol control process.

[8. Sub control main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) including the sub CPU processor.
Will execute the sub-control main process. About this sub-control main process FIG. 52
Will be described using. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control main, and this process is started when the power is turned on. 61, 72, 73, which will be described later.
In both FIGS. 74 and 98, the host control circuit 210 is turned on.
Although it is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process executed by 0, FIG. 52 is one of the typical examples.
It is a process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like (step S201). ).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) at the time of startup, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time of timeout), the power failure process is executed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the operation means input process (step S203).
..

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command analysis process (step S204).
.. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205).
.. The effect mode determination process is a process for determining the effect mode displayed on the display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value. The setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the host control circuit 2100
The overflow points of the first starting winning opening are counted, and when the pending number overflow command of the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the overflow points of the first starting winning opening. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines that the setting suggestion effect is executed in the above-mentioned effect mode determination process. In a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is OFF, such as in a normal gaming state, it is not easy to win a game ball in the first starting opening 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's disappointment cannot be measured. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player without directly causing a loss to the hole by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state. It will be possible. In addition, some players interrupt the launch of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this respect, the first starting port 42
It is also possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball of 0 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the above setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the overflow point of the first start winning opening reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggestion effect is not necessarily limited to this, and the first start winning opening winning is performed. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the hold quantity overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to guess only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting only from the information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to guess the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

Further, as described above, the hold number overflow command for the first start opening winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 on the premise that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process in step S72. be. Therefore, when it is not determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is exceeded the holding upper limit. , Host control circuit 21
00 does not add to the overflow point of the first start winning opening. Therefore, the first
Under the circumstances where the overflow point of the first starting winning opening reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (for example, for a predetermined point of 50 points). At 49 points), the first starting port 420 (
For example, if it is determined in the setting check process (see FIG. 42) of step S72 that the winning of the game ball to (see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit, the host control circuit 2
Without the setting suggestion effect by 100, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 42), on condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is the same as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make a suggestion effect.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, the host control circuit 2100 has a first starting port 420, a second starting port 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (all of which are, for example, FIG. 5) at the start of the reach effect.
(See), a specific winning opening is randomly determined, for example, by lottery. Then, during the execution of the reach effect, the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is the main control circuit 10.
When transmitted from 0, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect. For example, among the players, there is a player who interrupts the launch of the game ball when the reach effect with a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. Further, in the reach production, it may be immediately found that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, the player may not start the variable display next time until the reach effect is completed, and the interest may be reduced. In this respect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. Moreover, if the person in charge of managing the gaming machine can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine in which he / she plays the game is low. According to the example of, such a fear can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the specific winning opening is randomly determined from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (all of which, for example, see FIG. 5), for example, by lottery. It is preferable to keep it confidential without disclosing which is a specific winning opening. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning openings are the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are, for example, see FIG. 5). Among them, for example, it is decided at random by lottery, but it is not always limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as a specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the host control circuit 2 is used.
Although 100 determines that the setting suggestion effect is executed, the main CPU 101 may determine it.

If the game ball wins in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 42) is performed if the specific winning opening is the starting opening. Will be. The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined to be normal in the above setting check process (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the above setting check process (step S7).
NO) in 21 not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect, but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner by the process of step S734. Also, the host control circuit 2100
As for, even if the decorative design is being changed with the reach effect, the change of the decorative pattern is continued. However, the host control circuit 2100 is a voice / LED control circuit 220.
The output of the sound effect by 0 may be stopped, or the output volume may be reduced.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command transmission process (step S206).
.. The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 2300 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 executes the voice control process (step S208).
). In this process, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 executes a control process regarding the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the audio / LED control circuit 2200
LED2 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.
Light emission control for lighting or blinking 5 is performed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this accessory control process, the operating accessory and the operating member constituting the accessory among the accessories constituting the bonus group 1000 are operated based on the effect designation information via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. This is a process for controlling the drive of the effect drive motor, and the details will be described later. In such a sub-control main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[8-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process by the host control circuit 2100. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the subwork RAM 2100a after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a consistency check on the received command (
Step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub-lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the host control circuit 2100 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (whether or not there is a dialogue notice, whether or not there is a SU notice, etc.) is selected as the effect pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process that is separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 42) during the execution of the game, and the set value data is "0" to "5" in this setting check process. If it is not within the range of (step S72 in FIG. 43)
NO) in 1, and the processes of steps S722 to S726 are executed, and then the error processing in step S727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value data is "0" even though the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82, or the set value may have been changed illegally. When it is within the range of "5" (for example, step S72).
(When YES is determined in 1), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, and the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. A command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the host control circuit 2100 that received this command
The suitability of the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "this time set value") indicated by the command received this time is determined. This suitability determination is, for example, the setting value information indicated by the command received last time (hereinafter, ""
This is a process for determining whether or not the previously set value) and the current set value match.

Then, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and if the previous set value and the current set value do not match, the set value is abnormal. Is determined to be.

Further, when the received set value information is abnormal, the host control circuit 2100 executes the set value abnormality processing. In this abnormal execution process, for example, an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and in place of or in addition to this, the display area for notifying that the set value is abnormal is notified. It is a process to output the sound to be performed.

The suitability determination of the above-mentioned set value information is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all of the set value information received three times or more match. It may be determined whether or not the setting value information is present, or some of the setting value information received multiple times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the setting value this time) match. It may be determined whether or not it is present. However, the setting change process (FIG. 33)
When the host control circuit 2100 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) has been executed, the setting value this time is simply stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, and the previous setting is made. It is not determined whether or not the past set value including the value and the current set value match.

Further, it is preferable to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (adequacy determination of the set value information) not only during the execution of the game but also when the power is turned on after the power is cut off as long as the setting change process is not executed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

The setting determination process executed by the host control circuit 2100 described above is a command analysis process (
It may be executed in step S204), or it may be executed after exiting the subroutine of command analysis processing.

[8-2. Command transmission process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 includes each control circuit 204 to 207.
When a control command (message) is transmitted to the user, a message setting process is executed (step S251). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the subwork RAM 2100a. conduct. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting the corresponding direct table in the predetermined area of the subwork RAM 2100a based on the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message transmission process (step S253).
). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command transmission process. For this message sending process,
It will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

[8-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the host control circuit 2100. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting whether or not the system operates (step S262).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the notice pattern (step S264).
As a result, the device to be the transmission destination (control circuits 204 to 207) is stored in the direct buffer.
), Whether or not the system is operating, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern are stored. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message setting process.

[8-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a directory table registration process by the host control circuit 2100. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S2).
74). When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the directory table registration process.

[8-2-3. Message sending process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the host control circuit 2100 will follow each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. A process of transmitting a message to is performed (step S281).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message transmission process.

[9. Expandability of gaming machines according to this embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, depending on the set value set)
I tried to change the probability variation inrush rate, time saving inrush rate), but it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, only one of these may be changed according to the set value, or multiple may be changed. May be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal electric accessory 46 is predetermined. It changes from the closed state to the open state only for the period of. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the open state to the closed state (that is, the launch timing of the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the launch timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notifying the launch timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear process is a setting change process (step S2).
Since it is always performed when 4) is executed, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process is set. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, the game is set to a high-probability game state until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times), and the game state is low after the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed. In a pachinko gaming machine (so-called "ST machine") that shifts to a stochastic gaming state, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high probabilistic gaming state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change process is performed. When the backup clear process is performed without the above, the probability change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag is set to ON (the rest of the high probability gaming state). You may try to keep the memory of the number of games). Furthermore, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the ON setting of the probability change flag is continued, and when the setting value is different from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the big winning opening 540 is in an open state when the count of the game balls winning in the big winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls. When one of the conditions of the time when the time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the big winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, we have prepared multiple conditions for the large winning opening 540 to change from the open state to the closed state (
For example, prepare multiple conditions with different expected values for the number of game balls that can be awarded to the large winning opening 540 during one round), and by changing the conditions according to the set value, a high setting is made. The higher the expected value, the easier it is to select the condition. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the large winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the higher the setting value is, the longer the opening time of the large winning opening 540 is likely to be. Be done. In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is closed from the open state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the setting value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to make it.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a normal hit mode, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, but is normally electric. By making the time (opening time) in which the accessory 46 is in the open state different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot in which the probability change flag is turned ON as in Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-4, the next jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game state is completed. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is played, but it is not always limited to this, and when the gaming ball wins a prize at a specific timing (for example, the first starting port 420 / second starting port 440, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. When the variable display of the special symbol is started), a transition lottery for whether or not to transition from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, the transition probability from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state differs according to the set value.
The higher the set value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability gaming state (lower the transition probability from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment,
For example, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed when a game ball is won in the first start port 420 and the second start port 440, but when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (step S721). NO) is the setting change process (step S24).
The result of the above transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by the execution of (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction inrush rate) are changed according to the set value. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above has been described, the provision of setting differences is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and some configurations may be changed. An example of another extension with a partial configuration changed will be described below. The configurations not particularly mentioned in the description of the following other extended examples are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but in the following, each member such as the main CPU is intentionally designated except for the step number. Not done.

[9-1. Expansion example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the high-probability game is started until the next jackpot gaming state is started. A so-called "probability variable loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number") can be different depending on the set value (such a gaming machine is a "limiter"). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. 58.
Note that FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the expansion example 1 has a loop count checking means for checking the loop count when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a limiter count lottery for performing a limiter count lottery when the loop count is 0. The lottery means, the loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is within the specified range (within the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the number of loops is the specified value (5, which is the upper limit of the limiter in this example). If this is the case, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state ends to a low probability state, and the loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. In the limiter number lottery, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, at the start of the jackpot gaming state,
It may be performed at any timing during the big hit game state or at the end of the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 58, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. There is a 15% chance that it will be decided 4 times, and a 5% chance that it will be decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 25% probability, twice with a 25% probability, and 3 with a 25% probability.
It is decided in times, it is decided in 4 times with a probability of 20%, and it is decided in 5 times with a probability of 5%. Setting 3
Then, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 15%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 20%. And it is decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 15% probability, twice with a 20% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 25% probability. It is decided to be decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 20%, and 3 with a probability of 25%.
It is decided in times, it is decided in 4 times with a probability of 25%, and it is decided in 5 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 10%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expectation that the number of limiters will be determined.

In this way, by making the expectation for the number of limiters different according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, one chance (big hit). It is possible to make the amount of prize balls given to the player different according to the set value in the opportunity until the player is controlled to the low probability gaming state when he wins once. Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters differs depending on the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the set value from being guessed by the player depending on the number of limiters. It has become.

In the above expansion example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value.
The lottery is not always essential, for example, although there is a concern that the set value will be guessed by the player, it is 3 times for settings 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6. In addition, the number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value.

The number of limiters described above may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, when the number of times of the above limiter is separately determined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the number of first limiters for the first special symbol is set. Is determined, and when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is controlled during the above loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is not incremented, and the number of second limiters for the second special symbol is not incremented. To decide. In this case, the loop may be terminated (controlled to a low probability gaming state) when either the first limiter count or the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, or the first limiter count and the second limiter count may be terminated. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of times of the above limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When is a big hit, the number of limiters is determined, and during the loop, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination.
Increment the number of loops. Then, when the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 1 is a so-called probabilistic loop machine, but it does not necessarily have to be a probabilistic loop machine. For example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine". You can also do it. The "ST machine" controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number of times"). It is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the variable display of the special symbol (referred to as) is performed, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be different depending on the set value. That is, the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance (the chance of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state when one big hit is won). ), It is possible to make the prize ball amount given to the player different according to the set value.

In the so-called "ST machine", the "ST number of times" can be set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), but it is also possible to make the ST number of times different depending on the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" may determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, and 66 times in setting 3.
By setting the number of times, setting 4 to 69 times, setting 5 to 72 times, and setting 6 to 75 times, the higher the setting value, the more ST.
The expected value of the number of times can be increased. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. note that,
When the number of STs is different depending on the set value, it is preferable to make the number of time reductions common to all the set values. For example, the expected value of the number of STs or the number of STs is 60 times in setting 1 and 6 times in setting 2.
When setting 3 is 66 times, setting 4 is 69 times, setting 5 is 72 times, and setting 6 is 75 times.
It is conceivable to set the number of time reductions to 60, for example, common to all settings. And the sub CPU
For example, the display device 16 is used to perform an effect that allows the display device 16 to grasp that the game is in a high-probability game state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games). Regardless of whether or not it is, it is preferable to perform an effect that makes it difficult to grasp that the game is in a high-probability gaming state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. This makes it possible to make the ST number of times and the expected value of the ST number of times different according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (N in step S721).
In O), even during the loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), the number of loops does not reach the number of limiters, and the setting change process (step S24) is performed. By execution, the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[9-2. Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2 has a specific area in which a specific mouth is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is,
The big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the conditional device.

Further, in the extended example 2, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving gaming state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the first special symbol game.
Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. Based on the small hit game execution means for executing the small hit game to be opened from the beginning and the game ball winning a prize in the specific area which is the open mode due to the execution of the small hit game, via the payout / launch control circuit. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

Further, in the extended example 2, the number of time reductions is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific opening is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, in a short game state of 5 times, a normal hit occurs and the game ball wins a prize at the starting port. As a result, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece is activated and a specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific mouth, the main CPU executes the big hit game. Further, when the normal hit is not obtained in the time-saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls to the non-time-saving game state. In the short-time game state, the game is played by right-handed firing toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time-saving game state, the left-handed game is fired toward the left side area of the game area. A game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the extended example 2, at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving gaming state. In the above, it is possible to make the opening frequency of a specific area and thus the payout different according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, and 1/7 for setting 3.
Setting 4 is 1/6, setting 5 is 1/5, and setting 6 is 1/4. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of winning the game ball in the specific area, and by extension, it becomes possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability change flag may be set to ON in the time-saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability change flag to ON.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize in the first start port or the second start port while the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the main CPU, the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that it is not normal in the setting check process, the main C
The PU turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time processing without executing the small hit game based on the small hit. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit.

[9-3. Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2-2 includes a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU determines the jackpot of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port (hereinafter, ""
(Referred to as "first special lottery") is performed, and a jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening.

In addition, the main CPU is a lottery of the first special symbol among the first special lottery and the second special lottery (
Hereinafter, the first game state in which the "first special lottery" is mainly performed (for example, the normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF) and the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "lottery") Any of a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state (for example, an advantageous gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF) in which the "second special lottery" is mainly performed. It is equipped with a game state control means that can control the crab. In this pachinko gaming machine, if a jackpot is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, a normal gate is provided in the right area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is held. When the result of this ordinary lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), which facilitates winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Will be done. Therefore, when the game is played by firing the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, the second start port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area and the game is played. The frequency of winning game balls is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU is the first with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value.
A first jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game in which a predetermined jackpot is opened over a plurality of rounds when a jackpot determination of a special symbol is performed and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot is provided.

Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is used. A second jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU performs a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, and when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit. It also has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example,
Setting 1 is 1/300, setting 2 is 1/290, setting 3 is 1/280, and setting 4 is 270.
It is 1/260, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1.
Setting 2 is 1/29, setting 3 is 1/28, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26,
It is set to 1/25 in setting 6.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU has a first big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds, and a second special lottery result. It has a second big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when the big hit is made. Even if the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit are common big prize openings. It may be good or it may be a different big prize opening.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, and 1/7 for setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. , Setting 4 is 1/6, and setting 5 is 1/6.
As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set value set, but any set value is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same large winning opening as the large winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins a prize in this large winning opening, the payout / launch control circuit operates a payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, so that the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU performs the small hit determination with the small hit probability of 0. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU is based on the first special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Second
It is provided with a second special symbol variation display control means for displaying variation of the special symbol. The first special symbol variation display control means changes and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the game ball wins the second starting opening while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. However, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If the game ball wins in the first starting opening while the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening, even if the second special symbol is in the variable display. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. The special lottery (1st special lottery, 2nd special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the second starting port in the first game state, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable amount of time for the result of the second special lottery to be displayed. Will be.

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins at the second starting port, the second special symbol is displayed. It takes time until the fluctuation display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit). Even if the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is confirmed to be a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to make a so-called aim, such as having a game ball win a prize in the large winning opening aiming at the timing when it is confirmed that the second special symbol is a small hit. Further, in the first gaming state, when the gaming ball is launched toward, for example, the right side region of the gaming region, a warning sound is output from the speaker, for example, under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, the game is played by firing the game ball toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, by passing the game ball through the normal gate, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated through the normal lottery, but also the second game.
The fluctuation time of the special symbol is as short as 1 sec, and in the second special lottery, the small hit is won with a higher probability than 1/10 regardless of the set value. A game of firing a ball is performed.

Average time of fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first gaming state (for example, 1000 sec)
Is preferably, for example, 50 times or more, but is preferably at least 10 times or more, the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first gaming state.

The sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). To prepare for. However, this decorative symbol variation display control means is second in the first gaming state.
Even if the game ball wins a prize at the start opening, the decoration that synchronizes with the first special symbol when the game ball wins at the first start opening is not displayed in a conspicuous manner. The variation display of the design is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the example of the above "conspicuous aspect", the liquid crystal display device has, for example, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) in the substantially center of the display area. It is possible to display the result of the special lottery by changing the display. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ○ or Δ) that can be variablely displayed (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first to third symbols occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is on the first to third symbols rather than the fourth symbol. It will be suitable. Then, for example, the sub CPU is in the first gaming state.
When the game ball wins in the 2nd starting opening, only the 4th symbol is variablely displayed without changing the 1st to 3rd symbols, while when the game ball wins in the 1st starting opening, the 1st symbol is displayed. -The third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the fourth symbol is also displayed in a variable manner. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins in the second start opening, the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not conspicuously displayed, and the game ball is in the first start opening. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner when the prize is won.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Extended Example 2-2 described above, in the first gaming state, even if the gaming ball wins at the second starting opening, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit when the game ball wins at the second starting port (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting).
) Is higher than the probability of becoming a big hit (1 / 30th to 1 / 25th depending on the setting), so the big winning opening is frequently opened by the small hit game, and the time saving flag is not set (). That is, it is possible to increase the chances that the game ball as a prize will be paid out (without increasing the execution frequency of the ordinary lottery). Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the ball is ejected according to the set set value. Can be made different.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize in the first start port or the second start port while the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the main CPU, the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. Therefore, the main CPU, for example, in the second game state, even when the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port during the variable display of the second special symbol, step S
The setting check process of 72 or step S82 is performed. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time process is executed. That is, in the second gaming state,
Even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the above small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol being displayed in the second game state is a small hit, the information indicating that it is in the second game state and the information indicating that it is a small hit are included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[9-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and has a specific area provided with a specific opening for that purpose. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is,
The big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the conditional device.

Further, in the extended example 3, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving gaming state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the first special symbol game.
Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece and operates the inside of the specific area. A small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game that allows the game ball to enter the game is provided. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area due to the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way and the game ball that has entered the inside of the specific area is detected to enter (accept) the specific port, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the big hit determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a big hit, the main CPU performs the first big hit game in which the round game for opening the big winning opening is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state and the game ball entering the specific mouth when the small hit game is executed, the round game for operating the predetermined movable piece is performed over a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state to be performed.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of a small hit game and the opening pattern of an ordinary electric accessory) are set values. It is different according to. Also in this extended example 3, the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the fact that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits the right is a normal hit. Occasionally, the normally electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it becomes easy to win a game ball at the starting port. As a method of making the execution frequency of the small hit game different according to the set value, for example, if the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination is different according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value. It can be realized by letting it go.

As a method of making the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port different according to the set value, a method of making the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination different according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, and 40 for setting 3.
1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and 1/10 for setting 6. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the small hit game, and by extension, the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

Also in this extended example 3, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start opening or the second start opening while the in-CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Will be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit.

[9-5. Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not immediately controlled to the jackpot gaming state by itself. The condition device is operated based on the above, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the bonus continuous operation right gate, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the bonus continuous operation left gate.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4 includes a bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 and a bonus continuous operation right gate 1110 in the gaming area. Further, the distribution device 1120 capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 or the bonus continuous operation right gate 1110 is a bonus continuous operation gate 1100, It is located above 1110.

The left gate 1100 for continuous operation of the accessory and the right gate 1110 for continuous operation of the accessory have their respective features.
A left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (neither of which are shown) that can detect the passage of a game ball are provided. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor normally have the passage detection of the game ball disabled, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, and then the game ball selects one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection that it has passed.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, an 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the character continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU is in a 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which two rounds of round games are executed, and 16 rounds. The 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the jackpot game state determined in the lottery is controlled.

It should be noted that the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the game state is the same.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead of this, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120 to either the bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 or the bonus continuous operation right gate 1110 by regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the right gate 1110 (see FIG. 59), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball is useful. Object continuous operation It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 (see FIG. 60).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing the game ball differs between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, the sorting device 112
The operation of 0 is repeated in the setting 1 for 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, setting 2.
Then, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.7 seconds and the second posture of 1.3 seconds is repeated, and in the setting 3, the first posture is 0.9.
Operation that repeats seconds and second posture 1.1 seconds, in setting 4, first posture 1.1 seconds and second posture 0.9
The operation of repeating seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds in setting 5, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds in setting 6. By setting the operation, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

In this extended example 4, the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuously operated left gate 1100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuously operated right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the big hit game state is the same as when it is done. That is, although it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot gaming state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state according to the set value, but the left gate sensor is not limited to this. Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the player detects the passage of the game ball to the bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the bonus continuous operation right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 30%). Is determined by a lottery performed at the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 1110, which is a continuous operation of the accessory, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). It is also possible to decide which of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the big hit game state in which a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is possible to increase the possibility of

Further, in the extended example 4, when the game ball passes through any one of the two gates (the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball can be used at either of the above two gates. A game ball may win a prize at the starting opening before passing. In this case, the main CPU is in a situation where the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates even though the condition device has been activated.
101 executes a setting check process (for example, see step S72 in FIG. 42) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, and is determined to be abnormal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 43) in the setting check process. There are times. In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

Further, in the extended example 4, two gates (continuous operation of the accessory) in which the continuous operation of the accessory is activated when the passage of the game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating below the distribution device 1120. The left gate 1100 and the continuous operation of the accessory right gate 1110) are provided, but the one provided below the distribution device 1120 is not necessarily limited to the continuous operation of the accessory gate, for example, a starting port and a general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 has a start port that triggers a big hit determination of a special symbol and a general prize that does not trigger the big hit determination of the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120 by regular operation. Distribute to one of the mouths. Then, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is repeated, for example, in the setting 1 for 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, and in the setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1. The operation of repeating 3 seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. In setting 5, the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds, and in the setting of 6, the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value, regardless of the set value, the player launches the game ball at the same time. It is possible to have the fun of being able to aim for a prize at the starting point.

[9-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not make the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but makes it possible to change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. .. In this extended example 5, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five stages, and may be a plurality of stages. Can be determined arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, the main CPU is, for example, 1/99.
If the big hit judgment of the probability special symbol is performed and the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, for example, 5
Control the round jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to setting 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is relatively small, so-called Amadeji. It becomes possible to execute a game in a game-like manner.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball output). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to the high-probability gaming state, and when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state ends and becomes the low-probability gaming state. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state is completed is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next big hit gaming state is executed. That is, the set value is set 3
When set to, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probabilistic loop machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state is completed is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next big hit gaming state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop number").
When the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called limiter machine. In the above game characteristics, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, the present invention may be a so-called ST machine in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is terminated after a predetermined period has elapsed and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the probability variation flag ON when the jackpot gaming state ends, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , Control to a high probability gaming state. Further, in the high probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when making a big hit determination of a special symbol, and when it is determined to shift the game state in the game state transition lottery, the probability change flag is set to OFF. , Execute control to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it becomes possible to execute the game in a game-like manner in which the lottery for shifting to the low-probability gaming state is performed in the high-probability gaming state.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine can be changed according to the set value, for example, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, and the pachinko with a wide variety of game characteristics can be changed. It is possible to run the game with one machine.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called Amadeji game, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine, and in setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a probabilistic loop machine, and in setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a so-called limiter machine, and setting 5
In, it is possible to execute a game in which a lottery for transitioning to a low-probability gaming state is performed in a high-probability gaming state, but all of these game characteristics should be able to be executed according to a set value. Is not required. However, it is preferable that the game can be switched between the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine according to the set value. So-called S
Both the game characteristics called the T machine and the game characteristics called the so-called probabilistic loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the high-probability gaming state will be the next time. It greatly differs depending on whether the game continues to the big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics, the pachinko gaming machine can be used by the manager of the gaming machine, etc., in a wider range of ways. At the same time, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can improve the interest.

[9-7. Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and benefits are given based on the result of the gaming. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player to play the game and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also the main control circuit 100 itself is used. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the gaming media management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the gaming machine.
It is connected to a bidirectional communication function via an external game medium handling device (not shown) and a predetermined interface, and is necessary for the game medium lending operation (that is, the player to perform the game medium loading operation). Win a prize (operation to provide a game medium) or a role related to paying out a game medium (
When the winning combination is established), the operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the action of causing the player to pay out the game medium and acquire the necessary game medium), or the game medium used for the game. It suffices that the operation of electromagnetically recording can be performed. Further, the gaming medium management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the gaming medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area.
When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid.
The ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, to get a ball
It means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine.
Conversion from game value managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting of possession balls (ball lending)
Accept the request for return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is the so-called C.
It is an R unit and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored.
Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[10. Processing executed by the host control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the various control circuits in the sub-board 2020 of the sub-control circuit 200 (see, for example, FIG. 10) will be described. The sub control circuit 20
0 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 10).
Various processes are performed based on these various commands.

In the following, first, the processing related to various devices and the like will be described, and then the processing related to the hall menu task will be described. Both the processing related to the hall menu task and the processing related to various devices and the like are processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) and the like. Each will be described using a different flowchart.

[10-1. Processing related to various devices]
With reference to FIGS. 61 to 99, processes related to various devices and the like will be described. note that,
61, 72, 73, 74 and 98, including FIG. 52 described above, are flowcharts showing an example of the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed when the power is turned on. Is. All of these are processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100), but for convenience of explanation, the processes are appropriately omitted depending on various situations. For example, in FIGS. 52 and 61, the accessory control process (step S210, step S1213) is shown, but FIGS. 72 and 73.
In FIGS. 74 and 98, the illustration of the accessory control process is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 61, 72, and 7
3. In FIGS. 74 and 98, even if the processing is the same, different reference numerals are given for convenience of explanation. For example, to explain the initialization process as an example, various initialization processes (step S1) of FIG. 61 will be described.
201), the initialization process of FIG. 72 (step S1381), the initialization process of FIG. 73 (step S1391), and the initialization process of FIG. 74 (step S401) are all substantially the same initialization process. Taking the accessory control process as an example, the accessory control process of FIG. 52 (step S)
210) and the accessory control process (step S1213) of FIG. 61 are substantially the same process.

As shown in FIG. 61, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initialization processes (step S).
1201). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initial setting processes such as hardware initialization process, device initialization process, various application initialization process, backup data return initialization process, and RTC acquisition process. conduct. When the game data is erased by clearing the RAM, random number initialization processing is also performed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 clears the watchdog timer counter each time each initialization process is completed. At startup, the reset time of the watchdog timer is set, and if the service pulse is not written after that (at the time of timeout), the power cutoff process is performed. The timing for clearing the watchdog timer is at the start of each process in the main loop in the sub-control main process, at the start of each initialization process, and at the time of transition to the power cut process.

The host control circuit 2100 then enters the main loop and R based on the RTC time.
The TC acquisition process, that is, the process of acquiring the current time is performed (step S1202).

The host control circuit 2100 performs random number initialization processing in step S1203. This random number initialization process will be described later.

The host control circuit 2100 acquires the control code of the accessory in step S1204, and obtains the control code of the accessory.
Synchronous processing between the accessory and the solenoid is performed (step S1205). These processes will be described in the "accessory solenoid control process" described later.

The host control circuit 2100 performs subdevice input processing in step S1206. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 is an information acquisition process of the operation content based on the input state of the operation means or the like (the process of determining whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means such as a button). And so on. In this sub-device input process (step S1206),
It includes adjusting the brightness of LEDs and the like by operating the player and the like.

The host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes in step S1207. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes such as sound request control process, LED request control process, accessory request control process, and accessory control process. The sound request, LED request, accessory request, and the like are stored in a buffer and output to each device after the bank flip in step S1214, which will be described later. This makes it possible to synchronize with drawing. The bank flip is a process of switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function.

By the way, the accessory control process is performed in various request control processes (S1207), and is also shown in FIG. 61 to be performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). Step S12 after step S1212)
It is not mandatory to be done at 13. From the animation construction process (step S1210), in view of the fact that the animation request stored in the buffer is output in the animation construction process (step S1210) one frame before and the animation update process (step S1211) in the accessory process. Also preferably done before. However, when the accessory request stored in the buffer is output in the same frame as the frame stored in the buffer, the accessory control process is performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). Is also good.

The host control circuit 2100 then enters the packet reception loop within the main loop.
Performs command control processing between main and sub (step S1208). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a command data reading process (command receiving process) when command data is received from the main CPU 101 and a command data storage process (received data storage process) in the subwork RAM 2100a.

The host control circuit 2100 performs a game data backup process in step S1209. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first data (magic code, program version and SUM value) and the second data (both are information set in the hall menu) are the game data used for the RAM clear determination. And SU
M value) is prepared. Then, in the game data backup process, after the first data is stored in the game data, it is backed up to SRAM 2100b (see FIG. 10). Also, S
The game data is backed up (mirrored) to another area of the RAM 2100b. After the power is turned on, the game data is restored from the data backed up in the SRAM 2100b. At this time, the first data is used to check whether the backed up data is damaged. If the backed up data is corrupted, check if the second data is corrupted. At this time, the data stored in all the SRAM 2100b such as the hall menu information is also initialized.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S12).
10). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs command analysis, state setting, and lottery processing, and in response to these, generates an animation request necessary for performing effect control using the display device 16, and this animation request. In response to the effect control (display) in the display device 16 executed based on the above, various requests (drawing request, sound request, LED request, and accessory request) for operating the various effect devices are generated.

The host control circuit 2100 performs the processes of steps S1208 to S1210.
It is executed until it is executed for the number of received commands, and when it is executed for the number of received commands, the packet reception loop is exited. After that, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S).
1211), drawing control process (step S1212), accessory control process (step S1213)
) And the bank flip / bank flip end wait (step S1214), each process in the main loop is repeated.

The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly executes the processing (main loop processing) of the above-mentioned example of steps S1202 to S1214 in a predetermined FPS cycle. The FPS cycle is, for example, about 16.7 msec (60 FPS) and about 33.3 msec (30 FPS).
Etc. are set. The predetermined FPS cycle is time adjusted in step S1214.

Below, timer interrupt processing, sub-device input processing, backlight control processing, backlight and various LED brightness adjustment, RTC acquisition processing, composition playback control, sound amplifier control processing, sound request control processing (for the same channel) (When there are a plurality of sound requests), sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), LED brightness adjustment processing, accessory solenoid control processing, data load processing, and sub-random number processing will be described in this order. The description order of each of the above processes is different from the process order for convenience of explanation.

[10-2. Timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs interrupt processing in a cycle of 1 msec. The interrupt processing will be described in each processing described later, but here, an example of a typical interrupt processing will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). In the timer interrupt process described briefly with reference to FIG. 62 and the timer interrupt process described later (see FIGS. 69 and 71), even if they are the same process, different reference numerals are given for convenience of explanation. For example, FIG. 6 will be described by taking accessory motor control as an example.
2 accessory motor control (step S1251) and accessory motor control of FIG. 69 (step S1)
352) and the accessory motor control (step S1371) in FIG. 71 are substantially the same processing but have different reference numerals.

With reference to FIG. 62, in the timer interrupt processing, the host control circuit 2100 first receives first.
The accessory motor is controlled (step S1251). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an input state determination process based on the input information of the subdevice (step S1252). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs control processing such as the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 based on the luminance value (step S1253). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sound amplifier check process (step S1254).

[10-3. Subdevice input processing]
In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 creates subdevice input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the subdevice detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec, and this is created. The sub-device is controlled based on the sub-device input discrimination information.

When the host control circuit 2100 detects the input state of the subdevice by a timer interrupt every 1 msec, the subdevice input information and the subdevice are used as the above subdevice input discrimination information created in the main process based on the detection result. Input ON edge information, subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function), and subdevice input OFF edge information are created.

The sub-device input process shown in FIG. 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. The subdevice is controlled by the host control circuit 2100 based on input (eg operation) information, for example, a push button. Note that FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example for explaining the created subdevice input discrimination information, (a) a diagram showing the input state of the subdevice detected by the timer interrupt, and (b) created by the main process. A diagram showing the sub-device input information to be generated, (c) a diagram showing the sub-device input ON edge information created by the main process, and (c) a sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) created by the main process. It is a figure which shows (d) the figure which shows the sub-device OFF edge information created by the main process. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-device input process. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. FIG. 66 shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the sub-device input information created in the main process is created according to the sub-device input state (see FIG. 63 (a)) detected by the timer interrupt. That is, when the subdevice input state detected by the timer interrupt is ON, 1 is set. If the subdevice input status detected by the timer interrupt is OFF,
0 is set.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the sub-device input ON edge information is only one frame in the main process when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from OFF to ON. Is set.

The sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is information used for control, for example, when debugging or when the operation button is pressed and held for a long time, and is detected by a timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 63 (d). When it is detected that the input state of the subdevice is changed from OFF to ON, 1 is set for one frame in the main process. If the input state of the sub-device continues to be ON after that, 1 is set for one frame after 10 frames have elapsed in the main process, for example, as a fixed time until the start of key repeat, and thereafter, for example, in the main process. 1 is set every 4 frames. In this way, the reason why only the first frame is lengthened to 10 frames is to make it possible to determine whether or not the subdevice has been pressed for a long time, and if the first frame is short, it is determined that it is not a long press. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 63 (e), the sub-device input OFF edge information is only one frame in the main process when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from ON to OFF. Is set.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that there are a plurality of sub-devices, and the host control circuit 2100 is
Sub-device input discrimination information is managed in bit units. For example, bit0 is the main button, bit1 is the left button, bit2 is the right button, and so on. For example, subdevice input discrimination information for up to 32 devices can be managed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the sub-device input process (for example, step S120 in FIG. 61).
6) will be described. In this sub-device input process, sub-device input information, sub-device input ON edge information, and sub-device input O are used as sub-device input discrimination information.
This is a process for creating, for example, four types of information such as N-edge information (with repeat function) and sub-device input OFF edge information.

First, the host control circuit 2100 creates input information of the current subdevice based on the input state of the current subdevice (step S1301). Specifically, 1 is set if the sub device is in the ON state, and 0 is set if the sub device is in the OFF state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 updates the input information of the subdevice in accordance with the current subdevice input information, that is, the input information of the subdevice created in step S1301 (step S1302).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1 (step S1303). If the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1 (YES in step S1303), the host control circuit 2100 sets the subdevice input ON edge information to 1 (step S1304), and steps. Move to S1306. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is not 1 (that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and / and the current subdevice input information is 0), the host. The control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information to 0 (step S1305).
, Step S1306.

In step S1306, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0. If the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0 (YES in step S1306), the host control circuit 2100 sets the subdevice input OFF edge information to 1 (step S1307), and steps. Move to S1309. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is not 0 (that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and / and the current subdevice input information is 1), the host. The control circuit 2100 sets the subdevice input OFF edge information to 0 (step S130).
8), the process proceeds to step S1309.

The host control circuit 2100 performs subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in step S1309. Details of this sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described later.

When the subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in step S1309 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 sets the input information of the current subdevice to the previous subdevice input information (step S1310), and inputs the subdevice. End the process.

Next, the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the previous sub-device input information is 0 (step S1321). .. If the previous sub-device input information is 0 (YES in step S1321), the process proceeds to step S1322.

In step S1322, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the subdevice input information this time is 1. If the subdevice input information this time is 1 (step S)
YES in 1322), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1, the process proceeds to step S1323. On the other hand, if the current sub-device input information is not 1 (NO in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 0, the sub-device input is ON. Ends the edge information (with repeat function) processing.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) to 1 (step S1323), sets 10 frames as elapsed frames (step S1324), and sets the sub-device input ON edge information. (With repeat function) Ends the process.

In step S1321, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 (step S).
NO) in 1321, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to step S1325 in FIG.

With reference to FIG. 66, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1325 whether or not the subdevice input information this time is 1. If the current subdevice input information is 1 (YES in step S1325), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 1, subtract 1 from the elapsed frame. ((
Step S1326) and step S1327.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1327 whether or not the elapsed frame is 0. If the elapsed frame is 0 (YES in step S1327), the subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 1 (step S13).
At the same time as 28), the elapsed frame is set to 4 (step S1329), and the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing is terminated.

In step S1325, if the current subdevice input information is not 1 (NO in step S1325), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0, the host control Circuit 2100 sets the elapsed frame to 0
(Step S1330), and the process proceeds to step S1331.

When the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 0 in step S1331, the host control circuit 2100 ends the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing.

In this way, the host control circuit 2100 creates the above-mentioned four types of subdevice input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the subdevice detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec. By controlling the sub-devices based on these four types of sub-device input discrimination information, it is easy to control the sub-device's repeated hitting effect, long-press effect control, time setting control, and other operation control. It becomes possible.

[10-4. Backlight control process]
Next, a backlight control process (for example, a backlight control process for controlling a backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example for conceptually explaining the backlight control process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the backlight control process.

The backlight control process of this embodiment is SPI asynchronous data write (SPI + DMA).
For example, Serial Peripheral In
A signal equivalent to pulse width modulation (hereinafter referred to as "PWM") is continuously output from the serial output terminal of terface (hereinafter referred to as "SPI") so that the duty (luminance) can be changed. It was done. This makes it possible to control the backlight without using a driver for controlling the backlight.

In the present embodiment, for example, the frequency of the SPI clock is 100 kHz, the SPI1 clock is 0.01 msec, the time required for data transmission of 16 bits (1 data of the brightness data is 16 bits) is 0.16 msec, and the host control circuit 2100 is scheduled. Interruption is 1ms
The number of luminance data transmitted from the SPI between the ec and the scheduled interrupt of the host control circuit 2100 is 100 bits. Therefore, the number of luminance data transmitted between the scheduled interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 6.25 (100/16) (see FIG. 67). therefore,
For example, FIFO (First In Fir) that can set (store) 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data.
It is considered that the number of scheduled interrupts executed until 32 luminance data are replenished in the data area of st Out) is 5 to 6 times. The number of times varies depending on the time of the scheduled interrupt of the host control circuit 2100.

For example, FIFO (First In F) that can set (store) 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data.
Since the callback function is called when the number of luminance data set (stored) in the irst Out) data area is less than 32, the FIFO data area is not always filled. Therefore, if the process of setting (storing) the luminance data in the FIFO data area does not take time in other processes in the main process executed in the cycle of 33.3 msec, the FIFO data area becomes empty. (The backlight goes black).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, first 64 pieces of 1 data 16-bit brightness data are first set to fill the FIFA data area, and then 32 pieces of brightness data set in the FIFA data area are set. Below, the callback function is called, and 32 data are set in the callback function so that the FIFA data area is not emptied.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is the process at the time of initial setting (step S1341). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one process in step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1341), the luminance data with luminance 0 is F.
64 pieces are set in the data area of the IFO (step S1342), and the process proceeds to step S1343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the process at the time of initial setting (that is, the process of step S1253 in FIG. 62) (NO in step S1341), the process of step S1342 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1343.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1343 whether or not the luminance value has been changed. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the luminance value has been changed (step S).
YES in 1343), the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is changed (step S1344), and the process proceeds to step S1345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the luminance value has not been changed (NO in step S1343), the process of step S1344 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1345.

In step S1345, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than (YES in step S1345), 32 pieces of brightness data are set, that is, replenished in the data area of the FIFO (YES in step S1345).
Step S1346), the backlight control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S1345), the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight processing.

In this way, by processing the luminance data set in the FIFO data area so that it does not become empty, it is possible to continuously and continuously output a signal equivalent to PWM from the serial data output terminal of the SPI, and back. It is possible to control the backlight without using a driver for light control.

In addition, step S1343 to step S1346 of the backlight control process of this embodiment.
The processing of can be replaced as follows. That is, a set of 64 pieces of data having a brightness of 0 (that is, a set of 64 pieces (
After step S1342), a process of determining whether or not the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32 is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not the luminance value has been changed, and when it is determined that the luminance value has been changed, 32 pieces of luminance data according to the setting are set in the FIFO data area, and when it is determined that the luminance value has not been changed, the previous time. 32 pieces of the same luminance data as above are set in the data area of FIFA. In this way, the luminance data may be set in the FIFO data area and the backlight control process may be terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than 32 (half the number of data that can be set in the FIFA), 32 pieces of brightness data are replenished. The timing of replenishing the data and the number of brightness data to be replenished are not limited to this, and when the brightness data set in the FIFA data area falls below a predetermined number, the predetermined number of brightness data may be replenished. Further, the luminance data supplemented to the FIFA data area does not have to be the above-mentioned predetermined number. For example, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number, the second number is used. The brightness data may be supplemented. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the frequency of setting the brightness data in the FIFO data area from becoming too high and the brightness data set in the FIFA data area not to be empty, the above-mentioned predetermined number or the first one. The number is preferably about half the number of brightness data that can be set in the FIFO data area, but is not limited to this as described above. The above "about half" may be any range as long as the frequency of setting the brightness data in the FIFO data area does not become too high and the brightness data set in the FIFO data area does not become empty. There are various judgment methods such as less than half or less than half depending on the consumption speed of the brightness data set in the data area of. For example, since the FIFA data area in the present embodiment can set up to 64 16-bit brightness data, when the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is 1 to 64, one or more new ones or more. It is possible to set the brightness data, but from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the brightness data set in the FIFA data area becomes 0), the FIFA data. When there are two or more brightness data set in the area, it is preferable to newly set one or more brightness data. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of luminance data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. (For example, one) may be supplemented with luminance data.

[10-4-1. Modification example of backlight control processing]
Next, a modification of the backlight control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing accompanying a modified example of backlight control processing. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the backlight control process.

In a modified example of the backlight control process, whether or not a predetermined time or more has passed since the data was set in the FIFO data area in the backlight control process when the process may take a long time in the timer interrupt process of 1 msec. It is determined whether or not the data is set in the data area of the FIFO when a predetermined time or more has elapsed.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 first performs the backlight control process (step S1351). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the backlight control process in step S1351 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 before the processes after step S1352 are described.
This will be described with reference to 0.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is the process at the time of initial setting (step S1361). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one process in step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1361), the luminance data with luminance 0 is F.
64 pieces are set in the data area of the IFO (step S1362), and then step S13.
Move on to 66. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the process at the time of initial setting (that is, the process of step S1351) (NO in step S1361), the process proceeds to step S1363.

In step S1363, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than (YES in step S1363), 32 pieces of luminance data are set or replenished in the data area of the FIFO (step S1364), and the process proceeds to step S1365. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S1363),
Move to step S1366. As described above, the above 32 pieces are half the number of data that can be set in the FIFO.

In step S1365, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1365) and starts timing the elapsed time (step S1366). Step S1
When the elapsed time timing is started at 366, the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight control process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control after completing the backlight control process in step S1351 (step S1352).

In this modification, whether or not the elapsed time for starting the time counting in step S1366 has elapsed after the processing that may take a long time, such as the accessory motor control, has been performed by the host control circuit 2100. (Step S1353). If a predetermined time or more has elapsed (YES in step S1353), 32 luminance data are set in the FIFO data area (step S1354). On the other hand, if the specified time has not passed (
Since it is not necessary to replenish the luminance data in the data area of NO) and FIFO in step S1353, the process proceeds to step S1357.

As described above, since the time required for 16-bit (1 piece of luminance data is 16 bits) data transmission in SPI is 0.16 msec, it is considered that 5.12 msec is required to transmit 32 luminance data. Be done. Therefore, in this modification, step S1
In 353, it is determined whether or not 5.12 msec or more has elapsed as a predetermined time.

After performing the process of step S1354, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1355) and restarts the time counting of the elapsed time (step S1356).
.. Then, when the time counting of the elapsed time is started in step S1356, the host control circuit 2
100 performs an input state determination process (step S1357) and ends the timer interrupt process.

In this way, timing is started when the brightness data is set in the FIFO data area, and after the processing that may take time, the brightness data is replenished if the above measurement time has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the brightness data in the FIFO data area from becoming empty.

In this modification, an example in which the processes of steps S1353 to S1357 are performed after the accessory motor control (step S1352) has been described, but this is only an example. That is, from the viewpoint of preventing the luminance data set in the FIFO data area from becoming empty, if the processing of steps S1353 to S1357 is performed after the processing that may take time. Often, such processing is not limited to a particular processing.

[10-5. Brightness adjustment of backlight and various LEDs]
Next, variations in brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs will be described.
The various LEDs include the board side LED (for example, the LED arranged on the game board unit 17) and the frame side L.
ED and the like correspond to this, and in the present specification, the lamp group 25 and the like including the LED (see, for example, FIG. 9) correspond to this. Further, in the present specification, as variations of brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs, FIG. 7 shows each of the three variations of the first to third embodiments.
1 to 74 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process showing the backlight control process. FIG. 72 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining the first embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 73 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a second embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 74 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a third embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. However, FIGS. 72 to 74 show only the processes necessary for the explanation, and omit the other processes. The first described below.
In the third embodiment as well, as described above, the host control circuit 2100 is a FIFO.
When the brightness data set in the data area of the above is reduced to about half, the brightness data is replenished in the FIFO data area.

The timing for replenishing the luminance data in the FIFO data area is not limited to the time when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is reduced to about half. In the FIFO data area of the present embodiment, for example, up to 64 16-bit luminance data can be set. Therefore, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 1 to 64, one or more new luminance data can be set. Luminance data may be set. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the luminance data set in the FIFO data area becomes 0), the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 2. When there are more than one, it is preferable to newly set one or more luminance data. Also, FI
The number of luminance data that can be set in the FO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of luminance data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. (For example, one) may be supplemented with luminance data.

(First Example)
For example, when the brightness of the backlight (for example, the backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) is adjusted by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness of the backlight is changed. At this time, the control of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is performed. May affect. In such a case, the present embodiment is used.
The brightness setting of the backlight and the brightness setting of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are set as common settings.
The backlight, the panel side LED, and the frame side LED are controlled according to the setting. As a result, the update timing of the backlight control and the panel side LED and the frame side L
Even if the update timing of the ED control is different, the processing can be facilitated.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71, the host control circuit 2100 controls the accessory motor (
Step S1371), input state determination processing (step S1372), and backlight control processing (step S1373) are performed in this order.

As shown in FIG. 72, the host control circuit 2100 has an initialization process (step S138).
After performing 1), the process moves to the main loop and the LED request control process is performed (step S).
1382). The LED request made in step S1382 is created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1386 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1382, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-mentioned subdevice (button) input determination information generation process (step S1383) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1384.

In step S1384, the host control circuit 2100 is in the input state of the subdevice (
For example, the brightness of the backlight is set based on the fact that the player or the like operates the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16. The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1384 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop, and first, the brightness values of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are set according to the effect mode to be executed and the setting of the brightness value. (Step S1385). The brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is also set to, for example, three levels of strong, medium, and weak, as in the case of the backlight.

Here, by setting the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED and the setting of the brightness of the backlight as a common setting, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED can be suppressed while suppressing the increase in the control load. Both the setting and the brightness setting of the backlight can be changed by the operation of the player or the like. For example, the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness value of the backlight based on the operation of the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 by a player or the like (step S1384). The brightness values of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are also changed (step S1385). At this time, the stage of the brightness value of the backlight and
It is also common to the stage of the brightness value of the panel side LED and the frame side LED. For example, if the stage of the brightness value of the backlight is medium, the stage of the brightness value of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is also in the middle. As shown in FIG. 72, the brightness update timing of the backlight and the panel side LED
Since the brightness update timings of the frame side LED and the frame side LED are different, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is updated after the brightness of the backlight is updated. However, the brightness update timing of the backlight may be controlled to be the same as the brightness update timing of the panel side LED and the frame side LED.

The brightness of the backlight, the brightness of the panel side LED and the brightness of the frame side LED are changed based on the player or the like operating the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the brightness of the backlight, the brightness of the panel side LED and the brightness of the frame side LED may be changed based on the operation of the push button for effect. In this case, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a period (push button valid period) that functions as a push button for production, the board side L in the main flow.
It is necessary to adjust the brightness of the ED and the frame side LED to control the backlight according to the brightness of these LEDs.

The host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process in step S1386. In the animation construction process of step S1386, an LED request is created. This created LED request is waited in the buffer and then L in the next frame.
It is output in the ED request control process (see step S1382).

The host control circuit 2100 performs the processing of step S1385 and step S1386.
Repeat according to the received packet.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1387), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1388).

The host control circuit 2100 has steps S1382 to S1 in the main loop.
Each process of 388 is repeated in a cycle of 33.3 msec.

(Second Example)
For example, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED may be affected as described above. In this embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjustment operation, the brightness value of the backlight is changed immediately, but the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED is a special design. It is designed to be executed after the end of the fluctuation or between bank flips.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 71 in the timer interrupt processing.
The accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) are performed in this order.

As shown in FIG. 73, the host control circuit 2100 has an initialization process (step S139).
After performing 1), the process moves to the main loop and the LED request control process is performed (step S).
1392). The LED request made in step S1392 is created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1395 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1392, the process of generating the above-mentioned subdevice (button) input discrimination information (step S1393) based on the input state of the subdevice (for example, the luminance adjustment operation by the player or the like). ), And the process proceeds to step S1394.

In step S1394, the host control circuit 2100 is in the input state of the subdevice (
For example, the brightness of the backlight is set based on the brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1394 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop and performs the animation construction process (step S1395). In the animation construction process of step S1395, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1392) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the process of step S1395 according to the received packet.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1396), then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1397), and proceeds to step S1398.

In step S1398, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the variation of the effect identification displayed on the liquid crystal display device as the display device 16 has ended, that is, whether or not the variation time of the effect identification symbol has elapsed. (Step S1398). If the variation of the effect identification symbol is completed (YES in step S1398), the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED according to the set value at that time (step S1399).
.. On the other hand, if the change of the special symbol is not completed (NO in step S1398), 3
The processing of steps S1392 to S1399 in the main loop having a 3.3 msec cycle is repeated. The process of step S1399 may be performed during the bank flip of step S1397 instead of or in addition to when the change of the special symbol is completed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 is in the input state of the subdevice (
For example, the brightness of the backlight, which directly affects the eyes of the player, is controlled to be changed immediately based on the brightness adjustment operation by the player, etc., but the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED is controlled. , It is controlled so that the brightness is changed after the brightness of the backlight is changed and after the variation of the effect identification symbol is completed. Further, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like while the identification symbol for effect is changed, the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED needs to be changed by the LED request control process, but the backlight Can be changed immediately. Therefore, the brightness of the backlight is controlled to be changed immediately based on the input state of the sub-device, but the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is changed by the LED request control process to control the load. Can be minimized. That is, for example, it is possible to change the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED while minimizing the control load by performing the brightness adjustment operation only once by a player or the like.

When the brightness of the backlight is changed based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like), the host control circuit 2100 uses the FIFO to input the brightness data related to the changed brightness. Set in the data area.

(Third Example)
For example, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED may be affected as described above. In this embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjustment operation, the brightness value of the backlight is changed, and the effect of the board side LED and the frame side LED is limited. It is something like that. The term "limited" corresponds to, for example, limiting the number of LEDs that emit light in the effect of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, limiting the number of effects performed by the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, and the like. .. Limiting the number of effects means, for example, that the effects 1 to 5 are originally performed, but only the effects 1 to 3 are performed, and the effects 4 and 5 are not omitted. As a result, the effects of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are limited without directly changing the brightness value, so that the intensity of the light received by the player from the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is suppressed. Become. In addition, the update timing of the backlight control and the LE on the board side
Even if the update timing of the control of the D and the frame side LED is different, the processing can be facilitated.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 71 in the timer interrupt processing.
The accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) are performed in this order.

As shown in FIG. 74, the host control circuit 2100 has an initialization process (step S140).
After performing 1), the process moves to the main loop and the LED request control process is performed (step S).
1402). The LED request made in step S1402 is created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1407 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1402, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-mentioned subdevice (button) input determination information generation process (step S1403) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the host control circuit 2100 is in the input state of the subdevice (
For example, the brightness of the backlight is set based on the brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1404 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the luminance setting has been changed (step S1405). If there is a change in the brightness setting (step S1)
YES in 405), the host control circuit 2100 is set to the board side LE at that time.
The brightness of D and the frame side LED is limited (step S1406), and the packet reception loop is started. On the other hand, if there is no change in the luminance value setting (NO in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop without performing the process of step S1406.

Moving to the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1407). In the animation construction process of step S1407, LE
D request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1402) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the process of step S1407 according to the received packet.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1408), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1409).

The host control circuit 2100 is in step S in the main loop with a period of 33.3 msec.
The processes from 1402 to step S1409 are repeated.

It should be noted that the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs described above (1st to 3rd Examples).
As described above, in the backlight control process of the present embodiment, a signal corresponding to PWM is continuously and continuously output from, for example, the serial output terminal of SPI by using the function of SPI asynchronous data write (SPI + DMA). On the other hand, for the panel side LED and the frame side LED, for example, as shown in step S1382 of FIG. 72, the LED is controlled based on the LED request created one frame before the main loop. Therefore, even if the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs is adjusted, the timing at which the brightness of the backlight is changed is different from the timing at which the brightness of the panel side LED or the frame side LED is changed.

[10-6. RTC acquisition process]
Next, the RTC acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. 75. As mentioned above, RTC
The acquisition process is performed both in the various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) and in the main loop (see step S1201 in FIG. 61). Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the RTC acquisition process.

For example, when communication with the RTC cannot be performed, or when an abnormality has occurred in the RTC itself, or when an accurate time cannot be obtained due to an RTC abnormality, the time is not updated and remains at the previous time. Therefore, when performing an RTC effect (for example, an effect related to Christmas at Christmas time) based on the RTC time, if an RTC abnormality occurs, the RTC
There is a risk that the production cannot be executed. Further, when the RTC or more occurs, the RTC time is not updated, so that the RTC effect may remain executed or the RTC effect may be executed at an unexpected time.

Therefore, in the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, when the RTC is abnormal, that is, the previous R.
When the TC time and the current RTC time are different, the RTC effect is executed based on the current time. The RTC is provided with a secondary battery, and the host control circuit 2
It is possible to manage the time even when the power supply of 100 is turned off. Further, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the time from the RTC and manages the error occurrence time and the like.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the RTC acquisition process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (step S1412), and then proceeds to step S1413.

The host control circuit 2100 updates the previous time in step S1413. In this update of the previous time, the current time updated in step S1416 described later is updated as the previous time. After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the RTC is abnormal (step S1414). If the RTC is abnormal (YES in step S1414)
), The current time is maintained (step S1415), and the process proceeds to step S1417. On the other hand, RT
If C is not abnormal (NO in step S1414), the current time is updated (step S1416), and the process proceeds to step S1417.

In the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the RTC is abnormal after the previous time is updated (step S1413), but instead of this, the previous time is updated. It may be determined before whether or not the RTC is abnormal, and if the RTC is not abnormal, the previous time may be updated and controlled so that the current time is not maintained.

In step S1417, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current time is a designated time (for example, a time when the RTC effect is executed). If the current time is the designated time (YES in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1418, and if the current time is not the designated time (NO in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1420.

In step S1418, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous time and the current time do not match. If the RTC is abnormal, the previous time and the current time do not match (
YES) in step S1418. If the previous time and the current time do not match (
YES in step S1418), the RTC effect execution flag is set to 1 (step S1419). That is, in the case of an RTC abnormality, the RTC effect is executed when the current time reaches the designated time. Then, when the process of step S1419 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process. On the other hand, if the previous time and the current time do not match (NO in step S1418), the process proceeds to step S1420.

The host control circuit 2100 sets the RTC effect execution flag to 0 in step S1420.
Set to. Then, when the process of step S1420 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to avoid the situation where the RTC effect is not executed by executing the RTC effect when the current time reaches the designated time. ..

[10-7. Composition playback control]
Next, composition reproduction control will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

The composition is scene data in which material data for forming an image (movie) displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as, for example, a display device 16 is combined, and is generally composed of a plurality of layers. Layers include animations, vector graphics, still images, lights, and more.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the animation control main process executed by the display control circuit 2300. This animation control main process is an animation construction process executed by the host control circuit 2100 (see step S1211 in FIG. 61).
It is executed based on the input of the control signal of the drawing request output in. As shown in FIG. 76, the display control circuit 2300 first clears the composition reproduction information (step S1431). Then, the display control circuit 2300 executes the composition reproduction control process (step S1432). This composition reproduction control process will be described later. After that, the display control circuit 2300 executes the top-level direct drawing function (step S1433), and ends the animation control main process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the composition reproduction control process executed by the display control circuit 2300. As shown in FIG. 77, the display control circuit 2300 first determines whether or not the determined priority number is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the priority number (step S1441). If the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (YES in step S1441), the process proceeds to step S1442. The number of priorities is the number of layers of the composition to be played back at the same time, and the upper limit of the number of priorities is predetermined based on the composition to be played back. Therefore, as long as the processing by the host control circuit 2100 is normal, the determined priority number does not exceed the upper limit of the priority number. Therefore, the display control circuit 2
The 300 terminates the composition reproduction control process when the determined priority number exceeds the upper limit of the priority number (NO in step S1441).

The display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the number of determined displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays in step S1442, that is, the determined number of displays is a display that can be used (for example, mounted) on the system. Less than (or less than)
(Step S1442). If the determined number of displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of available displays (YES in step S1442), the process proceeds to step S1443.

In step S1443, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the display number used is not 0, that is, whether or not a usable display number exists. If the display number used is not 0 (YES in step S1443), i.e.
If a usable display number exists, the display control circuit 2300 may perform step S1.
Move to 444. On the other hand, if the display number used is 0 (NO in step S1443), that is, if there is no usable display number, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1459.

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes two frame buffers as frame buffers in which the composition is registered. These two frame buffers are used by switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function by bank flip. Hereinafter, in this specification, a frame buffer having a display function is simply referred to as a “frame buffer”, and a frame buffer having a drawing function is referred to as a “drawing result output destination buffer”.

In step S1444, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition is registered in the drawing result output destination buffer. In the determination process of step S1444, it is determined whether or not all the compositions are registered (that is, whether or not there are any unregistered ones). If all the compositions are registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (YES in step S1444), the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing target (step S1445). Setting a drawing target is a process of setting a display to which drawing is performed. If the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (NO in step S1444), that is, if there is an unregistered composition,
The display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1450.

In step S1446, the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer. That is, the process of step S1446 is a process of switching the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer by bank flip. At this time, the composition registered in the drawing result output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer is cleared. After that, the display control circuit 2300 is set to step S1446.
It is determined whether or not there is a pause flag in the composition registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip of (step S1447).
The pause flag is a flag of the debug function for pausing the image, and when this pause flag is present (YES in step S1447), the display control circuit 2300 is set in step S.
The composition reproduction information is registered in the drawing output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer by the bank flip of 1446 (step S1448), and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). On the other hand, if there is no pause flag (step S144)
NO in 7), the process proceeds to step S1459. The composition playback information is
For example, the size of the frame buffer, the size of the composition, the coordinates of the four vertices of the image to be reproduced, the composition registration information, the loop composition to be reproduced, the composition length, the start frame setting, the loop reproduction flag, and the like. Further, the registration of the reproduction information of the composition is to collect the reproduction information of the composition, and the composition reproduction is to register the reproduction information of the collected composition. When the playback information of the composition is registered, the previous playback information is cleared.

In step S1450, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or greater than the upper limit (that is, whether or not the number of reproduced frames exceeds the number of frames possessed by the composition). Determine. If the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (NO in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1457 and registers composition reproduction information in the drawing result output destination buffer (step). The composition is regenerated together with S1457) (step S1458).

When the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1450 that the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or greater than the upper limit (YES in step S1450).
, Step S1451.

In step S1451, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction. If the playback mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is loop playback (step S1).
YES in 451), the display control circuit 2300 performs reproduction from the beginning at the time of loop reproduction (step S1452), and then proceeds to step S1457. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not loop reproduction (NO in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 shifts to step S1453.

In step S1453, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display. If the playback mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is frame continuation display (
YES) in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 reproduces the final frame at the time of continuous frame display (step S1454), and then proceeds to step S1457. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not frame continuous display (NO in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 is set to step S145.
Move on to 5.

In step S1455, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is shot reproduction. If the reproduction mode is shot reproduction (YES in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300
Clears the composition at the time of shot reproduction (step S1456), and then moves to step S1459. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not shot reproduction (NO in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300
Goes to step S1457.

As a general rule, the composition reproduction information registration in step S1457 is performed when the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (N in step S1444).
This is the process to be performed when it is determined to be O). However, as described above, the display control circuit 2300 also has a pause flag in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 (YES in step S1447).
), The composition reproduction information is registered in the drawing output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 (step S1448), and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). As described above, when the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 has a pause flag (YES in step S1447), the composition reproduction information is immediately registered in the drawing output destination buffer (YES in step S1447). Since the composition is regenerated together with step S1448) (step S1449), rapid processing can be performed.

The display control circuit 2300 is 1 to the number of displays determined in step S1459.
Is added, and the process returns to step S1442.

When the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1442 that the determined number of displays exceeds the upper limit of the number of usable displays (NO in step S1442), the display control circuit 2300 executes the direct drawing function if there is data to be directly drawn. (Step S1460
). After that, the display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the determined priority number (step S1461), and returns to step S1441.

As described above, in the composition reproduction control of the present embodiment, in principle, when the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, the reproduction information of a new composition is not registered. However, the composition is not registered only when the specific condition is satisfied (when YES is determined in step S1447, that is, when the composition registered in the drawing output destination buffer has a pause flag). It is possible to perform the processing (composition reproduction information registration). In other words, while the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, it is possible to register the composition again at any timing, so it depends on the contents of the (newly) registered composition. , It is possible to overwrite the effect, skip the effect, and stop the effect.

Further, the process of step S1441 (processing for determining whether or not the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (whether the number of determined displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays). The process of determining whether or not it is) is step S1.
It is a higher-level process than the process of 442. Therefore, by returning to step S1442 from the process of step S1459 and performing the process, the number of priorities determined in step S1441 can be shared for a plurality of displays, and the processing load can be reduced. ..

[10-8. Sound amplifier check process]
Next, the sound amplifier check process shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. In this sound amplifier check process, it is determined whether or not the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (hereinafter referred to as "sound amplifier") is in an abnormal state (for example, overcurrent abnormality, high temperature abnormality, DC detection abnormality in which the audio signal does not change, etc.). Also, the setting information of the sound amplifier is confirmed. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal amplifier check process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of a deep bass amplifier check process.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes, as a sound amplifier, a normal amplifier for amplifying normal audio data and a deep bass amplifier for amplifying deep bass sound data.

As shown in FIG. 78, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier check process (step S1471) and a deep bass amplifier check process (step S1472).

As shown in FIG. 79, in the normal amplifier check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting is made from the binary file (step S1481).
.. If there is a binary file at the time of initialization, the setting is done from the binary file. note that,
The initialization process is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a problem is found in the amplifier check and the settings are reset. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting is made from the binary file, but the setting is not limited to this, and any storage area different from the read setting such as the binary file may be used.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the register as a reference of the register value to be checked is normal (step S1482), and then performs a determination process. , Step S1483. In the determination process of step S1482, the values of the registers are checked in the order of the street address, so it is determined whether or not the value of the register to start the check exists and whether or not the value is normal.

In step S1483, the host control circuit 2100 performs a rearrangement process of the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 uses the RAM of the register.
The value of is compared with the received data (step S1484), and a process of determining whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal is performed (step S1485). The host control circuit 2100 is in step S.
When the determination process of 1485 is performed, the normal amplifier check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S1481 (
NO) in step S1481, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value with the set value (step S1486), and ends the normal amplifier check process. When the normal amplifier check process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 performs the deep bass amplifier check process.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the amplifier check process for deep bass, the host control circuit 2100
First determines whether or not the setting has been made from the binary file (step S1491).
).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of determining whether or not the register to be checked is normal (step S1492), and then proceeds to step S1493. ..

In step S1493, the host control circuit 2100 sets the register 0x17-0x25 to an appropriate value (binary file information) in consideration of the case where the value cannot be read due to a hardware defect.
Clear with.

In step S1494, the host control circuit 2100 performs a rearrangement process of the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 uses the RAM of the register.
The value of is compared with the received data (step S1495), and the RAM address is updated (step S1494). When the host control circuit 2100 performs the update process of step S1496, the deep bass amplifier check process ends.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S1491 (
NO) in step S1491, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value with the set value (step S1497), and ends the deep bass amplifier check process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process of 1 msec. By the way, such a sound amplifier check process can also be performed in the main loop. However, when the sound amplifier check process is performed in the main loop, if the sound amplifier check process takes time, it may put pressure on other processes. Therefore, by performing the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process as in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the sound amplifier check process without overwhelming other processes in the main loop.

Further, the sound amplifier check process shown in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62) is
For example, as shown in FIG. 81, the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (batch) check process (step S1497) may be performed in the interrupt process of 1 msec. The normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (collective) check process (step S1497) includes a normal amplifier check process (see FIG. 79) and a deep bass amplifier check process (see FIG. 80).
It is a process to perform all at once.

However, when the sound amplifier check process is performed in the interrupt process of 1 msec,
It may not be possible to perform all of this sound amplifier check process. Therefore, a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process. FIG. 84 shows an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process, and is a flowchart following FIG. 83.

In a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check process, as shown in FIG. 82, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process (step S1498). The details of this normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process will be described later, but the range that can be performed within 1 msec interrupt processing by dividing each check process of the normal amplifier and each check process of the deep bass amplifier. The check process is performed within, and the subsequent process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In other words, out of all the check processing of the normal amplifier and all the check processing of the deep bass amplifier, only a part of the check processing is performed in one interrupt processing, but all the checks should be performed over multiple interrupt processing. It is the one that was made. By doing so, in the interrupt processing, it is possible to execute all of the check processing of the normal amplifier and the check processing of the deep bass amplifier without ending in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process,
The host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting has been made from the binary file (step S1501).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1501), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the check status is 0 (step S1502). When the check status is 0 (Y in step S1502)
ES), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the register value checked by the normal amplifier is normal (step S1503). After performing the process of step S1503, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 1 (step S15).
04), the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process is completed. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1502 that the check status is not 0 (NO in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1505. The process of step S1503 may be performed by further dividing each register into determinations as to whether or not each register value among the plurality of registers is normal.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 whether or not the check status is 1. When the check status is 1 (YES in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 performs a sorting process of the received data from the binary file (step S1506). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the normal amplifier with the received data (step S1507), and determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1508). ). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 2 (step S1509), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division). ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1508), the host control circuit 21
00 ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process without updating the check status. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 1, the host control circuit 2100 has a check status of 1 in the next and subsequent frames.
Perform the processing in the case of. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 that the check status is not 1 (NO in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1510. The process of step S1508 may be performed by further dividing the process of comparing the value of the RAM of each register among the plurality of registers with the received data for each register.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 whether or not the check status is 2. When the check status is 2 (YES in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1511). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1512). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 3 (step S1513), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division). ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1512), the host control circuit 210
0 ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process without updating the check status. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 2, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 2 again in the next and subsequent frames. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 that the check status is not 2 (NO in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 shifts to step S1514 (see FIG. 84).

With reference to FIG. 84, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 whether or not the check status is 3. When the check status is 3 (YES in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of determining whether or not the register value checked by the deep bass amplifier is normal (step S1515). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1516). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 4 (step S1517), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (step S1517). (Split) Ends the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. End the process. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 3, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 3 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 that the check status is not 3 (NO in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1518.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 whether or not the check status is 4. When the check status is 4 (YES in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 clears the register value of the deep bass amplifier with an appropriate value (step S1519). After that, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 5 (step S1520), and ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 that the check status is not 4, (NO in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1521.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 whether or not the check status is 5. When the check status is 5 (YES in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 performs a sorting process of the received data from the binary file (step S1522). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the deep bass amplifier with the received data (step S1523), and updates the RAM address (step S1524). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1525). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1525), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the update of the RAM address is completed (step S).
1526), the check status is set to 0 (step S1527), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process is completed. When the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed in step S1525 (NO in step S1525).
, And when it is determined in step S1526 that the update of the RAM address has not been completed (NO in step S1526), the host control circuit 2100 does not update the check status, and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division). End the check process. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 5, the host control circuit 2
In 100, the process when the check status is 5 is performed again in the next and subsequent frames. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 that the check status is not 5 (NO in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process.

As described above, in a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process, each check process of the normal amplifier and each check process of the deep bass amplifier can be divided into 1 msec interrupt process (that is, within one frame). The check process is performed within the range, and the continuation process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In this way, since a part of the check process of the normal amplifier and the check process of the deep bass amplifier are performed over a plurality of frames within one frame, the entire check process of each amplifier can be executed over a plurality of frames. It will be possible.

When the check status is 4, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed (for example, if the check status is 3, step S151).
The process of 6) is not performed. This is because the processing of step S1519 performed when the check status is 4 can be performed in a short time so as not to affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec. In other words, the process performed when the check status is 4 (step S1519) is the process performed when the check status is 0 (step S1503) and the process performed when the check status is 1 (step S1506). And step S1507), the process performed when the check status is 2 (step S1511), the process performed when the check status is 3, (step S1515), and the process performed when the check status is 5. This is because the time required for processing is shorter than in S1522 to step S1524), and it does not affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed in consideration of the time required for the processing (whether or not it affects the interrupt processing of 1 msec). I have decided whether or not. However, whether or not the processing for the number of divisions is executed even in the processing that does not affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec (for example, the processing such as step S1519 performed when the check status is 4). The determination may be made.

In each process of step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515, it may be possible to further divide each register into determinations as to whether or not each register value among the plurality of registers is normal. In this case, the progress of the further divided determination may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the major classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the minor classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the major classification. With, the progress of processing can be managed. Similarly, step S1506 ~
Also in each process of S507 and steps S1522 to S523, the process of comparing the value of the RAM of each register among the plurality of registers with the received data may be further divided for each register. In this case, the progress of the further divided process may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the major classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the minor classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the major classification. With, the progress of processing can be managed. For example, even if a power failure occurs during the sub-classification process or judgment, the progress of the sub-classification process or judgment is checked by the first check status and the second check status after the power is restored. It may be controlled to restart each process and each determination.

Further, the check status can be set to 0 when the power is turned on, and when the power is cut off during the process, various settings can be made such as starting from the check status at the time of the previous power cut after the power is restored. Of course, if a power failure occurs, the power is turned on, or the backup clear (ram clear) process is performed, the check status is set to 0 after the power is restored, and all processes and judgments are performed again (). Alternatively, as one of the initialization processes, all processes or determinations or some processes or determinations may be performed again).

[10-9. Sound request control process (when there are multiple sound requests for the same channel)]
Next, regarding the sound request control process shown in FIG. 61, the sound request control process when there are a plurality of sound requests (also referred to as SAC requests) for the same channel will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same playback channel in the same frame of the main loop performed at a cycle of 33.3 msec, SA
For example, a mute command of 2 msec is attached between the C request and the SAC request for registration. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game sound output based on the SAC request from being covered with other game sounds, and it is possible to output a highly accurate game sound. However, in this case, although there is an advantage that the game sound is not overwritten, there is a possibility that processing will take time. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC numbers are designated (registered) in the same virtual track in the same frame of the main loop,
There is a case where a second-arrival SAC request is made with an interval between the first-come-first-served SAC request and a case where a second-arrival SAC request is made without an interval between the first-come-first-served SAC number. .. Specifically, it will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the sound request control process (when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel), the host control circuit 2100 first receives SAC.
Check the number and playback channel (step S1541), and then step S154.
Move on to 2.

In step S1542, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel. For example, since the SAC numbers are different between SHOT playback and LOOP playback, there are multiple SACs on the same playback channel without intervals.
A number may be specified. When there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same playback channel (YES in step S1542), the host control circuit 2100 is set in step S.
Move to 1543. On the other hand, if there are not a plurality of SAC requests for the same playback channel (NO in step S1542), the sound request control process ends. note that,
In the present embodiment, since one virtual track corresponds to one playback channel, the determination process in step S1542 is synonymous with the determination as to whether or not there is a SAC request for the same virtual track. .. That is, the "track" is an interface for decoding and reproducing the "phrase", and the "playback channel" is the concept of reproducing the "phrase". That is, when a "playback channel" is specified and a "phrase" is requested to be played back, the phrase is assigned to the corresponding "track" and the phrase is played back. The "virtual track" is an "interface for controlling phrase playback". The virtual track is 128
There are channels, and it can be automatically assigned to 32 phrase playback channels, but since this function is not used in this embodiment, "virtual track" = "playback channel".

The host control circuit 2100 performs SHOT reproduction and LOO in step S1543.
It is determined whether or not it is a chain reproduction of P reproduction. In the case of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction chain reproduction (YES in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 executes the LOOP reproduction SAC request one frame later (33.3 msec later) (step S1544), and controls the sound request. End the process. SHOT playback and LO
In the case of OP playback chain playback, by executing the LOOP playback SAC request with a delay of one frame, it is possible to prevent the SHOT playback sound from being overwritten and prevent the SHOT playback sound from becoming difficult to hear. It becomes. On the other hand, SHOT playback and LO
If it is not a chain reproduction of OP reproduction (NO in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1545.

In step S1545, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the mute command between SACs is a mute setting for all playback channels. For example, when the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol ends, a mute command is uniformly set between SACs for all playback channels. Then, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting of all the reproduction channels (YES in step S1545), the host control circuit 2100 performs SAC data corresponding to the first-come-first-served SAC request so that the mute is executed. The SAC data corresponding to the later SAC request is set (step S1546) without overwriting the mute command, and the sound request control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the mute command between SACs is not set to mute all the reproduction channels (NO in step S1545), the mute command of each reproduction channel corresponds to the later SAC request so that quick processing is performed. Overwrite with SAC data and set (step S1547)
), Ends the sound request control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same reproduction channel in the same frame of the main loop, when the plurality of SAC requests are chain reproductions of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction. , The SAC number of the LOOP reproduction is delayed by one frame (for example, 33.3 msec) so that the sound of the LOOP reproduction is not affected by the SHOT reproduction. SHOT reproduction is, for example, one-time reproduction of a phrase, and LOOP reproduction is, for example, LOOP reproduction (reproduction) of a phrase.

In addition, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting of all playback channels, the mute command does not overwrite the SAC data of the subsequent arrival so that the mute is executed, and the SAC data corresponding to the SAC number is input. to register. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, it is possible to secure the period until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the mute command between SACs is not set to mute all the reproduction channels, the mute command of each reproduction channel is overwritten with the SAC data corresponding to the later SAC request so that the mute is not executed. In this way, by executing or not executing muffling depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing (quickness by overwriting the muffling) while making the best use of the game sound effect of muffling. ing.

[10-10. Sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed)]
Next, with respect to the sound request control process shown in FIG. 61, variations of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed will be described. In the present specification, as variations of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted, the five variations of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment are shown in FIGS. 86 to 90, respectively.
Will be described with reference to. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a first embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a second embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a third embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a fourth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a fifth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted.

(First Example)
As shown in FIG. 86, in the first embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume adjustment is performed). Step S1551). After that, the process proceeds to step S1552. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In step S1552, the host control circuit 2100 designates the output destination speaker based on the voice data designated by the SAC number, and proceeds to step S1553. In this first embodiment, the audio data designated by the SAC number incorporates information on which speaker to output from. Speakers are, for example, a shared speaker that is used for general purposes (used to output normal sounds that are sounds other than specific sounds) and specific sounds (error sounds, warning sounds, etc.).
It has a dedicated speaker (for example, a speaker for deep bass) used for the output of. The host control circuit 2100 sets which of the plurality of speakers is the dedicated speaker in various initialization processes (see, for example, various initialization processes in FIG. 61 (step S1201)).

In step S1553, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1553), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1554), and step S155.
Move on to 6. On the other hand, unless the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (step S1).
NO in 553), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13).
Step S1555) and step S1556.

The host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) at the time of debugging in step S1556, and then proceeds to step S1557.

In step S1557, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume of the specific sound is controlled. The specific sound corresponds to a sound that does not want to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound. Further, in the voice data commanded by the SAC number, information that the output destination of the normal sound is a shared speaker is incorporated, and information that the output destination of the specific sound is a dedicated speaker is incorporated. There is.

If it is determined in step S1558 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (step S).
NO in 1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1558).
), Step S1560. In the volume control in step S1558, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1557 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S15
59), the process proceeds to step S1560. In the volume control in step S1559, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1560 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1560 (YES in step S1560), the volume control incorporated in the voice data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1561), and the sound request control process is terminated. do.

If volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1560 (
NO in step S1560), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1557, and until volume control for the number of channels is performed (Y in step S1560).
(Until it is determined to be ES), the processes of steps S1557 to S1560 are performed.
Although not shown in FIG. 86, considering that the SAC number is specified corresponding to each channel, the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1561. good.

(Second Example)
As shown in FIG. 87, in the second embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs an input process of voice data specified by the SAC number (when volume adjustment is performed). Step S1571). Then, the process proceeds to step S1572. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In this second embodiment, for example, a shared channel used for general purposes (used for outputting a normal sound that is a sound other than a specific sound) and a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.) There is a dedicated channel used for output. The host control circuit 2100 is a dedicated channel (CH3) used for outputting a specific sound among a plurality of channels (1 to 32CH).
1, CH32) and shared channels (CH1 to CH30) used for sounds other than specific sounds.
And various initialization processes (see, for example, various initialization processes in FIG. 61 (step S1201)).
Set in.

In step S1572, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1572), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1573), and step S157 is performed.
Move on to 5. On the other hand, unless the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (step S1).
NO in 572), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13).
Step S1574) and step S1575.

The host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) at the time of debugging in step S1576, and then moves to step S1576.

In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume of the specific sound is controlled. Also in the second embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that does not want to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (step S).
NO in 1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1577).
), Step S1578. In the volume control in step S1577, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S15
79), the process proceeds to step S1582. In the volume control in step S1579, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1578, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the playback is on a playback channel (for example, CH31, CH32) that is not affected by the volume adjustment (step S1578).
YES), a constant volume is specified (step S1580). If the playback is on a playback channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) that receives volume adjustment (step S157).
NO in 8), set the volume according to the user volume (step S1581)
.. When the process of step S1580 is completed or the process of step S1581 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1582.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1582 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1632 (YES in step S1582), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1583), and the sound request control process is terminated. do.

If volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1582 (
NO in step S1582), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1576, and until volume control for the number of channels is performed (Y in step S1582).
(Until it is determined to be ES), the processes of steps S1576 to S1582 are performed.
Although not shown in FIG. 87, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1583.

(Third Example)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs an input process of voice data specified by the SAC number (when volume adjustment is performed). Step S1591). Then, the process proceeds to step S1592.

In step S1592, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1592), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1593), and step S159.
Move on to 5. On the other hand, unless the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (step S1).
NO in 592), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13).
Step S1594) and step S1595.

The host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) at the time of debugging in step S1595, and then proceeds to step S1596.

In step S1596, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume of the specific sound is controlled. Also in the third embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that does not want to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (step S).
NO in 1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1597).
), Move to step S1599. In the volume control in step S1597, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S15
98), the process proceeds to step S1599. In the volume control in step S1598, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1599, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the data in the reproduction channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1599), the next time, a constant volume is specified for the reproduction channel (step S1600). If the data in the reproduction channel is the data to be adjusted in volume (NO in step S1599), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel next time (step S1601). When the process of step S1600 is completed or the process of step S1601 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1602.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1602 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1602 (YES in step S1602), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1603), and the sound request control process is terminated. do.

If volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1602 (
NO in step S1602), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1599 and until volume control for the number of channels is performed (Y in step S1602).
(Until it is determined to be ES), the processes of steps S1599 to S1602 are performed.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1603.

In this third embodiment, in step S1599, it is determined whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment, and the determination result in step S1599 is determined. If YES, a constant volume is set for the next playback channel (step S1600), and if the discrimination result in step S1599 is NO, the volume according to the volume adjustment is set for the next playback channel. Alternatively, the modification described below may be used. That is, in this modification, step S1597
And the audio data set this time as the process of the next step of step S1598,
After performing a process to confirm whether the audio data already being played on the playback channel to which the audio data is set is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment setting for the audio data this time is performed. And the process of determining whether or not the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data is the same. If the volume adjustment setting of the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data are the same, a process of determining whether or not the data is not affected by the volume adjustment is performed. If the volume adjustment setting for the audio data this time and the volume adjustment setting for the previous audio data are not the same, the volume adjustment will not be affected after the volume adjustment setting for the audio data set this time. Move on to the process of determining whether or not the data is data. Move on to the process of determining whether the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. Then, if the data is not affected by the volume adjustment, a process of setting a constant volume is performed on the playback channel, and if the data is affected by the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment is applied to the playback channel. Performs the process of setting the volume. After that, it is advisable to move to the process of determining whether or not the number of channels has been set, as in step S1602. In this modification, the only processing different from that of the third embodiment is the above-mentioned processing.
Other processing is the processing of the third embodiment (step S1592 to step S1 shown in FIG. 88).
It is the same as the process of 598, the process of step S1602, and the process of step S1603).

(Fourth Example)
As shown in FIG. 89, in the fourth embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the SAC number is the SAC number affected by the volume adjustment. Confirm whether or not (step S1611). After that, the process proceeds to step S1612.

In step S1612, the host control circuit 2100 updates the flag indicating whether or not the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, and inputs the voice data specified by the SAC number (step S1613). Specifically, if the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (if the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is OFF).

In step S1614, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1614), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1615), and step S161 is performed.
Move on to 7. On the other hand, if it is not volume control by a hardware switch (step S1)
NO in 614) and user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13).
Step S1616) and step S1617.

The host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) at the time of debugging in step S1617, and then moves to step S1618.

In step S1618, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume of the specific sound is controlled. Also in the fourth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that does not want to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (step S).
NO in 1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1619).
), Step S1620. In the volume control in step S1619, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S16
22), the process proceeds to step S1624. In the volume control in step S1622, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1620, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined in step S1612 whether or not the flag is set to ON. When the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1620), a constant volume is specified for the reproduction channel (step S1621), and the process proceeds to step S1624. If the playback is not on a playback channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1620)
), Set the volume according to the volume adjustment in the reproduction channel (step S1623), and move to step S1624.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1624 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1624 (YES in step S1624), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1625), and the sound request control process is terminated. do.

If volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1624 (
NO in step S1624), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1618, and until volume control for the number of channels is performed (Y in step S1624).
(Until it is determined to be ES), the processes of steps S1618 to S1624 are performed.
Although not shown in FIG. 89, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1625.

(Fifth Example)
As shown in FIG. 90, in the fifth embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs an input process of voice data specified by the SAC number (when volume adjustment is performed). Step S1631). After that, the process proceeds to step S1632.

The host control circuit 2100 confirms whether the audio data is audio data for which each channel undergoes volume adjustment (step S1633). Specifically, if the audio data specified by the SAC number is the audio data affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (the audio data specified by the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment). If it is voice data, the flag is OFF).

In step S1633, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1633), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1634), and step S163 is performed.
Move on to 6. On the other hand, unless the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (step S1).
NO in 633), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13).
Step S1635) and step S1636.

The host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) at the time of debugging in step S1636, and then proceeds to step S1637.

In step S1637, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume of the specific sound is controlled. Also in the fifth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that does not want to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (step S).
NO in 1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1638).
), Step S1639. In the volume control in step S1638, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S16
40), the process proceeds to step S1643. In the volume control in step S1640, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. A constant volume is output before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1639, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, the flag is O in step S1632.
It is determined whether or not it is set to N. If the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1639), a constant volume is set for the playback channel (YES in step S1639).
Step S1641). If the channel is affected by volume adjustment (step S)
NO in 1639), the volume of the playback channel is set according to the volume adjustment (step S1642). When the process of step S1641 is completed or step S1642
When the process of is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1643.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1643 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1643 (YES in step S1643), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1644), and the sound request control process is terminated. do.

If volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1643 (
NO in step S1643), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1637, and until volume control for the number of channels is performed (Y in step S1643).
(Until it is determined to be ES), the processes of steps S1637 to S1643 are performed.
Although not shown in FIG. 90, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1644.

Sound request control processing when the above-mentioned volume adjustment is performed (first embodiment-
According to the fifth embodiment), when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume is output according to the volume adjustment for the normal sound, and the volume adjustment is performed for a serious specific sound such as an error sound. Even so, it is possible to easily perform voice control such as outputting a constant volume from the speaker.

[10-11. LED brightness adjustment process]
Next, the brightness adjustment of the LED will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 91. FIG. 91 is an attenuation table showing an example of the luminance attenuation values of each color (red, green, blue) according to the emission intensity of the strong, medium, and weak LEDs. This attenuation table is a sub-main ROM 2050 (eg, FIG. 10).
See).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in three stages by, for example, an operation by a player or the like. Specifically, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed on the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs the attenuation table switching process shown in FIG. 91. For example, when an operation of changing from strong to medium among the three levels of luminance is performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of switching the reference table from strong to medium in the attenuation table of FIG.

The LED whose brightness can be adjusted by the operation of a player or the like may be, for example, an LED provided on a glass door 13 (see, for example, FIG. 2), or may be, for example, a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16. It may be. The brightness adjustment of the LED is not limited to three stages, and may be configured so that it can be adjusted in more stages, for example.

The output value of the LED is represented by the following equation (1).
LED output value = brightness value based on LED data x (100-luminance attenuation value) / 100 ...
Equation (1)
The output value of the LED of the above formula (1) can also be set for each reproduction channel of the LED. The parameter changed by the operation of the player is the luminance attenuation value. For example, when the luminance attenuation value is 0, the luminance is the strongest, and when the luminance attenuation value is 100, the luminance is the weakest and the light is turned off. Further, the calculation of the output value of the LED is performed inside the sequencer 2260b (see FIG. 11).

The LED data table that defines LED data, playback patterns, etc. can be found in Act.
Create a BLD file (LED animation) using tools such as iveLED (UE) and LEDMaker (UE), add information to the created BLD file, and convert it with an LED list (Excel macro) (UE) to create it. Will be done.

By the way, in the case of a three-primary-color full-color LED, if the luminance attenuation values of red, green, and blue are uniformly the same, the white balance may be lost, and for example, what was white may turn yellow. For example, when the brightness of the LED is reduced, it is necessary to make the brightness attenuation value of blue the largest among red, green and blue, and it is preferable to make the brightness attenuation value of red the smallest.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, even when the brightness of the LED is changed by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness attenuation value is set for each of the 1024 ports, for example, so that the white is white. It is configured to maintain the balance as much as possible.

Specifically, when the brightness of the LED is adjusted to one of strong, medium, and weak by the operation of a player or the like, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 refers to the attenuation table of FIG. The brightness of the LED is controlled based on the brightness attenuation values set for each of green and blue. Since the attenuation table is prepared for each of 1024 ports (for each LED), for example, the attenuation value can be set for each port.

For example, when the brightness of the LED is set to be strong by the operation of a player or the like, the sequencer 2260b of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 has a red brightness attenuation value of 0, a green brightness attenuation value of 5, and a blue brightness attenuation value of 25. Is substituted into the above equation (1) to calculate the output value of the LED. Similarly, in the sequencer 2260b of the voice / LED control circuit 2200, when the luminance of the LED is set to the middle by the operation of a player or the like, the luminance attenuation value 50 of red, the luminance attenuation value 53 of green and the luminance attenuation value of blue are set. When 63 is substituted into the above equation (1) and the luminance of the LED is set to be weak by an operation of a player or the like, the luminance attenuation value 80 of red, the luminance attenuation value 81 of green, and the luminance attenuation value of blue 85 are obtained. The above formula (
Substitute in 1) to calculate the LED output value. And the voice / LED control circuit 2200
The light emission of the LED is controlled based on the output value of the LED calculated in this way.

In this way, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 calculates the LED output value based on the luminance attenuation values set corresponding to each of red, green, and blue, and based on the calculated LED output value. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to maintain the white balance as much as possible even if the brightness of the LED is changed by an operation of, for example, a player or the like.

[10-12. Accessory solenoid control process]
Next, the accessory solenoid control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 61, 62, and 92. FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state between the LED port and the LED and the solenoid.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the movements of the movable body (role) provided in the game area are diversified, and the control of the movable body is complicated accordingly. Therefore, for simple movements among a wide variety of movements of the movable body, the control load of the movable body is suppressed by operating the members constituting the accessory with a solenoid or by providing the accessory with a locking mechanism. I am trying to. When the motor driver that operates the accessory receives a motor operation request (accessory request), the motor driver outputs the contents of the motor operation data in order. The output of the motor driver and the determination of the end of the motor operation are performed by a timer interrupt process of 1 msec as shown in FIG.
In the timer interrupt process, the output judgment and the end judgment of the accessory motor (that is, the judgment of the start and the end)
And, synchronous control of a plurality of motors is also performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the LED on the frame side connected to each LED port and the LED on the frame side based on the command from the host control circuit 2100. LED on the board side (for example, LE arranged in the game board unit 17)
D, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) and the like are controlled to emit light via the LED driver. And the LED port controlled by the LED driver (
Of Port0 to Port23), the above solenoid is connected to Port6, and LEDs are connected to the other Ports.

The voice / LED control circuit 2200 receives a command from the host control circuit 2100 and executes light emission of the LED connected to each port of the frame side LED and the board side LED via the LED driver, for example. By connecting the solenoid to the port 6, the operation of the solenoid can also be executed via the LED driver. As a result, even if the number of solenoids increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, it is possible to suppress the control load for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory. ..

By the way, when the operation of the solenoid is executed via the LED driver as shown in FIG. 92, it is necessary to synchronously control the operation of the motor for operating the accessory and the operation of the solenoid. It should be noted that the operation of the accessory is performed by an interrupt process of 1 msec including synchronous control of a plurality of motors.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a control code is added to the accessory sequence table, and when it is desired to synchronously control the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory, a value larger than 0 is added to the control code. I try to set it. And the host control circuit 210
0 indicates the control code of the accessory being played on the accessory device in the processing of the main loop (see step S1204 in FIG. 61), and the control code is a control code when the acquired control code has a value larger than 0. Corresponding LED port (for example, P to which the above solenoid is connected)
The control of ort6) is executed (see step S1205 in FIG. 61). This makes it possible to execute synchronous control between the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory.

In addition, it is 1m to execute the control of the LED port corresponding to the control code in the main loop.
This is to prevent the normal LED control executed by the interrupt processing of sec from being affected.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the LED ports (Port0 to Port23) are used.
), Since the solenoid is connected to some of the ports, for example, if the brightness of the LED described above is adjusted by the operation of a player or the like, the voltage to the solenoid will also be reset. Since the operation is only ON / OFF, it is considered that the influence on the solenoid is small. Further, when the synchronization effect for synchronizing the light emission of the LED and the operation of the solenoid is executed, it is possible to easily execute such a synchronization effect.

[10-13. Data load processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a data load process is performed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) executed when the power is turned on. In addition, data loading processing may be performed during the game. These data load processes are R
Data transfer from OM to RAM or buffer (eg, sub-main ROM 2050 to SR)
Data transfer to AM2100b, data transfer from CGROM2060 to built-in VRAM2370 (for example, see FIG. 10)), that is, a process of loading data stored in ROM into a RAM or a buffer (data load process). ..

In the above data loading process, if the amount of data to be transferred is large, it takes time to load, and the watchdog may be reset and the data loading process may end. When the watchdog is reset, it is difficult to determine whether the cause of the reset is simply because the amount of data is large and it takes time, or because an error has occurred during data loading. Further, when the data loading process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 cannot determine whether the loading is completed or the loading is unsuccessful, and continues to wait for the loading completion, so that the automatic recovery cannot be performed. There is a risk of becoming.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the time required for the data loading process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the data loading process is terminated as an error and reloaded. Hereinafter, FIG. 93
The data loading process will be described with reference to. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a data load process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 93, the host control circuit 2100 first sets the upper limit of the transfer time (step S1651). The transfer time is the time required to load data from the ROM to the RAM. The upper limit of the transfer time varies depending on the amount of data to be transferred, but in the present embodiment, it is determined by the following equation (2).
Upper limit of transfer time = (transfer data amount per unit time) x (transfer time guideline + α) ...
Equation (2)
The transfer data amount and transfer time guideline per unit time of the above equation (2) may be set in advance based on the transfer data amount, or may be set in advance based on the transfer data amount, for example, the host control circuit 2100. It may be calculated by. It should be noted that α is a time for allowing a margin for data loading.

When the process of step S1651 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S16.
Move to 52 and start loading data from ROM to RAM.

After starting the data loading (step S1652), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data loading is completed (step S1653). If the data loading is not completed (NO in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1654. On the other hand, if the data loading is completed (YES in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 ends the data loading process.

In step S1654, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value. If the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit (step S1)
YES in 654), the watchdog timer is cleared at regular intervals (step S1655). On the other hand, if the data transfer time does not exceed the upper limit (step S16).
NO in 54), the host control circuit 2100 determines that an error has occurred and executes error processing. The error processing executed here resets the load data by watchdog reset without performing the watchdog timer clear processing (step S1656).
, It is a process to reload. After that, the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1654. That is, when the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (N in step S1654).
In O), it will be reloaded as an error process.

In this way, when performing data load processing, the host control circuit 2100 should continue to clear the watchdog timer at regular intervals while waiting for the completion of loading so that the watchdog reset does not occur during normal loading. I have to. However, when the data load process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the host control circuit 2100 resets the load data and reloads the data. As a result, even if it takes time to load the data, it will be automatically restored by reloading.

[10-14. Sub-random number processing]
Next, the sub-random number processing executed in the main loop by the host control circuit 2100 will be described.

In the sub-random number processing, various initialization processing (step S12 in FIG. 61) is performed when the power is turned on.
It includes a random number initialization process executed as one of (see 01), a random number periodic update process executed periodically, and a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used. The sub-random number processing is different from the lottery of special symbols by the main CPU 101 (see, for example, FIG. 9) related to the ball ejection, and is a processing for random numbers used for, for example, determining an effect mode that does not affect the ball ejection. However, the sub-random number processing described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. These sub-random number processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number periodic update process. FIG. 96 shows (a) a flowchart showing an example of random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, (c) a flowchart showing an example of random number 3 acquisition processing, and (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, four random numbers are used (random numbers 1 to 4).
, As shown in FIG. 61, the initialization process for these four random numbers is the game data RA.
It is executed at the same timing as M clear.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the random number initialization process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (minutes / seconds) (step S1671), and then enters the loop for the number of random numbers.

In the loop for the number of random numbers, the host control circuit 2100 first creates a random number SEED (step S1672). The following formula (3) is used to create a random number SEED in the random number initialization process.
) Is executed.
SEED (random numbers 1 to 4) = (RTC time (seconds) + (RTC time (minutes) x 60) + random number numbers (random numbers 1 to 4)) x initial prime number ... Equation (3)

The host control circuit 2100 creates a random number SEED in step S1672, and then stores the random number SEED created in step S1672 in a random number backup, that is, SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1673). The random number SEED backed up here is the random number SEED created this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or may be continuously stored.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of steps S1672 and S1673 for the number of random numbers (four random numbers 1 to 4 in this embodiment), the host control circuit 2100 exits the loop for the number of random numbers and ends the random number initialization process.

As described above, in the random number initialization process, the minutes and seconds of the RTC time are used. Therefore, the random number SEED at the time of initialization is involved in the time when the power is turned on up to the minute and the second.

Next, the random number periodic update process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. The random number periodic update process is a process of periodically updating the random numbers 1 to 4 even if none of the random numbers 1 to 4 is used in the waiting for the end of the bank flip shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the random number periodic update process, the host control circuit 2100 has a random number 1 acquisition process (step S1681), a random number 2 acquisition process (step S1682), and a random number 3.
The acquisition process (step S1683) and the random number 4 acquisition process (step S1684) are performed in this order. The random number periodic update process is always executed while waiting for the end of the bank flip. Further, even if the bank flip end wait does not occur due to any processing failure in the main loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs random number periodic update processing once in one frame.

As shown in FIG. 96A, the random number 1 acquisition process updates the random number 1 (step S1685).
), That is, after acquiring the random number 1, the random number 1 is updated. After that, the acquired random number 1 is stored in the random number 1 backup, that is, SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1686). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96B, the random number 2 acquisition process updates the random number 2 (step S1687) and backs up the random number 2 (step S1).
688). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the random number 3 acquisition process updates the random number 3 (step S1689) and backs up the random number 3 (step S1690).
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the random number 4 acquisition process updates the random number 4 (step S1691) and backs up the random number 4 (step S1692). The random numbers backed up in steps S1686, S1688, S1690 and S1692 are the random numbers acquired this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or continuously stored. ..

It should be noted that any of the random numbers 1 to 4 is obtained from the random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 32767, but the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used,
The host control circuit 2100 first performs a random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693). This random number 3 acquisition process is a process of acquiring a random number to be used for determining the random number to be used among the random number 1, the random number 2, and the random number 4. When the random number 3 acquisition process in step S1693 is executed, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to step S1694.

In step S1694, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder number (hereinafter, simply referred to as “remainder number”) when the random number acquired in the random number 3 acquisition process of step S1693 is divided by 4 is 0 or 1. To determine. If the number of remainders is 0 or 1 (step S16)
YES in 94), random number 1 acquisition processing is performed (step S1695). On the other hand, if the remainder is neither 0 nor 1 (NO in step S1694), step S16.
Move to 96.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1696 whether or not the remainder number is 2. If the remainder number is 2 (YES in step S1696), the random number 2 acquisition process is performed (step S1697). On the other hand, if the remainder number is not 2 (NO in step S1696), the process proceeds to step S1698.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1698 whether or not the remainder number is 3. If the number of remainders is 3 (YES in step S1698), the random number 4 acquisition process is performed (step S1699). On the other hand, if the remainder number is not 3 (NO in step S1698), this means that there is no remainder number of 0 to 3, so step S16.
Start over from 93.

The random number 1 acquisition process (step S1695) and the random number 2 acquisition process (step S1697).
), Random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693) and random number 4 acquisition process (step S1699).
) Are as shown in FIG. 96.

In this way, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the random number selected from the random numbers 1, the random number 2, and the random number 4 is updated, but the random number not selected is updated. Not done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, random number initialization processing is performed when the power is turned on, random number acquisition processing is performed for the selected random number when the random number is used, and bank flip end waiting or bank flip end. Even if the wait does not occur, the random number periodic update process is performed.

The calculation formula at the time of random number update is as shown in the following formula (4).
This time update value = (previous update value x prime number of each random number) + 1 ... Equation (4)
Here, the return value of the random number acquisition process is from 0 to the right shift return from 32 bits to 16 bits.
The value is 32767. That is, the current update value calculated based on the above equation (4) is represented by 32 bits, and the current update value of this 32 bits is returned from 32 bits to 16 bits by right shift. Then, the 16th bit is masked and the 1st to 15th bits are masked.
The value shown in (any of 0 to 32767) is determined as the update value this time.

By performing the above-mentioned sub-random number processing, the acquired random numbers can be made random, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bias in the acquired random numbers. In particular, since the random number SEED at the time of initialization is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to make the initial value different each time.

[10-14-1. Modification example of sub-random number processing]
Although the sub-random number processing in the present embodiment has been described above, the sub-random number processing (modification example) described below may be performed instead of or in combination with the above-mentioned sub-random number processing. Further, the sub-random number processing (modification example) described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. A modification of this sub-random number processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. Note that FIG. 98 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a modified example of the sub-random number process. However, FIG. 98
, Only the processing necessary for the explanation is shown, and other processing is omitted. Figure 9
9 is a flowchart showing an example of the reception interrupt process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

The host control circuit 2100 first performs a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) (step S1701). In this random number initialization process, for example, a random number seed of a power of 2 (a perfect power) and a current random number seed number are prepared, and a predetermined initial value is set in the stack pointer.

When the random number initialization process of step S1701 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 enters the main loop, performs input processing of the subdevice (step S1702), and then performs various request control processes (step S1703). In this various request control process (step S1703), the output is output to various devices based on the request created in step S1705 described later one frame before.

When the input process of the subdevice (step S1702) and various request control processes (step S1703) are performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a random number table creation process (step S1703).
Step S1704). In the random number table creation process of step S1704, a new random number table is created by updating the random numbers registered in the random number table having a power of 2 size at the drawing timing. To get the random numbers registered in the random number table,
For example, of the random seeds of powers of 2, the random seeds determined based on the current random number seed number are used. For example ^, when the random number seeds a to h of 23 (8) are prepared, if the current random number seed number is 4, the random number seed of d is used.

In step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 can create, for example, a random number table having a size of ²⁵ (32), and 32 random numbers are registered in this random number table. When the random number is registered in the random number table, the host control circuit 2100 updates the value of the random number seed. The random number seed is updated by adding 1 after multiplying the previous update value × the prime number, as in the above equation (4). In this modification, the size of the random number table may be a power of 2 (pieces), and ²⁵ (32) is adopted, but any power of 2 (pieces) may be used. good.

As shown in FIG. 99, the random number seed used for creating the random number table in step S1704 is, for example, the value of the CPU counter by the CPU processor of the host control circuit 2100 at the time of receiving a serial command (step S1801). It is updated using (step S1802). In the random number seed update process of step S1802, the random number seed number used for creating the random number table is updated by incrementing the random number seed number and using the incremented random number seed number as the current random number seed number.

Returning to FIG. 98 and performing the random number table creation process in step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 enters the packet reception loop.

In the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1705) for creating a request for animation for moving image production, and performs a random number acquisition process when a random number is used (step S1706). The request created in step S1705 is output in the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

The host control circuit 2100 is in step S1706 in the random number acquisition process.
Get a random number from the random number table created in 1704. The random numbers acquired here are used for a lottery related to the effect executed by the host control circuit 2100 (for example, a lottery for determining an animation for moving image effect). The host control circuit 2100 is in step S17.
When a random number is acquired from the random number table in 06, the reference position of the random number table is updated (incremented). The reference position of the random number table is only performed when a random number is acquired from the random number table, and is not performed in the random number table creation process of step S1704.

The host control circuit 2100 performs the processing of steps S1705 and S1706.
Repeat for packet reception. When the process of step S1705 and step S1706 is performed for the packet reception, the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S1707), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1708).

The host control circuit 2100 is in step S in the main loop with a period of 33.3 msec.
The processing of 1702 to step S1708 is repeated.

According to the above-mentioned modification of the sub-random number processing, even if there are multiple random number acquisition opportunities in the packet reception loop, only the random number is acquired by changing the reference position using the same random number table already created. From the host control circuit 21 while giving irregularity to the random numbers acquired from
It is possible to reduce the control load of 00.

[10-15. Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and benefits are given based on the result of the gaming. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player to play the game and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also the main control circuit 100 itself is used. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player.

When managed by a game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game medium management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the game machine.
It is connected to a bidirectional communication function via an external game medium handling device (not shown) and a predetermined interface, and is necessary for the game medium lending operation (that is, the player to perform the game medium loading operation). Win a prize (operation to provide a game medium) or a role related to paying out a game medium (
When the winning combination is established), the operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the action of causing the player to pay out the game medium and acquire the necessary game medium), or the game medium used for the game. It suffices that the operation of electromagnetically recording can be performed. Further, the gaming medium management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area.
When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid.
The ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, to get a ball
It means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases depending on consumption, lending, and payout. Further, the "data on the increase / decrease in the game medium due to the consumption, lending and payout of the game medium" is the data on the decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of the game ball and the increase in the number of balls held due to the lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine.
Conversion from game value managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting of possession balls (ball lending)
Accept the request for return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is the so-called C.
It is an R unit and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored.
Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[10-16. Processing related to the operation of the character in the character group]
The processing related to the operation of the accessory (the accessory (including the operating member constituting the accessory) constituting the accessory group 1000) in the accessory group 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 107. The accessory mentioned here is a movable accessory that can be operated by driving various power sources such as a motor and a solenoid, and does not include a non-movable decorative accessory. The accessory is driven based on the control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100, but the excitation data includes the number of steps (for example, when the power source is a stepping motor). The data is not limited to specific data as long as the data has a unit representing the magnitude of power such as excitation time and excitation time.

The processing related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group 1000 is largely the initial operation process of the accessory performed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on and the sub-control main process (or sub-control main) by the host control circuit 2100. There is an accessory control process performed in various request control processes in the process). Hereinafter, the bonus initial operation process and the bonus control process will be described in order.

[10-16-1. Character initial operation processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 100, various initialization processes (for example, for example) are performed by the host control circuit 2100.
The accessory initial operation process performed as one of step S1201 in FIG. 61) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory initial operation process executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the number of operations of the motor used to operate the accessory, that is, the initial position recovery counter to "0" (step S1901).

After the processing of step S1901, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory of the accessory group 1000 is in the initial position (step S1902). In the process of step S1902, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not the accessory is in the initial position of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (specifically, whether or not the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is in the initial position). Judgment is made based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor) provided corresponding to the accessory that is the determination target.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (step S1902).
NO), whether or not the number of operations is a specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, that is, whether or not the value of the initial position recovery counter is "10" or more is determined (step S1904).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the number of operations is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 performs an initial position movement operation (step S190).
6). This initial position moving operation is an operation of driving the motor so as to move the accessory to the initial position.

After the process of step S1906, the host control circuit 2100 adds "1" to the number of motor operations, that is, the value of the initial position recovery counter (step S1907), and steps S19.
Move on to 02. Therefore, until the number of times the motor operates reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times).
As long as it is determined that the accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 repeats the initial position movement processing of step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, and step S1907.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1904 that the number of operations is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (YES in step S1904), the initial position movement process is terminated and the transition setting to the error motor operation stop state is set. Perform processing (step S190)
5). When the error motor operation is shifted to the stopped state, the operation of all the accessories is stopped, the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial operation process of the accessory, and the process is the sub-control main process (for example, FIG. 61).
See).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1902 that the accessory is in the initial position (step S1).
YES in 902), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1901 and determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position for the next accessory (step S1902). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the motors for operating the used accessory are in the initial positions (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 performs a power-on processing (step S1903) to perform the accessory initial operation process. Is terminated, and the process is returned to the sub-control main process (see, for example, FIG. 61).

The power-on process in step S1903 is a process of moving the accessory to the maximum movable range and then moving it to the initial position in order to confirm the operation of the accessory. This step S1
In the power-on processing of 903, the operation of moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion and then moving it to the initial position may be performed simultaneously for all the accessories, or one or a plurality of accessories may be performed in order. May be good.

In the process of turning on the power in step S1903, that is, the process of moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion and then moving it to the initial position, it is sufficient if the operation of the accessory can be confirmed. If there is an accessory to be driven (for example, an accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage), the operation of the accessory is confirmed from the initial position to the first stage. It may be controlled to execute the first operation check that moves to the first stage and the second operation check that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves to the second stage.

Further, for example, a first accessory that is driven stepwise (for example, a first accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage) and from the initial position. When there is a second accessory that drives to a predetermined position, as an operation check of the accessory, a first operation check is performed in which the first accessory moves from the initial position to the first stage, and then the first operation is confirmed. A third operation check is performed in which the second character moves from the initial position to a predetermined position, and then a second operation check in which the first character moves from the first stage to the second stage is performed. May be. In this case, by performing the third operation check between the first operation check and the second operation check, it is possible to efficiently check the operation of a plurality of accessories.

As described above, in the initial operation processing of the accessory, the host control circuit 2100 is used when the power is turned on.
Whether or not the accessory is in the initial position is provided corresponding to the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (specifically, among the accessory detection sensor group 1002, the accessory that is the target for determining whether or not the accessory is in the initial position. Detected by the accessory detection sensor) (step S1902), and if all the accessories are in the initial position,
The power-on processing (step S1903) is performed. Then, when there is an accessory that is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), the initial position movement process (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10).
Time) Repeat. If there is no accessory in the initial position even after performing the initial position movement process (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) a specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 has an error. The transition setting process to the motor operation stop state is performed (step S1905). As a result, when the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not the motor for operating the accessory operates normally, and to move the accessory to the initial position when the accessory is not in the initial position. Can be done. Moreover, if the accessory happens to not be in the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the state in which the accessory cannot return to the initial position continues while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. By shifting to the motor error operation stop state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

[10-16-2. Character control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, step S2 in the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).
The accessory control process performed in No. 10 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory control processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current operation status is a command reception standby operation capable of receiving a command from the main control circuit 100 (that is, whether or not the command reception standby flag is ON). (Step S1911).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is not in the command reception standby operation from the main control circuit 100 (that is, the command reception standby flag is OFF) (NO in step S1911), the accessory control The process is terminated, and the process is transferred to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is in the operation of waiting for receiving a command from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1911), the host control circuit 1
It is determined whether or not a command related to the effect has been received from 00 (step S1912). The commands related to the effect to be judged in this process are, for example, a special symbol fluctuation start command, a special symbol fluctuation stop command, a demo command, a fluctuation confirmation command, and a hit-related command related to a jackpot, and these commands are the hosts. When received by the control circuit 2100, each accessory in the accessory group 1000 is driven.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the command related to the effect has not been received from the main control circuit 100 (NO in step S1912), the accessory control process is terminated and the process is performed as the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). Move to.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the command related to the effect has been received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the effect command reception process (YES in step S1912).
Step S1913) is performed. In this effect command reception time processing, as shown in FIG. 102 described later, the variation start command reception time accessory processing (step S19133) and the initial position restoration accessory according to the command related to the effect received from the main control circuit 100. Each process of operation processing (step S19134), demo command reception bonus processing (step S19136), variation confirmation command reception bonus processing (step S19138), and hit command reception bonus processing (step S19139) is performed. Will be. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

In this embodiment, step S19133, step S19136, and step S1
An example in which each process of 9138 and step S19139 is performed in the accessory control process is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these processes is performed as an interrupt process when a command related to the effect is received. Or the command analysis process described above (step S204 in FIG. 52).
Each of these processes may be performed immediately after (see).

After executing the effect command reception processing (step S1913), the host control circuit 210
0 determines whether or not the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set (step S19).
14).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the acceptance permission for the accessory request is not set (NO in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the acceptance permission of the character request is set (step S19).
(YES) in 14, the host control circuit 2100 performs the acquisition process of the accessory request stored in the accessory request buffer in the animation construction process of FIG. 61 (step S1915).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S1915, the host control circuit 2100
In order to synchronize the effect operation by each accessory in the accessory group 1000 with the effect operation by the display device 16, 2 frames have elapsed from the generation of the effect control request, and then the above-mentioned acquisition process of the accessory request is executed. ..

Next, the host control circuit 2100 transmits the excitation data to the motor driver via the I2C controller 2610 based on the acquired accessory request (step S1916).
After that, the command reception standby flag is set to ON (step S1917). Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (step S1918). In this process, the host control circuit 2100
Is a communication error between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 or I
It may be determined whether or not an error in the 2C controller 2610 has been detected (acquired or input).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (YES in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 sets a communication controller error (step S1921). Then, after the process of step S1921, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication error signal is not received from the I2C controller 261 (NO in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the address of each motor driver can be accessed (step S1919).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the address of each motor driver cannot be accessed (NO in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 sets a connection error (step S192).
2). Then, after the process of step S1922, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the address of each motor driver can be accessed (YES in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the operation of each accessory (each motor) is normally completed (step S1920).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the operation of each accessory (each motor) is normally completed (YES in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 terminates the accessory control process and performs the process as the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of each accessory (each motor) is not normally completed (NO in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 determines.
A data error is set (step S1923). Then, after the processing of step S1923, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control processing, and the processing is performed as the sub control circuit main processing (
(See FIG. 52).

[10-16-3. Processing when receiving production commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect processing at the time of receiving the effect system command performed in step S1913 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving an effect command. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the effect system command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the command reception standby flag to OFF in step S19131. Then, the host control circuit 2100 is set in step S1912.
Each process is executed according to the command of the production system received in. Specifically, when the command received in step S1912 is a fluctuation start command (step S1).
YES in 9132), accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (step S19133)
To execute. After that, the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position restoration accessory operation process (step S19134), and ends the process at the time of receiving the effect system command.

If the command received in step S1912 is a demo command, (
NO in step S19132 and YES in step S19135), the demo command receiving accessory process (step S19136) is executed, and the effect command receiving process is terminated.

If the command received in step S1912 is a fluctuation determination command (NO in both steps S19132 and S19135, and YES in step S19137), the function processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (step S1913).
8) is executed, and the processing at the time of receiving the production command is terminated.

Further, when the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, or a fluctuation confirmation command (step S19132, step S).
In both 19135 and step S19137, it is determined that the hit system command has been received, the hit system command reception time accessory process (step S19139) is executed, and the effect system command reception time process is terminated. If the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, or a fluctuation confirmation command, the command received in step S1912 is the hit command instead of determining that the hit command has been received. It is also possible to execute the accessory process (step S19139) at the time of receiving the hit system command based on the determination that the above is true.

The above-mentioned variable start command received accessory process (step S19133), initial position recovery accessory operation process (step S19134), demo command received accessory process (step S1913).
6), each process at the time of receiving the variable start command (step S19138) and the processing at the time of receiving the hit system command (step S19139) will be described below.

[10-16-4. When receiving a variable start command, processing the accessory]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the function processing at the time of receiving the change start command of the special symbol performed in step S19133 in the processing at the time of receiving the effect system command (see FIG. 102) will be described. Figure 1
03 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change start command of the special symbol. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the special symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories (including the operating members constituting the accessories) of the accessory group 1000 are in the initial positions (step S19141). This step S
In the process of 19141, the host control circuit 2100 determines based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 that detects that each accessory is present at the initial position.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19).
YES in 141), set the acceptance permission of the character request (step S1914)
2). When the permission to accept the accessory request is set, the control state of each accessory of the accessory group 1000 shifts from the command reception standby state to the accessory request acceptance permission state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the initial position recovery counter to “0” (step S19143). Then, after the processing of step S19143, the host control circuit 210
0 ends the accessory processing when the variable start command is received.

On the other hand, in step S19141, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, that is, that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (step S191).
NO in 41), the process of adding "1" to the initial position recovery counter is executed (step S19144).

After executing the process of step S19144, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the initial position recovery counter is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (step S191).
45).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position recovery counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (YES in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing of step S19146, the host control circuit 2100 ends the processing of the accessory at the time of receiving the variation start command.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position recovery counter is not more than the specified number of times (NO in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 sets the transition to the initial position recovery operation state (step S19147). In the initial position recovery operation state, the initial position recovery operation process described later is executed.

In this way, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command, the host control circuit 2100 is
When the change start command of the special symbol is received, whether or not all the accessories are in the initial position is detected by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19141), and if there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, the accessory request is made. The setting (step S19147) for shifting to the initial position restoration operation state without permitting (prohibiting) the reception is performed. Then, when the number of times of processing the bonuses at the time of receiving the variation start command, which is determined in step S19141 that one or more bonuses are not in the initial position, reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) continuously, the host control circuit 2100 determines. The transition to the motor error operation stop state is set. That is, even if there is a bonus that is not in the initial position at the start of the change of the special symbol, the change of the special symbol starts continuously within the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) under the situation that there is a bonus that is not in the initial position. Until now, the setting to shift to the initial position recovery operation state is made, and
When the specified number of times is reached, the setting is made to shift to the error motor operation stop state. for that reason,
If there is an accessory that does not return to the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the accessory that cannot return to the initial position continues while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. If so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

[10-16-5. Initial position recovery accessory operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the initial position restoration accessory operation processing performed in step S19134 during the production command reception processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial position restoration accessory operation process. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the setting of transition to the initial position restoration operation state in step S19147 of the accessory process at the time of receiving the variation start command (see FIG. 103).

First, whether or not the host control circuit 2100 is in the initial position restoration operation state, that is, whether or not the transition setting to the initial position restoration operation state is made in step S19147 of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (see FIG. 103). Whether or not it is determined (step S19151).

If it is not in the initial position restoration operation state (NO in step S19151), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position restoration accessory operation process.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is in the initial position restoration operation state (step S1).
YES in 9151), the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (YES in 9151), whether or not the accessory is in the initial position.
Specifically, among the accessory detection sensor group 1002, whether or not the accessory is in the initial position is detected by the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the target of determining whether or not the accessory is in the initial position. (Step S1952).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (step S1915).
YES in 2), the initial position movement operation process is executed (step S19153). This initial position movement operation process is a process of driving the motor to return the accessory to the initial position.

The processes of steps S19152 and S19153 are performed for the number of motors that drive the accessory.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is in the initial position (step S1).
NO) in 9152, the process of determining whether or not the next accessory is in the initial position (step S19152) is performed without performing the process of step S19153.

The host control circuit 2100 is in step S19 with respect to the number of motors for driving the accessory.
When the processing of 152 and / and step S19153 is performed, the initial position restoration accessory operation processing is terminated.

[10-16-6. Processing of accessories when receiving demo commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the demo command reception accessory processing performed in step S19136 during the production command reception processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command. This process is performed by the main control circuit 10.
It is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on receiving the demo command transmitted from 0.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19).
161). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 is, for example, a bonus control process (FIG. 1).
It is determined whether or not various errors (communication controller error, connection error, data error) set in the processes after step S1918 in (see 01) have occurred.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, no error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (the motor is normal) (
YES in step S19161), the accessory excitation release process is performed (step S1916).
2). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 stops outputting excitation data to all motor drivers.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19163).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial position (YES in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S1916).
4). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command.

On the other hand, in step S19161, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19161), the accessory request is not accepted. Permission is set (step S19165).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 stops all the motors (step S19166), performs the motor driver reset process (step S19167) after the process of step S19166, and ends the demo command receiving accessory process.

In this way, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command, the host control circuit 2100 performs an error check (step S19161) of the motor driver for driving the accessory.
If an error is detected, acceptance of the accessory request is prohibited (step S19165).
, The motor driver reset process (step S19167) is performed. If no error is detected, the release process (step S) releases all the excitation of the accessory.
After performing 19162), the bonus detection sensor group 1002 detects whether or not all the bonuses are in the initial position (step S19163), and if all the bonuses are in the initial position, the bonus request is accepted. I try to allow.

[10-16-7. When receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, processing the accessory]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the function processing at the time of receiving the change determination command of the special symbol performed in step S19138 during the processing at the time of receiving the effect system command (see FIG. 102) will be described. Figure 1
06 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change determination command of the special symbol. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the special symbol variation determination command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19).
171). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 is referred to in step S19161 (FIG. 1).
Similarly to (see 05), for example, whether or not various errors (communication controller error, connection error, data error) set in the processes after step S1918 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101) have occurred. To determine.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, no error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19171), the number of continuous errors is determined. The continuous error counter shown is set to "0".
(Step S19172).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19173).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial position (YES in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S1917).
4). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command.

On the other hand, in step S19171, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19171), the control to stop all the motors. To execute (
Step S19175).

After the process of step S19175, the host control circuit 2100 performs a motor driver reset process (step S19176), adds 1 to the number of continuous errors, that is, adds "1" to the value of the continuous error counter (step S19177).

After the processing of step S19177, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the value of the continuous error counter is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (step S19178).

When the value of the continuous error counter is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (step S19).
YES in 178), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19179). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing of step S19179, the host control circuit 2100
Ends the accessory processing when the fluctuation confirmation command is received.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous error counter is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs the transition setting process to the accessory request acceptance disallowed state (step S19180). ..

The number of continuous errors, that is, the value of the continuous error counter indicates the number of times that the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation determination command, which is determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19171), is continuously performed.

As described above, in the function processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, the host control circuit 2100 is used.
An error check of the motor driver for driving the accessory is performed (step S19171).
), If an error is detected, reset the motor driver (step S1).
9176), the acceptance of the character request is prohibited (step S19180). and,
When the number of times of handling the accessory at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19161) reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) in succession, the host control circuit 2
In 100, the transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state is performed (step S19179).
, The operation of all the accessories is stopped. Further, when it is determined that there is no motor error (YES in step S19171), the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19173), and all of them. When the accessory is in the initial position, the acceptance of the accessory request is permitted (step S19174). Therefore, if it happens that a motor error is determined due to a minor trouble (error), the motor error continues while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state by stopping the service request acceptance disapproval. In that case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

The initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147 (see FIG. 103) described above corresponds to the first recovery process of the present invention, and the motor driver reset process in step S19176 (see FIG. 106) is the second of the present invention. Corresponds to the recovery process. However, the first recovery process is
In addition to the initial position restoration operation transition setting, various operations such as motor error cancellation and restoration operation such as moving the accessory from the standby position to the drive position may be performed. Similarly, regarding the second recovery process, in addition to the motor driver reset process, the process in the sub control circuit 200 is executed again, the parameters are set again regarding the operation of the motor, and the same as the first recovery process. Various processes such as control may be performed.

Further, the process of step S19144 described above corresponds to the first counting means of the present invention, and the process of step S19177 described above corresponds to the second counting means of the present invention. Strictly speaking, neither the first counting means nor the second counting means counts the number of games played. However, the above-mentioned first recovery process can be performed each time a fluctuation start command is received, and the above-mentioned second recovery process can be performed each time a fluctuation confirmation command is received. Therefore, the first counting means and the second counting means do not strictly count the number of games as described above, but substantially count the number of games (number of fluctuations). can.

Further, if the above-mentioned first counting means is designed to be reset only when the power is turned off, the first counting means does not need to be the number of continuous games (number of fluctuations), and "power is supplied from the time the power is turned on." It can be expressed as "the number of games in which the accessory did not exist at the initial position until it was refused". Further, if the initial position recovery counter is reset by, for example, the presence of the accessory in the initial position, the number of consecutive fluctuations in which the accessory does not exist in the initial position and the first counting means are used. It is possible that the counted number will be the same value. Further, since the above-mentioned second counting means is the number of times that the motor error occurs continuously, it may be substantially the same value as the number of games (number of fluctuations) in which the motor error occurs continuously. ,
If the power is turned off between the start of the change of the special symbol and the end of the change, and then the power is restored, the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means are reset during the change of the special symbol. To. Therefore, in such a case, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives the fluctuation determination command indicating the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the counting value by the first counting means is changed to 0 and the counting value by the second counting means is changed to 1. Therefore, there may be a difference between the counting value by the first counting means and the counting value by the second counting means. Considering this way, the counting value counted by the first counting means and the second counting means can be expressed as the number of games, and the first counting means is the number of starting games that change the special symbol. It is the same, and it can be expressed that the second counting means is the same as the number at which the change of the special symbol is completed. However, the counting value by the first counting means and the counting value by the second counting means are not reset by simply turning the power on and off. For example, the reset button provided on the main control board 30 (not shown). )
When power operation (power on operation or power off operation) is performed while operating other operation means such as operation means related to the setting (setting key 328 or setting switch 332), setting confirmation processing or / and setting change. It may be reset only when processing is performed.

Regarding the number of games (number of fluctuations), it may be defined that one game (one symbol variation) was performed at the start of the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). , It may be defined that one game was played at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (when the result of the special lottery is derived), or after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol is displayed. The entire game until the end of the variable display may be defined as one game.

[10-16-8. When a hit command is received, the accessory processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the hit system command reception time accessory processing performed in step S19139 in the effect system command reception time processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory processing at the time of receiving a hit command. This process is performed based on the reception of the hit system command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the host control circuit 2100.
Is executed by. The hit system command corresponds to, for example, a command for shifting to a big hit game state (a command to start a big hit game), a command to start a round game, a command between round games (for example, an interval time, etc.), a command to end a big hit game state, and the like.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19181).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial position (YES in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S1918).
2). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the hit system command.

As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the hit system command, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S1918).
1) If all the characters are in the initial position, the reception of the character request is permitted (step S19).
182) When it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position, the accessory processing at the time of receiving the winning command is terminated without permitting the acceptance of the accessory request.

It should be noted that, through all the processes related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group, it is determined whether or not the number of operations in step S1904 (see FIG. 100) is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, and step S19145 (FIG. FIG. Determining whether the initial position recovery counter of (see 103) is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, and whether the value of the continuous error counter in step S1968 (see FIG. 105) is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more. In the determination of whether or not, the specified number of times is the same (10 times) in each case, but it goes without saying that the specified number of times may be different in each process.

In addition, the initial operation processing of the accessory (see FIG. 101) and the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (FIG. 10).
3) and when the variable confirmation command is received, it is explained that if the error continues, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the motor error operation stop state. However, the following errors can be exemplified as the occurrence of serious errors.

For example, a predetermined accessory (including an actuating member constituting the accessory) is provided so as to be able to operate from a specific position (for example, an initial position) to a predetermined position (for example, a maximum range of motion). The predetermined accessory is operated by, for example, a motor. And when a predetermined accessory exists in a specific position,
This predetermined accessory is locked by a locking member (for example, a solenoid). The lock member is located at a lock position for locking a predetermined accessory in a normal state (for example, when it is not energized), and normally operates at a lock release position to unlock the predetermined accessory. The energization of the lock member is performed, for example, by the host control circuit 2100 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 (both see FIG. 10). Then, the host control circuit 2100 energizes the lock member when the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position to the specified position, and the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position to the specified position. It is configured to end the energization of the lock member after the start. That is, the lock member is in the locked position when the predetermined accessory moves toward the specified position and then returns to the specific position, and is locked when the predetermined accessory is pushed into the specific position. .. In such a configuration, if a motor error (for example, an error such that a motor drive command to the motor driver cannot be transmitted due to a communication error) occurs, the motor cannot be driven. on the other hand,
The lock member is energized, but the predetermined accessory does not start operating toward the specified position. Therefore, the energized state of the lock member continues (the lock member continues to stay in the unlocked position), and the lock member continues to be energized.
The lock member may be disconnected due to overcurrent. Therefore, when such an error occurs, the error motor operation stop is not set until the error reaches the specified number of times, but if such an error continues to occur the specified number of times, the error motor operation stop. By setting the transition to, it does not shift to the motor error operation stop state even if a minor error occurs, but if the error occurs continuously for the specified number of times, it shifts to the motor error operation stop state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors such as the lock member being disconnected due to overcurrent.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect system command is received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the effect system command reception process (step S1913) is executed according to the received effect system command, and then the effect system command is executed. The process of determining whether or not the transfer permission of the accessory request is set (step S1914) is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a command reception standby operation is in progress between steps S1913 and step S1914. A process for determining whether or not a command may be present (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a “command reception standby operation determination process outside the figure”) may be executed. The processing method in this case may be any of the following first processing methods to third processing methods.

The first processing method is a control that shifts from the status during the command reception standby operation to one of the statuses of the character request acceptance permission, the error motor operation stop, the initial position recovery operation, and the character request acceptance disapproval. This is the processing method by the host control circuit 2100 in the case, and the processing is executed by the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, and hit-type command has been received. do.
(C) When a production command is received from the main control circuit 100 (YE in step S1912).
(Equivalent to S), according to the received command, the variable start command received bonus process, the demo command received bonus process, the variable confirmation command received bonus process, or the hit command received bonus process is executed. After shifting from the status of waiting for command reception to one of the following statuses: permission to accept command reception, stop of error motor operation, initial position recovery operation, and disapproval of reception of accessory request, command reception standby operation (not shown) Execute the discrimination process. When all the accessories are restored to the initial positions as a result of performing the initial position restoration accessory operation process, the control is performed during the command reception standby operation.
(D) When it is determined that the command reception standby operation is in progress in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown in the figure), another command is executed by executing the process of step S1912 with all the accessories in the initial positions. It may be determined whether it is being received, whether it is receiving the next fluctuation start command, etc., and if it is based on the currently received fluctuation start command, for example, during one fluctuation (with one fluctuation start command), for example. The process of step S1912 may be executed 10 times.
(E) N in the process of step S1914 (process of determining whether or not the transfer permission of the accessory request is set) executed after the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown in the figure).
If it is determined to be O, if the error motor operation is stopped, the motor is stopped until the power is turned off. In addition, if the character reception is not permitted, the character will not be activated, but when the fluctuation start command etc. is received, it is determined whether or not all the characters are in the initial position, and the character request is accepted. It may be controlled to the permitted state.

The second processing method is a command reception standby operation in which the production system commands (variation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, hit system command) have not been received as commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100. This is the processing method in the case of, and the processing is executed by the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, and hit-type command has been received. do.
(C) When a production command is received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912)
(Equivalent to), shifts from the status of waiting for command reception to the status of non-waiting for command reception.
(D) Depending on the received effect command, the variable start command received bonus process, the demo command received bonus process, the variable confirmation command received bonus process, or the hit command received bonus process is executed.
(E) If none of the variable start command reception bonus processing, demo command reception bonus processing, variable confirmation command reception bonus processing, and hit command reception bonus processing is executed, the command is received. Return to standby status. If any one of the variable start command reception bonus processing, demo command reception bonus processing, variation confirmation command reception bonus processing, and hit command reception bonus processing is performed, the command is used. Since the status shifts to a status other than waiting for reception, it is determined as NO in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown).

The third processing method is based on the premise that a plurality of types of commands are received as production commands. This is a processing method that loops the bonus processing when receiving a variable confirmation command and the bonus processing when receiving a hit command. When the variable start command reception bonus processing, demo command reception bonus processing, fluctuation confirmation command reception bonus processing, and hit command reception bonus processing are looped, the command reception standby operation is canceled. If so, the above looping process may be performed when YES is determined in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown in the figure).

[10-17. Hall menu task processing]
Next, processing related to the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the host control circuit 2100 at a predetermined cycle, 33 mse in this embodiment.
It is done every c.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of a hall menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on is received.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it determines that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu display process of step S302. This hall menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying the hall menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300. The hall menu screen is displayed in step S, which will be described later.
Even when the process of 312 is executed, it is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, but step S3
There are differences between the hall menu screen displayed in 02 and the hall menu screen displayed in step S312, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. FIG. 10
9 is a diagram showing an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed. 110 and 111 are diagrams showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the hall menu display process (step S302).
Is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the hall menu screen has a hall menu item display area 1610 in the left side area of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 in the lower left-right direction, and a preview arranged in the center of the screen. It has a display area 1630 and.

Each item of the hall menu is displayed in the hall menu item display area 1610. For convenience, only time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hall menu items in FIGS. 109 to 111, but these items are shown. In addition, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume control setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items in the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hall menu screen, the activated operation buttons and the disabled operation buttons in the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguishable. For example, in FIGS. 109 to 111, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are enabled), and the disabled operation buttons are displayed. It is painted in black (left and right select buttons 6)
64c and 664d have been disabled).

By operating the activated select buttons (up / down select buttons 664a, 664b), one of a plurality of hall menu items can be selected. In FIGS. 109 and 110, the hall menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hall menu item. For example, FIG. 109 shows that the "time setting" surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 111, it is shown that the “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item. However, the highlight display is not always limited as long as the selected item can be easily grasped by the operator. The screen in which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 109 and 110) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for a selected item among the items of the plurality of hall menus is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 109 and 110), and when the "setting change / confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is made. The change / confirmation history screen is previewed (see FIG. 111). However, it is preferable not to display the set value on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It should be noted that the operation cannot be performed in the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is displayed in preview, the operation to set the time cannot be performed on the time setting screen displayed in preview.
You can set the time on the time setting screen that is displayed when the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and determined.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 is set in the display area of the display device 16 together with the hall menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. "Confirming" is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 is referred to by the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).
Controls the output of voice such as "Settings are being changed" or "Settings are being confirmed" from the speaker 24. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10). In this way, the operator is made to know whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without disturbing the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu process in step S303. Details of this hall menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hall menu process (step S303), the host control circuit 2100 executes a command (initialization command) indicating whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command (power recovery command) indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command is received (NO in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 continues to execute the hall menu process in step S303.

Further, when transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the host control circuit 2100 at the same timing as the command.

The changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timings if it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command, it is not necessary to transmit the set value information to the host control circuit 2100 because the set value has not been changed, but the set value information is also the host control circuit 2100. You may send it to.

When the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed in step S304, that is, the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is determined whether or not the number of histories is a predetermined number N or more (step S305). this is,
When you want to record the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data to the free area according to the number of histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. This is intended to prevent the occurrence of situations such as being unable to record. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, but is set to 500, for example, in the present embodiment.

If the number of history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is a predetermined number N or more (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and the history information overwrite process (step S306) is executed. The history information overwriting process in step S306 is overwritten in order from the earliest stored history (oldest history information) among the histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. It should be noted that the above-mentioned history information includes history information of the error motor operation stop state, history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and history information of disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request. The history information of the error motor operation stop state is the transition setting to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146 in FIG. 103, step S19179 in FIG. 106).
Date and time information and error motor operation stop state is released (step S in FIGS. 108 and 114).
311) Date and time information, etc. The history information of the initial position restoration operation transition setting is the date and time information of the initial position movement operation (step S1906 in FIG. 100) and the initial position restoration operation transition setting (step S19147 in FIG. 103). The history information of disapproval of acceptance of the character request means that the character request is disapproved (step S19165 in FIG. 105, step S1 in FIG. 106).
9180) date and time information and the like. However, strictly speaking, the error motor operation stop state is released in step S311 described later. However, since the process of step S311 is always performed when controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the date and time information controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is used as the date and time information when the error motor operation stop state is canceled. Should be overwritten.

Further, in the above, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request are in step S306 or step S.
Although it is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in 307, step S
When "Error Information History" is selected in the hall menu processing of 302 (FIG. 115).
YES in step S3008), from the viewpoint of reflecting on the error information history screen (see FIG. 116) displayed on the display device 16, the history information of the error motor operation stop state between step S301 and step S302. It is preferable to perform a process of storing the history information of the initial position restoration operation transition setting and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request in the subwork RAM 2100a.

In addition, as described above, by making it possible to view the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of accessory requests, although it has not led to a serious error such as an error motor operation stop. The game machine manager can grasp in advance the possibility of leading to a serious error such as an error motor operation stop, and it becomes possible to appropriately manage the pachinko game machine 1.

In the process of overwriting the history information in step S306, the history information already stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is overwritten with new history information, and as a result, the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is eventually overwritten. It is designed to be erased, but it is not limited to this. For example, if there is a risk that the predetermined upper limit will be exceeded if new history information is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, at least the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a After erasing a part, the history information may be stored. Further, even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, when there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, the setting history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be exceeded. At least a part may be erased.

If the number of histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is less than a predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S307 and records the history information in the free area of the subwork RAM 2100a. Recording process (step S
307) is executed. The history information recorded in step S307 also includes history information about the error motor operation stop state.

In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S306 and step S
The history information recording process of 307 may be generically referred to as a history recording process.

The history information includes time information measured by RTC209 and operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or setting confirmation) when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101. Information that the process has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information that the setting change process is executed, and the setting value information after the setting change sent from the main CPU 101 are used. The information associated with is the history information. Further, when the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information that the setting confirmation process is executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 correspond to each other. The attached information is history information. Main CPU 10 when a power failure recovery command is received
It is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from 1 in the history information, but the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 is included in the history information in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process. Is preferable. Further, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history is browsed in the hall menu process (step S303), is the browsing history overwritten as history information in step S306? Or step S
In 307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the free area of the subwork RAM 2100a.

In a normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, a power failure recovery command, a setting operation command, etc.) is immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the host control circuit 2100 is started. However, when the host control circuit 2100 does not receive a command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since it was started, it is determined that the host control circuit 2100 is abnormal, and the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side. Each aspect of the display output, the audio output, and the LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, stores not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the process of step S306 or step S307, and then moves to step S308.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting has been changed in step S308.
That is, it is determined in step S304 whether or not the initialization command has been received (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power failure recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. Further, in the process of step S308, since it is sufficient for the host control circuit 2100 to determine that the setting has been changed, instead of determining whether or not the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, after the change. It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the setting value information of.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change has been made (YES in step S308), the host control circuit 2100 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

In step S310, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the error motor operation is stopped (step S310). That is, step S1905 (FIG. 100).
(See), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179 (see FIG. 106), it is determined that the error motor operation is stopped.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the error motor operation stop state is determined (YES in step S310), the error motor operation stop state is released (step S311).
.. When the error motor operation stop state is released, all the accessories can be operated.

On the other hand, if it is not in the error motor operation stop state (NO in step S310), it is determined whether or not the accessory request is disallowed (step S322), and if the accessory request is disallowed (YES in step S322). ), Canceling the disapproval of the accessory request, resetting the initial position recovery counter, and resetting the number of consecutive errors (step S323), and the process proceeds to step S312. If the accessory request is not permitted (NO in step S322), the process proceeds to step S312 without performing the process of step S322.

It should be noted that the release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting is performed. It may be canceled when the change process is performed and may not be canceled when the setting confirmation process is performed.

Further, as described above, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is also performed, but the release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed when the setting change process is performed, while the setting is performed. It is preferable not to execute the backup clear process without the change process (for example, the backup clear process executed at the time of NO determination in step S22 of FIG. 33). Since the production using a group of characters is an important factor in enhancing the interest in the game, it is undeniable that the interest is reduced when the game is played on a gaming machine in which the characters cannot operate normally. Therefore, the important decision as to whether or not to operate the gaming machine in which the accessory cannot operate should be made by the authorized hall personnel, and the error motor operation stop state cannot be canceled by the unauthorized person. I have to. However, it is convenient when a serious error such as an error motor operation stop state has not occurred, such as cancellation of disapproval of a character request, reset of the initial position recovery counter, and reset of the number of consecutive errors (step S323). From this point of view, it is preferable that the backup clear process is executed not only when the setting change process is performed but also when the backup clear process is performed without the setting change process.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu redisplay process in step S312. At this time, the hall menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) that is displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, and the setting change process is completed and the game is played. Executable state (or step S)
30 is a screen displayed during the game return process), and as shown in FIG. 112, for example, an item for ending the hall menu is displayed in one of the items in the hall menu. In addition, FIG.
Reference numeral 12 is a display device 1 when the hall menu redisplay process of step S312 is executed.
It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of 6.

That is, the hall menu screen (step S) displayed while changing the setting or confirming the setting.
On the hall menu screen displayed in 302, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the operator's intention, but it is displayed in the hall menu screen (displayed in step S312) that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed. The hall menu screen) is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be terminated at the will of the operator. The hall menu screen displayed in step S302 (see, for example, FIG. 110).
The hall menu screen (see FIG. 112) displayed in step S312 is a functional aspect in which one of the items can be selected and determined and operated (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed). ) Etc. are common.

Further, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change has been made in step S308 (YES in step S308), in the hall menu redisplay process of step S312, the display area of the display device 16 is combined with the hall menu screen. Then, for example, a character such as "setting has been changed" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, in the same way, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the screen, "setting change". "It was done" is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the speaker 24 to output a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10). do. This makes it possible for the operator to know that the settings have been changed (and the backup clear process has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Will be. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is a voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).
Control is performed to turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the above.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (step S30).
NO) in 8, that is, when the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 sets the host control circuit 2100 in step S30.
9-The game screen return process of step S317 is executed without executing the process of step S316. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hall menu redisplay process (step S312) is not executed. In addition, characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed are not displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

By the way, when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, but the process of step S302 is executed. At times, the game cannot be executed because the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, whereas the game can be executed when the process of step S312 is executed. However, as described above, the mode of displaying characters in the display area of the display device 16 when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed (not displayed when the setting confirmation is completed). , The mode of the sound output from the speaker 24 and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, the display device 16
Even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of, the operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (
For example, it is possible or impossible for the pachinko gaming machine 1 to execute a game without obstructing an operation for selecting a hall menu item, an operation for updating a page, or the like. It is possible to easily grasp the appearance.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the process of step S312, the host control circuit 2100 executes step S313.
Move to and execute the hall menu processing. The hall menu process in step S313 is basically the same as step S303, but step S30 in FIG. 118, which will be described later.
The processing when YES in 72 is different, and this will be described later.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not "End of Hall Menu" is selected on the redisplayed Hall Menu screen in step S314. When it is determined that "end of hall menu" is selected (YES in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 performs the game screen return display process (step S317). In this game screen return display process, the host control circuit 2100 operates the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) for a predetermined period of time in the display area of the display device 16 to display an image for effect when playing a game. Display the initial image that is displayed if there is no such thing. And the host control circuit 2100
Moves to step S318 after executing the game screen return process of step S317.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S314 that "end of hall menu" is not selected (NO in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds). Step S315). Although not shown in FIG. 108, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304) and the hall menu redisplay processing (step S312) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S313) is performed. When any of the hall menu items is selected in the above, the time counting is started based on the operator performing some operation, and in the process of step S315, is the time counting time elapsed? It is a process of determining whether or not, and if the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or longer, the host control circuit 21
00 is determined to be YES in step S315.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S315), the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen is terminated, and the game screen return display in step S317 is displayed. Execute the process.

Further, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (step S31).
NO in 5), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step S316). The command to generate the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed, for example, a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game. A command indicating the number of rounds in the above, a round interval command in a big hit game, an end command of a big hit game, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S316 that any of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the host control circuit 2100 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen and ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and the game screen in step S317. Execute return display processing.
As a result, the game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, for example, an image unrelated to the game is displayed even though the game by the main CPU 101 is in progress. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being played. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S316), the process returns to step S313.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen return display process (step S317), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S318 and executes the hall menu display prohibition process. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the display device 16. That is, the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318).
Is executed, the hall menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the hall menu display processing (step S302) is performed unless the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed by performing the power OFF operation. Cannot be executed.

As described above, the hall menu screen is, in principle, a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 during the execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the item of "hole menu end" on the hall menu screen (NO in step S314), none. The operation time does not elapse for a predetermined time (NO in step S315).
Under certain conditions such as not receiving the command to generate the effect control object (NO in step S316), the processes of steps S313 to S316 are repeatedly executed, and the hall menu screen is continuously displayed. Become. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "End Hall Menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the Hall Menu screen or the screen of the selected Hall Menu item ends and the game is played. Screen return process (step S317)
Is executed, so a person who does not have the authority (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a game machine administrator)
However, confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history cannot be easily browsed, and security can be ensured.

In the present embodiment, in step S316, when it is determined that the command to generate the effect control object is received, the game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) are performed. Not necessarily limited to this, for example, the game screen is based on receiving a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as receiving a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated. Return processing (step S317) and hall menu display prohibition processing (step S318)
) May be performed.

Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, where (a) a screen showing that a backup clear process without setting change process has been executed, and (b) a start port abnormality. Both a screen indicating that a winning error has occurred and a backup clearing process without setting change processing has been executed, (c) a backup clearing process without setting change processing has been executed, and a start port error winning error It is a figure which shows the screen after the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was executed with the occurrence of.

As shown in FIG. 113, when a plurality of errors occur, the host control circuit 2100 displays all the error contents generated in the display area of the display device 16 and controls voice and LED in the order of high priority error. Audio is output from the speaker 24 via the circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10), and the LED is output via the audio / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).
25 light emission control is executed.

When the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, if no other error has occurred, the host control circuit 2100 has the display area of the display device 16 as shown in FIG. 113 (a). It is controlled so that the characters such as "RAM is cleared" are displayed inside, and the voice such as "RAM is cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24, and the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is further controlled. LE via (see Figure 10)
The control to turn on D25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red is executed. In addition, the character such as "RAM has been cleared" is displayed using an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 112) in which the character such as "setting has been changed" is displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is always executed (see FIG. 34), and in the hall menu redisplay process of step S312 executed after the setting change process is completed, as described above, " Although characters such as "Settings have been changed" are displayed in the display area of the display device 16, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed, and "Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized." Only the sound such as "ta" is output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the host control circuit 2100 uses a larger area than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 112) in the display area of the display device 16. "RAM
Is controlled so that the characters such as "Cleared" are displayed, and the voice such as "RAM is cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24 (FIG. 113 (a).
)reference). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear process that involves the setting change process is to change the setting value (not the backup clear process), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is the backup clear process. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear process that involves the setting change process is executed,
In a manner that does not interfere with the operation of the redisplayed hall menu screen, the backup clear process is conservatively notified. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the execution of the backup clear process is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the backup clear process from being executed illegally.

If, for example, a start port abnormal winning error has occurred as another error after the backup clear process has been executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the starting port abnormal winning error has occurred. , And that the backup clear process has been executed are both displayed as characters in the display area of the display device 16. At this time, since the order in which the backup clear process is executed has a higher priority than the start port abnormal winning error, the character indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed at the top. .. In addition, a voice notifying that the backup clear process having a high priority has been executed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 indicates that the backup clear process has been executed.
Is emitted.

In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed while both the backup clear process has been executed and the start port abnormal winning error has occurred, the backup clear process has occurred. Is deleted from the display area of the display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormality winning error is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Further, the voice output from the speaker 24 changes from the voice notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to the voice notifying that the start opening abnormality winning error has occurred, and the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is also backed up clear. The mode changes from the mode indicating that the process has been executed to the mode indicating that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the error that has occurred.

In the above, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is advisable to execute it even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed. In the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process, the setting key 32 is performed when the power is not turned on.
It is executed when both the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and the operation of turning on the power switch 35 are performed without turning on 8 (see FIG. 33). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the host control circuit 2100, so that the host control circuit 21 that received the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command.
00 can determine that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed, and can execute the hall menu display process (step S302) and the hole menu process (step S303).

[10-17-1. Other examples of hall menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 31). (See step S1730 in FIG. 32), for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in this embodiment), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (see step S1730). NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, the RAM
There is a high possibility that the work area check process (step S1720) of 103 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, similarly to the above-mentioned setting determination process executed during the execution of the game, the set value may not be executed in step S1720, or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is within the range of "0" to "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1730), the setting determination process (step) for determining the suitability of the set value information by the host control circuit 2100. The process of S319 and step S320) may be executed. The hall menu task in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 114 is another example of a hall menu task performed by the host control circuit 2100, wherein the host control circuit 21
It is a flowchart in the case of executing the setting determination process which determines the suitability of the setting value information by 00. In the following, another example of the hall menu task will be described. However, FIG. 10
The description of the process common to No. 8 will be omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the main RAM 10 is used as the current setting value used for the progress of the game.
The set value information stored in 3 is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 that has received the power failure recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S319. In step S319, the host control circuit 2100 executes the set value check process. This set value check process (step S319) is performed on the current set value information (main CPU1 before the power failure).
This is a process for confirming the setting value information transmitted from 01 and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 (setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power failure). When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S316 are not executed.

Current set value information and main CP in the set value check process (step S319)
After confirming the set value information transmitted from the U101, the host control circuit 2100 determines the set value suitability determination process, that is, whether or not the set value is appropriate (step S320). At this time, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined to be appropriate (YES in step S320), and the process proceeds to step S317. The processing after step S317 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that the setting value is inappropriate (NO in step S320), the process proceeds to step S321, and the host control circuit 2100 determines the set value. Executes abnormal processing.

The above-mentioned set value abnormality processing is a process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the display device 16. In this set value abnormality processing (step S321), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal, a voice for notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. The process may be executed.

As described above, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 performs the setting determination process (step S).
(Processing in 319 and step S320) is executed, and when it is determined that the set value is not appropriate (NO in step S320), the set value abnormality processing (step S321) is executed to indicate that the set value is not appropriate. It is possible to notify the administrator.

The above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S319 and step S320) is executed when the setting confirmation process is completed, but the setting change process is performed without executing either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When the backup process (when the power is not turned on, the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328) is executed, or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only inputting. Unless the setting change process is executed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure and the setting value information received after the power failure match. This is because it is possible to determine the suitability of.

[10-18. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu process (step S303) in the hall menu task (see FIGS. 108 and 114) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of hall menu processing executed by the host control circuit 2100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 selects a hall menu item for which various information / settings are confirmed and various settings are changed based on the operation of the select button 664 and / and the main button 662 by the operator. Perform the hall menu selection process (step S)
3001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 115, the hall menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, and so on. The case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume control setting will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, in the host control circuit 2100, the hall menu selected in step S3001 is ".
It is determined whether or not the time is set (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (step S3002).
YES), the host control circuit 2100 performs a time setting process (step S300).
3). In this time setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". Determine (step S3004)
). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "prize ball information" (YES in step S3004), the host control circuit 2100 performs prize ball information processing (step S300).
5). In this prize ball information processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information is, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, information on the difference between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of prize balls paid out every day in the past few days. Information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of prize balls fired in the past few days, etc.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S3004), whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "setting change / confirmation history". (Step S)
3006). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change / confirmation history" (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 performs setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change / confirmation history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) described later in the display area of the display device 16, and the operator sets the settings. It is possible to check the confirmation history, change history, and browsing history.

Further, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 is operated and the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been operated.
A setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and the operator can view the change history of the setting (setting value), the confirmation history of the setting (setting value), and the viewing. history,
It is possible to confirm the confirmed setting (setting value) and the changed setting (setting value). The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "setting change / confirmation history" (NO in step S3006), step S
It is determined whether or not the hall menu selected in 3001 is "error information history" (step S3008). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "error information history" (YES in step S3008), the host control circuit 2100 performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the host control circuit 2
The 100 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 116) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check or change the error information history.

The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, the subwork RAM 210 as an error history when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the backup is defective.
Information or the like stored in 0a. As described above, the host control circuit 2100 may determine that the backup is defective when an abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (FIG. 6) without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. 9
It may be a time when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the main CPU 101 is started.

As shown in FIG. 116, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared is displayed. For example, the error content of No. 2 on the error information history screen of FIG. 116 is ".
"MOTOR ERR" is shown, which may be described, for example, in step S1905 (FIG. 10).
0), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179 (see FIG. 106) are performed to indicate the date and time information. Although not shown in FIG. 116, date and time information (strictly speaking,) on which the error motor operation stop state release process (step S311) was performed.
The date and time information controlled by the setting change status or the setting confirmation status) is displayed in the release date and time column.
Further, in the lower left of the error information history screen, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left, and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and the main button 6
It is shown that it can be determined by operating 62.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "error information history" (NO in step S3008), step S30.
It is determined whether or not the hall menu selected in 01 is "monitoring history" (step S30).
10). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "monitoring history" (step S30)
YES in 10), the host control circuit 2100 performs monitoring history processing (step S3).
011). In this monitoring history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S3010), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "warning display setting". (Step S301
2). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "warning display setting" (step S3)
YES in 012), the host control circuit 2100 performs a warning display setting process (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the host control circuit 2100 is the display device 16.
A warning display setting screen (not shown) is displayed in the display area of, and the operator can check and change the warning display setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "warning display setting" (NO in step S3012), step S300.
It is determined whether or not the hall menu selected in 1 is the "notification setting" (step S301).
4). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "notification setting" (step S301)
YES in 4), the host control circuit 2100 performs the notification setting process (step S30).
15). In this notification setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "notification setting" (NO in step S3014), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is in the "power saving mode". (Step S301
6). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "power saving mode" (step S3).
YES in 016), the host control circuit 2100 performs power saving mode processing (step S3017). In this power saving mode processing, the host control circuit 2100 is the display device 16.
A power saving mode screen (not shown) is displayed in the display area of, and the operator can check and change the setting of the power saving mode.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S300.
It is determined whether or not the hall menu selected in 1 is "maintenance" (step S3).
018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S3018), step S300
It is determined whether or not the hall menu selected in 1 is "confirmation of accessory operation" (step S3).
020). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "accessory operation confirmation" (YES in step S3020), the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (step S3021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 displays the accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S3020), step S300.
It is determined whether or not the hall menu selected in 1 is "LCD brightness setting" (step S3).
022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S3022), the host control circuit 2100 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the display device 16. And.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "LCD brightness setting" (NO in step S3022), step S300.
It is determined whether or not the hall menu selected in 1 is the "volume adjustment setting" (step S3).
024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 performs the volume adjustment setting process (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the display device 16, and the operator confirms and changes the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. Make it possible.

Step S3003, Step S3005, Step S3007, Step S3009
, Step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017
, Step S3019, Step S3021, Step S3023, Step S3025
After the processing of and when it is determined that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the “volume adjustment setting” (NO in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 ends the hall menu processing and performs the processing in the hall menu task (FIG. 108). See) step S3
Return to 04.

[10-19. Modes of various devices when changing / confirming settings]
Various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED) when changing or confirming settings
25, the mode of the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) and the like are as described above, but they will be collectively described below for easy understanding.

First, the time when the setting is changed will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the display device 16
, The speaker 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power.
Even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off unless the power is turned on.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and sends a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. Based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been controlled to the setting change state (the setting change state has started). When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 21
In the display control circuit 2300, 00 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 and displays characters such as "setting is being changed". At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" from the speaker 24 by the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and the LED 2 is output by the voice / LED control circuit 2200.
5 is all lit in white. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Furthermore, the main CPU1
01 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated.
However, the set value has not been finalized yet at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Further, in the display area of the display device 16, the hall menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a voice such as "Settings are being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and at the same time,
The LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is only stored in the register until it is confirmed and is not stored in the main RAM 103. However, even if the set value is not confirmed, the updated set value is used. It may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the set value is updated by operating another operating means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do so.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, the host control circuit 2100 displays at least for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) unless the game execution is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received). The hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 by the control circuit 2300.
Is displayed, and a character such as "setting has been changed" is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed.
At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 was "changed in settings. RAM was initialized" by the voice / LED control circuit 2200 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
The voice such as "" is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is fully lit in red by the voice / LED control circuit 2200. Such display in the display area of the display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red are continued as long as some operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. It ends when the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed, but the host control circuit 2100 displays "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the display "The setting has been changed". May be written together.

In this way, even if the setting change state ends, the character display such as "The setting has been changed", the voice output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized.", L
By turning on the entire red color of the ED25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen by an unauthorized third party. It becomes possible. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above are various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25) at the time of setting change.
, Main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) and the like.

Next, the time of checking the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the display device 16
, The speaker 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power.
Even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off unless the power is turned on.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. Host control circuit 2
The 100 is controlled to the setting confirmation state based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 (the setting confirmation state is started).
Judge. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300, and "setting is being confirmed". Is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 is "checking the settings" by the voice / LED control circuit 2200.
The sound such as is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is fully lit in white by the sound / LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power failure recovery command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting confirmation state has been completed based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the game can be executed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen return display process (step S318) based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the host control circuit 2100 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the host control circuit 2100 turns on the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and when the game execution is started, the LED 25 is turned on.
Ends all red lighting. The performance display monitor 334 displays the base value by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, by performing all the red lighting of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen or the like is authorized. It is possible to suppress what is done by a third party who does not have. In addition, at least LED2 is in the setting change state and when the setting change state is completed.
Since the light emitting modes of No. 5 are clearly different, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 has been started for a predetermined time (for example, 3).
If no command is received from the main CPU 101 even after 0 seconds) and it is determined to be abnormal, it is determined that the game is stopped. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 2300 and the voice / LED control circuit 2200 output a display and a voice saying "Please determine the set value", and the voice / LED control circuit 2200.
Therefore, the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) is made to blink in white. This state is the main CP again
It is controlled by the U101 to the setting change state, and continues until the host control circuit 2100 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above are various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25) at the time of setting confirmation.
, Main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) and the like.

[10-20. Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing (see step S303 in FIG. 108) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 for the setting change history, the setting value confirmation history, and the browsing history for which the setting change and confirmation have been performed. Displayed as "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). In the following, before explaining the setting change / confirmation history processing, first, the setting change, the setting confirmation, and the browsing will be described.

In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. In this setting change process, the setting key 328 is pressed while the power is not turned on.
Operate N, press the backup clear switch 330, and turn on the power switch 35.
It starts by doing both operations. When the setting change process is started, the performance display monitor 33
As described above, the set value is displayed in 4. Then, for example, the setting switch 33
By pressing 2, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of "1" to "6" so that the setting key switch signal is turned off when the desired setting value is reached. When the operation is performed, one of the plurality of set values to be used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process is completed.

In order to make it possible to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 performs the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed after executing the setting change processing, and the changed setting value information. It is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed) and the setting value indicating the setting value after the setting change have been performed. The subwork RAM 2 uses the information and the date and time data currently clocked by RTC209, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received, as the setting change history information.
Store in 100a. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later. do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the set value, as described above, the main CP
It is necessary for U101 to execute the setting confirmation process. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated so as to be OFF, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated so as to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned on again. As you did.

Further, in order to enable the display of the setting confirmation history, as described above, the main CPU 101 issues a power failure recovery command as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed after the setting confirmation process is executed, in the host control circuit 2100. Send to. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S319 and step S320, FIG. 114)
In order to execute (see), it is preferable that the set value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed) and the RTC
The date and time data currently clocked by 209, that is, the date and time data for which the power failure recovery command is received, is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the “No. 1” column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later. As shown in the "No. 1" column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed.

The subwork RAM 2100a according to the present embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, for example, the storage of the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is retained. ..

In the present embodiment, browsing means the main button 662 with the "setting change / confirmation history" highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111).
Is pressed to display the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) showing the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the following processing so that the browsing history (browsing history) can be displayed. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S).
YES in 301), the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 (step S301). Then, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the "setting change / confirmation history" (FIG. FIG. See 111). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the host control circuit 2100 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, and reads the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119 described later). ) Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and the operation type information (information indicating that the browsing has been performed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209, that is, the browsing has been performed. It is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in association with the date and time data of the time (when the main button 662 is pressed). This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-mentioned history recording process (step S306, step S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the subwork RAM 2100a when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is in progress.
When the host control circuit 2100 stores the browsing history in the subwork RAM 2100a,
For example, the browsing history is integrated into the already stored setting change / confirmation history information and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later.

Here, the history recording processes of steps S306 and S307 can be summarized as follows. First, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and step S
When the command received in 304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process, the host control circuit 2100 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. When, the host control circuit 210
0 performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the setting. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the host control circuit 2100 Does not perform the browsing history of the setting change history and the browsing history, but only the setting change history. Further, hall menu processing (step S30).
In 3), "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined (N in step S3006).
O) And when the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command, the host control circuit 2100 does not perform the browsing history of the setting confirmation history and the browsing history, but only performs the setting confirmation history. .. Therefore, in the history recording process of step S306 and step S307, "setting change / confirmation" is performed in the hall menu process (step S303) regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

In addition to the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above. When executing step S303),
By making the above browsing record performed, fraudulent monitoring of amusement store clerk can also be performed. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a notch only in the corresponding part of the setting key 328 and is managed by the game machine management manager) is required, and this dedicated key is used. For example, a general clerk who does not have a key cannot browse, but a general clerk who does not have a dedicated key or an unauthorized player performs a backup process to browse the backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, by making it possible for the host control circuit 2100 to record browsing even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed, the security camera corresponding to that time (usually the security camera installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the image of the camera) or the like.

In the history recording process of steps S306 and S307, step S30
Hall menu processing (step S) regardless of whether the command received in step 4 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change processing or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing.
As described above, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in 303) (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the host control circuit 2100 has a hall menu process (step S303).
"Setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in (YES in step S3006).
Moreover, when the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command,
Both the confirmation history and browsing history of the settings are performed, but the hall menu processing (step S303) is performed.
), "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006).
), And when the command received in step S304 is an initialization command,
Of the setting change history and the browsing history, only the setting change history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from being unnecessarily increased and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not in the memory of the game machine manager, but the setting confirmation history can be checked. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings.
Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it was browsed, and when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if it is browsed (at least the setting value information is browsed). I tried to record it. This is because it is considered that the person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. That is, in the same time zone, if there is no browsing history and only the setting confirmation history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if the number of history of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large, it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud. .. Regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step). YES in S3006), the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are both recorded, and the setting confirmation process is executed when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When the operation type information indicates that the setting has been changed, the browsing history may also be displayed, and when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

Further, the history recording process of step S306 and step S307 was browsed a plurality of times from the start of the hall menu display process of step S302 to the execution of the game screen return display process of step S317. Even so, the browsing record is executed in step S306 or step S3 when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed.
It is executed only once in 07. For example, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111) (YE in step S3046).
S), the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) is displayed, but when "Back" is selected and decided on this setting change / confirmation history screen, the hall menu screen is returned again.
Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, steps S302 to S
Even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed multiple times during 317, the browsing record is only once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the browsing record performed between steps S302 to S317 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, confirms settings, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase browsing records to increase the number of histories and make it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an act is performed, even if the setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing is performed a plurality of times between steps S301 and S314, these histories are recorded only once and the power supply is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily by preventing the history from being recorded unless the is turned off and then turned on again.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hall menu redisplay process (step S312) is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the hall menu redisplay process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The screen return process (step S317) is executed, for example.
Even after the setting change process or setting confirmation process is completed by turning off the setting key 328, if the specifications are such that the hall menu screen is displayed when the setting key 328 is turned on again, the game is played. After returning to the screen, the hall menu screen can be displayed again. In this case, every time the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen displayed again, or the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328 is repeatedly executed, the user browses the screen. Even if there is, it is preferable to record the browsing once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. ing. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player, but the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine administrator.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, FIG. 11) in which the setting value can be confirmed can be confirmed.
9) is stored as a browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 124 described later) is stored as a browsing history. It may be configured to be used.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117, 118 and 119 to 123, the host control circuit 21
The setting change / confirmation history processing executed by 00 and the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed will be described in comparison with each other.

Note that FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 118 is an example of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 117.
FIG. 119 shows an initial screen (setting change / confirmation history screen) displayed in the display area of the display device 16.
It is a figure which shows an example of the screen when moving to the setting change / confirmation history screen). FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example when "Clear" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 123 shows the setting change / confirmation history screen.
It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen which each history data was cleared.

When "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 115) (YES in step S3006 in FIG. 115), the host control circuit 2100 performs setting change / confirmation history screen display processing (step S3051). ). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. "Back" is highlighted on the initial screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen.

The setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (for example, FIG. 119).
(See) has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, a first selection area 1660a, and a second selection area 1660b. In FIG. 119, the first selection area 1
"Page" is displayed in 660a, and "Clear" and "Clear" are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.
An example is shown in which "Back" is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are associated with each other and displayed in a list in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640. In the date and time column, the date and time when the setting was changed, confirmed, or browsed is displayed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and "confirmation" is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. .. Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

The host control circuit 2100 has a setting change / confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051).
Is executed, and then the timekeeping process is executed (step S3052). This timekeeping process is a process for starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100. Here, the timer is started to be timed after the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 119). )
Is displayed), and the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated in step S3053. If the select button 664 is not operated (step S30)
NO in 53), the process proceeds to step S3071 described later, and it is determined whether or not "return" is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above. Therefore, if the select button 664 is not operated and the main button 662 is pressed, "Back" is displayed.
"Return" is decided.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S30).
54). For example, if the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which "Back" is highlighted, the highlight display moves from "Back" to "Page" (see FIG. 119). See FIG. 120).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3054).
After that, the timekeeping process is executed (step S3055). This timekeeping process is performed in step S30.
This is a process of clearing the timer timing started in 52 and starting the timer timing built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and starting the time again is to highlight the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen (step S305).
4) This is so that the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the processing is performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3056 whether or not it is determined to be "Page". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Page" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 displays the host control circuit 2100. It is determined that it is determined to be "Page".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "Page" has been determined (step S30).
YES in 56), the page update screen display process is executed (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the page update screen on this setting change / confirmation history screen, the left and right select buttons 6 are on the left and right of the notation of "Page".
An image imitating 64c and 664d, and a "next page" and a "previous page" are displayed. As a result, the operator understands that when the left select button 664c is operated, the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page, and when the right select button 664d is operated, the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the next page. can do. In addition, 1 of the setting change / confirmation history screen
If you operate the left select button 664c while the page is displayed, the final page will be displayed, and if you operate the right select button 664d while the final page is displayed, the first page will be displayed in a circular display. , Convenience can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "Page" (NO in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S3065 described later, and determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" on the setting change / confirmation history screen. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update screen display process (step S3057), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3058). This timekeeping process is performed in step S305.
This is a process of clearing the timer timing started in step 5 and starting the timer timing built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer's timekeeping and starting the timekeeping again is
After the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed), a predetermined time (for example, 3)
When no processing is performed within (0 seconds), the hall menu screen (for example, FIG. 11)
This is so that (see 0) is displayed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3059 whether or not the page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process proceeds to step S3062 described later.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the page update operation has been performed (step S30).
YES in 59), page update processing is executed (step S3060). Display device 1
When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of 6, the host control circuit 2
100 determines that the page update process has been performed, and updates and displays the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 on the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page. The setting change / confirmation history screen when the setting change / confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is omitted.

In the present embodiment, in the host control circuit 2100, when the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Although the page update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b, "No. 1" in the setting change / confirmation history screen
One of "No. 5" may be selected, and the page update process may be performed when the lower select button 664b is operated and it is determined that the line is the last line.
The same applies to the page update process in the modified example of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update process (step S3060), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3061). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3058 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and starting the clock again is performed after the page update process (step S3060) is executed (setting change on the next page or the previous page).
This is to display the hall menu screen (see FIG. 110, for example) when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the confirmation history screen is displayed. ..

The host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process of step S3061 and then steps S.
Returning to 3059, it is determined whether or not the page refresh operation has been performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated in step S3062. If the select button 664 is not operated (step S30)
NO in 62), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, step S307
The reason for moving to step S3072 instead of 1 is that "Back" is not highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Because.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S30).
63). For example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 121), the lower select button 6
When 64b is operated, the highlight display moves from "Page" to "Clear" (FIG. 12).
2).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063).
After that, the timekeeping process is executed (step S3064). This timekeeping process is performed in step S30.
This is a process of clearing the timer timing started in 61 and starting the timer timing built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is that no processing was performed within the specified time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is sometimes displayed.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process of step S3064, and then steps S.
It moves to 3065 and determines whether or not it is decided to be "clear". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 displays the host control circuit 2100. It is determined that it is determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is determined to be "clear" (step S306).
YES in 5), execute the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S30).
66). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 123). When the setting change / confirmation history data clear process in step S3065 is executed, the item of "return" is highlighted.

In the above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a are deleted, but not necessarily all. The data is not limited to erasing, and only a part of the data may be erased. As a mode for erasing a part of the data, for example, No. 122 in FIG. 122. 1 to No. A mode in which the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5 are deleted, a mode in which the setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, and a plurality of operation types (setting change). , Setting confirmation, browsing), out of the mode for deleting the date and time (time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, and the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information. A mode of erasing only specific information (for example, set value information) can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clear process is executed only when the correct password is entered. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent accidentally clearing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data. Further, for example, a person who performs a setting change process or browsing for the purpose of fraud may delete the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data in order to hide his / her fraud.
Therefore, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

The host control circuit 2100 has a setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S306).
When 6) is executed, the timekeeping process is executed (step S3067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timekeeping of the timer is cleared and the timekeeping is started again after the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed (setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 is displayed for each history data. This is so that the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all are erased.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3068 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (step S30)
NO in 68), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, step S307
Moving to step S3071 instead of step 2, on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared, "Back" is highlighted (selected) unless the select button 664 is operated.
Because it has been done. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S30).
69).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069).
After that, the timekeeping process is executed (step S3070). This timekeeping process is performed in step S30.
This is a process of clearing the timer timing started in 67 and starting the timer timing built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and starting the time again is to highlight the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen (step S306).
9) This is so that the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the processing is performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3071 whether or not it is determined to "return". On the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, "
When the operator presses the main button 662 while "return" is selected (highlighted state), the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (step S3071).
YES), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. In this hall menu screen display process, the initial screen of the hall menu screen (FIG. 110) is used in the display area of the display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.
Refer to).

If "return" is not determined in step S3071 (step S3071).
NO), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S3073, exits the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and halls. The initial screen of the menu screen (see FIG. 110) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the "return" item, if the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the setting change / confirmation history screen is finished and the initial screen of the hall menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (step S3072).
NO), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3053 and returns to step S3.
The processing after 053 is continued.

In this way, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display device 16 during setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation being performed. , The hall menu screen is configured to be displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the host control circuit 2100 controls so that the display of the hall menu screen continues without ending the hall menu screen as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed even if there is no operation. do. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

The predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 (Y in step S3072).
The process of moving to step S3073 when it is determined to be ES) is the above-mentioned step S303 (
It is a process in the hall menu processing (that is, setting is being changed or setting is being confirmed) in FIGS. 108 and 114, and the hall menu processing (that is, setting change or setting confirmation is being completed) in step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) is completed. Later), different processes are executed (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing in step S313 (step S).
When a predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 in the hall menu process of 313 (YES in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S317 (see FIGS. 108 and 114), and the setting change / confirmation history The screen display is terminated and the game screen return display process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S317).
Step S318) is executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again. You will not be able to.

Further, regarding the process of returning to step S3053 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S3072), the hall menu process (that is, setting) of the above-mentioned step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) is also performed. It is a process during change (during change or setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) (not shown). Specifically, even if the non-operation period does not reach the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process of step S313 (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the fact that a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received is satisfied,
Game screen return processing (step S317) and hall menu display prohibition processing (step S)
318) is executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that has been redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the non-operation time has not reached the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the above-mentioned predetermined end condition Unless is satisfied, step S3053 ~
The process of step S3072 will be repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator has a grace period for viewing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and the predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds), the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends and the game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S318) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) cannot easily browse confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, and it is possible to ensure security.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value are set regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing). A list screen showing all the information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed is displayed.
), And the second information (for example,) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed.
No. 119 in FIG. 3, No. 4) and the third information (for example, No. 2 and No. 5 in FIG. 119) in which the time information and the set value information at the time of browsing are displayed are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, the gaming machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to display the specific operation type information. Therefore, a screen in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (see, for example, FIG. 119), the above-mentioned first information, the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned third information Of these, it is preferable to configure the narrowing down screen narrowed down to only specific information so that it can be selectively displayed in the display area of the display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient in terms of business because it is possible to know not only fraudulent detection but also information such as how many days the business has been performed with the set value. Since the above narrowing screen can be displayed by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information) may be displayed.

[10-21. Other examples of display screens displayed in setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. However, the host control circuit 2
Since the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by 100 is the same as in FIGS. 117 and 118, in another example, the screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 will be described, and the host control circuit 2100 will be used to describe the screen. The description of the setting change / confirmation history processing to be executed is omitted.

FIG. 124 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 125 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when "setting display" is selected. FIG. 126 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when a set value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 12
7 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16.
It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 and showing an example of the page update screen on which the page can be updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 124, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, but the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed. In addition, the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed is displayed in the date / time column where the time information is displayed, and the operation type (setting change, setting change,) is displayed in the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed. Setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed.

Further, on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, in addition to "clear" and "return", "setting display" is also displayed in the second selection area 1690b. In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, "Back" is selected and displayed (highlighted). In other examples as well
By operating the select button 664, the highlighted item can be selected.

When the select button 664 is operated to select "setting display", "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 125). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting display" is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information is displayed. The setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen) is displayed in which the time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. See 126).
As described above, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and deciding "setting display", it is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The new setting values will be displayed in a list. When the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. 126, " Back is highlighted.

Setting change / confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed (Fig. 12)
6), when the select button 664 is operated and "Page" is selected, "Pa" is selected.
"ge" is highlighted (see FIG. 127). Then, the host control circuit 21 indicates that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted).
When 00 is detected, the page update process is executed by the host control circuit 2100. When this page update process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 128) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this page update screen, the next page or the previous page can be updated by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 124) of the setting change / confirmation history screen where the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. However, the page update process is executed by the host control circuit 2100. However, when this page update process is executed, the page update screen on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, although the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. Is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the time information and operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information is not displayed. On the setting change / confirmation history screen,
It may be configured so that the page update process cannot be executed.

In this other example, for example, as shown in FIG. 124, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 126, the time information and the operation type information are used. And the screen in which the setting value information is displayed in a list can be selectively displayed, but the screen in FIG. 124 is one or two of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

In addition, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by those who meet specific conditions (for example, those who have entered an appropriate password). This may be done, but this will be described later.

FIG. 129 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which a setting value can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure up to. As shown in FIG. 129, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation performed regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed, but the setting is not limited to this. It may be an operation performed when executing at least one of the change process and the setting confirmation process. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Setting change / confirmation history information including setting change / confirmation history screen preview Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third step, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main button 662 is displayed in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 111) displayed in the second step. When pressed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this setting change / confirmation history screen, date / time data, an operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and a setting value are associated with each other.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority)
By looking at the setting change / confirmation history on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see Fig. 119) displayed through the first to third steps above, you can change the setting of the setting value that regulates the payout rate and change the setting. You will be able to check at a glance each history of confirmation, setting change, and confirmation browsing and the corresponding setting value. In addition, the person who has the authority is a person who has been given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Setting switch 332, which is a setting means that enables
And a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and information written even in a non-energized state. Subwork RAM that functions as a backup memory that can store data
The main CPU 101 includes a 2100a and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmission means, and the host control circuit 2100 by the data reception means. When the received data is setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change / confirmation history information, and the subwork R
It has a setting display function that displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data stored in AM203 on the display device 16, and the main button 662 was operated while the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data were displayed. In this case, the subwork RAM 2100a has a configuration for displaying the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change / confirmation history information, so that the main setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses RTC2 for date and time data when the set value is received.
It may be configured to acquire from 09 and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. It is possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as changing the set value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed.
It is possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as checking the set value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history,
The browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value, and setting value in the setting change / confirmation history information
When the date and time data is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation is associated with the setting value and the date and time data, respectively, so that each history related to the setting value can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. It includes a main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100 which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, and the control unit has set values (for example, settings 1 to 6).
) Is a setting means that enables change or confirmation of the setting switch 332 and the host control circuit 2.
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to 100 is provided, and the display control unit can store and hold the reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and the written information even in a non-energized state. It is equipped with a subwork RAM 2100a and an RTC209 that clocks the date and time.
The main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmission means, and the host control circuit 2100 transmits the setting change or setting confirmation when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation. Stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change / confirmation history information, and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16. When the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16, the date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is stored in the display device 16. Has a configuration to display.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachi-slot machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 is acquired from the RTC209, and the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other.
It is possible to specify the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed, and it is possible to specify the fraud when the fraud such as changing the set value is performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history,
The browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value, and setting value in the setting change / confirmation history information
When the date and time data is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[10-22. Maintenance process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by the host control circuit 2100 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed. Will be explained in comparison. In addition, FIG. 130
Is a flowchart showing an example of maintenance processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 132 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the host control circuit 2100 displays the maintenance screen (FIG. 131).
And FIG. 132) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. In this maintenance process, devices (for example, various sensors, various operating objects, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100, such as an effect button switch 621, an effect group 1000, and other effect objects, are subject to maintenance processing. Then, the operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation status display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the substantially center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132). .. In this operation status display table, for example, a name column in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed and serial numbers (1 to 28) assigned to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed.
It has a number string in which is displayed and an operation status column indicating the operation status of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operation status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, if the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is being displayed, the host control circuit 21
00 changes the display of the operation status column of the effect button 1 from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above "input from each device" is based on the detection of an input port or the like by the host control circuit 2100. Further, each of the effectable objects has an accessory detection sensor group 1002 (see FIG. 9) for detecting that the object is present at least in the normal position (for example, the initial position), and when the sensor for detecting the normal position is ON. Display OF
As F, it is assumed that the display is turned on when the accessory detection sensor group 1002 for detecting the normal position is OFF, that is, when the effecting accessory moves.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, the main button 662 and the upper select button 664a
And the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time to return (redisplay) to the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hall menu screen, and further below, the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. The corresponding images are displayed respectively. FIG. 13
In 2, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 130), the host control circuit 2100 first acquires subdevice input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is shown in FIG.
It is the detection result of the operating state of various devices to which the serial numbers 21 to 28 of the operation state display table shown in 2 are attached. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub-input state information editing process for reading out the sub-input state information in the acquired sub-device input information (step S3082).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a maintenance screen display process for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16 based on the sub-input status information read in step S3082 (step). S3083). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen and the update of the display (for example, change from "OFF" display to "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (step S3084).
). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (YES in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 115). The process returns to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 108).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines, one device may have a plurality of functions. For example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect button 62 is provided with a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the lottery result of a special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 executes maintenance on the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" of the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 causes the effect button 62 to project upward and move.
Perform maintenance on the production function. If the result of the maintenance operation is a normal determination, the host control circuit 2100 executes the maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes the maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display. ). When the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the "effect button 2" is determined to be normal, for example, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. 132. If so, the main button 662 and the upper select button 6
When the 64a and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time and the maintenance mode is terminated, the host control circuit 2100 controls to return to the normal state (the state before protruding upward).

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines, there are some pachinko machines and pachislot machines that are provided with a plurality of effecting objects having different driving means. Maintenance may be executed, a plurality of effectors having different drive means may be operated at different timings to perform maintenance, or they may be independently operated to perform maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a production accessory 1 to a production accessory 3 having different drive means, for example, when the “directing accessory 1 + 2” of the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 sets the host control circuit 2100. The production accessory 1 and the production accessory 2 are operated at the same time to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the serial number 17 “effect 1 → 2” shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 first operates the effect 1 and then operates the effect 2. Let me perform maintenance. Further, for example, FIG.
When the "directing accessory 1" of the serial number 11 shown in 2 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 210
0 indicates that the effector 1 is operated independently to perform maintenance. In addition, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. For example, the "effect 1 + 3" of the serial number 15 in FIG. (The operation of the main button 662 is not enabled). In FIG. 132, the serial number 15 “directing accessory 1 + 3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However,
For example, if effect 1 and effect 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable.
If there is no interference when the effects are operated at different timings (for example, when the effect 1 is operated first and then the effect 3 is operated), for example, the serial number 18 "effect" shown in FIG. 132 is shown. It is preferable to be able to select and determine "Characteristics 1 → 3". In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of production objects by a plurality of objects, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently, and at the same time when they interfere with each other when they are operated at the same time. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 132, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout collateral ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachislot settlement button, and a pachislot settlement button are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables games by circulating the game balls, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game balls is also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100 have been described as targets for maintenance processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices are connected to the main CPU 101. Devices (for example, power switch 35, first start port switch 421, second start port switch 441, etc.) may be subject to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, it is simulated between the ball lending machine and the pachinko gaming machine (in the case of CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card. Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

[10-23. Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135.

The mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of linking the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the gaming result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

As the predetermined conditions, for example, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit without the operation of the condition device, or a specific effect is executed.
Further, as a function of customizing a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state may be changed to a special song, or the display device 16 may be used. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed in.

When using the mobile terminal linkage function, first, the guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. For example, if a pressing operation is performed on the main button 662 while the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is not displayed in a variable manner,
The guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)", the characters "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 133, the items of the guide menu include "start uni-memo", "big hit symbol / number of rounds", "model site", and "return to game". In the initial guide image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. Then, among the items of these plurality of guide menus, the items to be highlighted are selected from the up and down select buttons 664a and 664.
It can be selected by operating b. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 133, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "Start Unimemo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When "Big hit symbol / number of rounds" is selected, the big hit symbol / number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, the registration code for the model site is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the display device 16, the image for effect displayed when the game is played, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 is used. Also, the demo video that is displayed when the prize is not won for the specified period is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the display device 16 displays a video for directing to be displayed when playing a game and the above demo video. Will be done.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. In the initial image of Unimemo, the characters "Unimemo", the characters "Let's customize your favorite character", and the Unimemo menu are displayed. Items in the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to game", and "return". In the initial image of Unimemo, "Enter password" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of Unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 134, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "password input" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when "password input" is selected and determined, the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 135).

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The password display image is the text "Please enter the password" and
Includes password entry menu.

The password entry menu displays multiple password entry menu items. The items of the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers from "0" to "9", and ""
Includes the alphabets "A" to "F", "return to the game", and "return". In the password display image, the highlighted item from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and the main button 6 can be selected.
When 62 is operated, the highlighted number or alphabet is determined.
The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected and determined from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, in the password input menu, "
When "Delete" is selected, each character from the last entered character is deleted from the password display image.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the display device 16 may have an effect image to be displayed when the game is played, the firing handle 32 may not be operated for a predetermined period, or the first A demo image displayed when no prize is won for a predetermined period is displayed in either the starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

[10-24. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Hereinafter, modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described.
[10-24-1. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 1]
First, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141, with respect to the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing.
A modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history will be described.

The setting change / confirmation history processing in the first modification is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, except that it has an authentication function for viewing the setting values. .. In the following, the setting changes described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.
The differences from the confirmation history processing will be described in detail. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 1, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the following description, the description of the timekeeping process will be omitted.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. This setting change / confirmation history process can be performed by selecting the "Hall menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 115".
It is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted).

When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the host control circuit 2100 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication process will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the authentication process, the host control circuit 2100 first puts a password in the display area of the display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, for example. Display the request password request screen further (
Step S3101). FIG. 138 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows the example. FIG. 139 shows
In the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100,
This is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In this modification 1, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). The setting change / confirmation history screen. May be displayed so that the password request screen is displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request is made without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the host control circuit 2100 executes the password input process (step S3102) and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the input password is appropriate, and if the input password is appropriate (YES in step S3103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the display device 1
In the display area of 6, for example, the screen shown in FIG. 140 is displayed. Here, FIG. 140 is shown.
In the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100,
It is a figure which shows the example of the screen which is displayed in the display area of a display device 16 when the entered password is inappropriate.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication process of step S3100 and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is appropriate (YES in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S3110). , Step S31
Move on to 20. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is not OK (step S3110).
NO), end the setting change / confirmation history processing.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the entered password is appropriate when, for example, the main button 662 is pressed after the password is entered on the password request screen. The entered password is inappropriate, or the main button 66 without entering the password
When 2 is pressed, the authentication NG process in step S3103 described above is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

The host control circuit 2100 performs setting change / confirmation history screen display processing in step S3120. At this time, in the display area of the display device 16, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119) is displayed in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the set value are shown in association with each other.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing in step S3120, the host control circuit 2100
Determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3130). When it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process proceeds to step S3150.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" in step S3150. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 122) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that it is determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is determined to be "clear" (step S315).
YES in 0), and the setting change / confirmation history data clear process is executed (step S318).
0), the process proceeds to step S3180. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clear process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (for example, FIG. 12).
3). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3150)
), The process proceeds to step S3170.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3170 whether or not it is determined to "return". Setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (for example,
When the operator presses the main button 662 while "return" is selected (highlighted state) in (see FIG. 119), the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (step S3170).
YES), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3180), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not decided to "return" (step S317)
NO in 0), the process proceeds to step S3130, and the process of transitioning to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 141 shows a setting change / setting change that allows the setting value to be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the confirmation history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 141, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Setting change / confirmation history information including setting change / confirmation history screen preview Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of a password (FIG. 138, FIG. 1).
39), the suitability of the entered password is determined.

As a fourth step, if the password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 126) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority)
By looking at the setting change / confirmation history on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see Fig. 119) displayed through the first to fourth steps above, you can change the setting of the setting value that regulates the payout rate and change the setting. You will be able to check at a glance each history of confirmation, setting change, and confirmation browsing and the corresponding setting value. In addition, the person who has the authority is a person who has been given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Setting switch 332, which is a setting means that enables
And a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and information written even in a non-energized state. Subwork RAM that functions as a backup memory that can store data
The main CPU 101 includes a 2100a and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmission means, and the host control circuit 2100 by the data reception means. When the received data is setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change / confirmation history information, and the subwork R
It has a setting display function that displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data stored in AM203 on the display device 16, and the main button 662 was operated while the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data were displayed. In this case, the subwork RAM 2100a has a configuration for displaying the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change / confirmation history information, so that the main setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses RTC2 for date and time data when the set value is received.
It may be configured to acquire from 09 and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. It is possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as changing the set value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed.
It is possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as checking the set value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history,
The browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value, and setting value in the setting change / confirmation history information
When the date and time data is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation is associated with the setting value and the date and time data, respectively, so that each history related to the setting value can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. It includes a main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100 which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, and the control unit has set values (for example, settings 1 to 6).
) Is a setting means that enables change or confirmation of the setting switch 332 and the host control circuit 2.
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to 100 is provided, and the display control unit can store and hold the reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and the written information even in a non-energized state. It is equipped with a subwork RAM 2100a and an RTC209 that clocks the date and time.
The main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmission means, and the host control circuit 2100 transmits the setting change or setting confirmation when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation. Stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change / confirmation history information, and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16. When the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16, the date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is stored in the display device 16. Has a configuration to display.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachi-slot machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 is acquired from the RTC209, and the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other.
It is possible to specify the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed, and it is possible to specify the fraud when the fraud such as changing the set value is performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history,
The browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value, and setting value in the setting change / confirmation history information
When the date and time data is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[10-24-2. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 2]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146, reference is made to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process.
A modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history will be described.

The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following,
In particular, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “loud”. , "Medium", and "Small" are switched to one of the three volume positions, and the switching operation is configured to switch to multiple volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is set in advance. When it matches the order, it authenticates as a user with administrator authority. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning the jog dial, and the volume may be determined by pressing the jog dial.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing has an authentication processing function for performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the order of changing the volume position. In the second modification, for example, a control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 143) in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. be. The volume switch 108 is arranged in, for example, the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and a slide operation for setting an initial setting value is possible. For example, the volume switch 108 has a volume of "low", "medium", and so on.
It is switched to any of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to "large", and a plurality of volume positions 1 are operated in a predetermined operation order. It is designed to be sequentially switched to 2, 3 and so on. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, set the volume switch 108 to "Large"->"Medium"->"
It can be set by sliding it from "Small" to "Medium". That is, the host control circuit 2
Reference numeral 100 constitutes a position detection unit for detecting volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user with administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. Operate with a pattern and store the multiple volume positions and operation order in the memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 108 is operated with a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set value.

As the authentication operation pattern, for example, the volume position 2 in FIG. 142 (volume “volume”
An operation pattern that represents a position change from volume position 1 (volume "low") or an operation pattern that represents a position change from volume position 2 to volume position 3 (volume "loud") is held in advance. Can be kept.

As a result, the host control circuit 2100 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and has management authority depending on whether or not the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern. It is possible to determine whether or not it is from a person.

In this way, in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108
Functions as an operation unit for inputting a volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. Volume switch 10 in variant 2 of this setting change / confirmation history processing
Reference numeral 8 is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. This authentication process is shown in FIG. 115.
"Setting change / confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 110) displayed in step S3006 (YES in step S3006), and "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 in the state (see FIG. 111).

When this authentication process is started, the host control circuit 2100 displays a screen prompting the input of the volume password in the display area of the display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed (step S3201). To execute.

FIG. 144 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows the example. FIG. 145 shows the host control circuit 210.
It is an example of the volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by 0. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, in the volume password request display process of step S3201 of FIG. 143, the host control circuit 2100 inputs, for example, "* Operate the volume switch to input the password" in the display area of the display device 16. A message such as "The setting value will be displayed after entering the password." Is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information.

In this modification 2, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). The setting change / confirmation history screen. May be displayed and the volume password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the host control circuit 2100 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the host control circuit 2100 extracts the operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and sets the authentication operation pattern in advance. And it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed depending on whether or not they match (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes after step S3120 in FIG. 136.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (step S3203).
NO), the host control circuit 2100 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying in the display area of the display device 16 that the authentication is NG (step S3204). As a result, the host control circuit 2100 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of step S3110 in FIG. 136. In the above authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In addition, in FIG. 142, an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be any of at least three or more. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the host control circuit 2100 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and subwork). The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be displayed on condition that the operation order is matched with the predetermined operation order stored in the RAM 2100a in advance.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100.
As shown in FIG. 146, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, a hole is formed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Setting change / confirmation history information including setting change / confirmation history screen preview Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the volume password (FIG. 1).
44, see FIG. 145), the input volume password is taken in, and the suitability of the taken-in volume password is judged. The suitability of the volume password is determined by collating the imported volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password).
When both are matched and authentication is OK, it is determined that the volume password is appropriate.

As a fourth step, if the volume password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 126) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention has a display device 16 for displaying various images and a main button 6 which is at least an operation unit for receiving operations of the player.
62, a select button 664, a non-game operation unit that the player does not operate, a main CPU 101 that controls the game, and a host that controls the display of the display device 16. A control circuit 2100 is provided, and the control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6), and a data transmission means that transmits various data to the display control unit. The display control unit includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. In preparation, main CPU 101
Host control circuit 2100 for setting change or setting confirmation and setting value by data transmission means
When the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed, the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting, and changes the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 to the subwork RAM 2100a. -Setting change stored as confirmation history information and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a-It has a setting display function to display the confirmation history information on the display device 16, provided that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Subwork R
It has a configuration for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the AM2100a.

With this configuration, the sub-work RA is provided on the condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order.
The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the M2100a can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or you will be able to determine whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the display device 16 It may be configured to display the browsing history in.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be configured to be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, authentication can be performed in an operation order known only to an authorized person, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. This operation order is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the host control circuit 2100 sets each volume position of the operation switch. Further equipped with a detectable position detection function, the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the order of the acquired volume position information matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance. May be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a under the condition of.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance to identify the authorized one. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only those who have the authority regarding the set value in the hall can display the setting change / confirmation history information. Although the configuration has been described, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, the input unit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. It may be configured to authenticate using the entered password.

[10-24-3. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 3]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 154, reference to FIG. 147 to FIG. 154 for the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing.
A modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history will be described.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game system 210 according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. The gaming system 210 includes a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged in the network 230. As will be described later, the gaming system 210 cooperates with the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 to perform authentication processing related to setting change / confirmation history information confirmation.

In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the display device 16A (see FIG. 150). Specifically, the setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content as displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, and includes the setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generation means for generating a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 has the functions of the display unit and the operation unit, and is composed of a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a two-dimensional code 161 displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.
It is a functional unit for reading (imaging) a etc. (see FIG. 150). The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute the operation display unit and the image pickup means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), RAM, a communication circuit, etc., and the CPU is, for example, a storage device or R.
It controls various operations according to the control program stored in AM. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL, and inputs the password to the operation display unit 222 (the figure to be described later). Input screen display control unit that displays 153), the input password entered on the password input screen is transmitted to the server device 240 based on the above URL, and the server device 24
Authentication result acquisition unit that acquires the authentication result notified from 0, if the acquired authentication result is correct
It has a history information display control unit that displays setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a mode including a set value. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit operate according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like.
This is a function that can be realized by U. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the components of the control unit 221 according to the present invention, are the extraction means, the input screen display control means, and the authentication result, respectively, in the present invention. The acquisition means and the history information display control means are configured.

The server device 240 has a function of managing a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the above URL, which is realized by a computer, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 that has accessed the above URL, and has a preset password. It is equipped with an authentication service function that determines whether or not the password is correct and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constituting the gaming system 210 according to the modification 3. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by "setting change / confirmation" from among a plurality of hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 109) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It is started on condition that "confirmation history" is selected and determined, and the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted (see, for example, FIG. 111) on the hall menu screen.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110). Timekeeping process (step S3 in FIG. 117) to display
(Refer to 052 etc.) was explained. Also in this modification 3, FIGS. 117 and 11
Even if the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to 8, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen is displayed. However, in the description in this modification 3, the description of the timekeeping process is omitted.

When this setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 150) is performed (step S3301). Next, the host control circuit 2100 is set to step S33.
A two-dimensional code display process is executed in which the setting change / confirmation history information read in 01 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a are displayed in the display area of the display device 16A, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 150 (step S3302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the host control circuit 21
00 is a data clear request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664.
Moves to a state where it is possible to accept cursor movement (page break) requests and processing return requests. The main button 662 is a button for making a processing return request. Select button 664
Is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Also, the main button 66
By operating 2 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processes of steps S3303 to S3305. In addition, in FIG. 148, step S shown in FIG. 117
Although the processes of 3056 to S3064 are omitted, in order to perform these processes, the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 117 are added between steps S3302 and S3303 of FIG. 148. It will be.

In FIG. 148, after the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear” in step S3303.
When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 150, for example) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to be "clear" (step S330).
YES in 3), and execute the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S330).
4), the process proceeds to step S3306. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 123). On the other hand, if it is not decided to be "clear" (step S)
NO in 3303), the process proceeds to step S3305.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3305 whether or not it is determined to "return". Setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (for example,
When the operator presses the main button 662 while "return" is selected (highlighted state) in (see FIG. 150), the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (step S3305).
YES), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not decided to "return" (step S330)
NO in 5), the process proceeds to step S3303, and the processing after step S3303 is continued.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the host control circuit 2100 is determined to be "clear" (YES in step S3303), the two-dimensional code 161a (FIG. 15).
You may also clear the setting change / confirmation history information displayed together with (see 0).
In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This process is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the display device 16A (for example, a liquid crystal display device) of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing and displays the image data on the display operation unit 222 based on the image data, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores them in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. Execution of the two-dimensional code acquisition process to be retained (step S340)
2). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 153), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display process in step S3403, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220
In cooperation with the server device 240, the control unit 221 of the above performs password authentication processing through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been input to the password display field 222c (see FIG. 153) (step S3404), and from the numeric keypad 222b. Performs the process of accepting the input of the password. Here, when the password is entered (YE in step S3404)
S), the control unit 221 transmits the entered password to the server device 240.

In the server device 240, the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is collated with the registered password registered in advance, and authentication is OK or authentication N depending on whether the two match.
Determine if it is G. The server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in this embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. in short,
The server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password received in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. Judges whether the password is correct or not (
Step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is not correct (NO in step S3405).
), The control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is the authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 (step S3410), and then ends the process. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (YE in step S3405).
S), the control unit 221 performs a setting change / confirmation history display process for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in step S3402 on the display operation unit 222 (step S3).
406). In this setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 221 performs the above step S.
The setting change / confirmation history information held in 3402 is embedded (arranged) according to the preset display format, and the setting change / confirmation history information is created based on this display information. The process of displaying on the display operation unit 222 (see FIG. 154) is performed.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to the modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the host control circuit 2100 has a setting change / confirmation history in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. 148. The setting change / confirmation history screen including the information and the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed. Two-dimensional code 1 displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen
As described above, 61a includes the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service.

In the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 148) in step S3302, the two-dimensional code 1
When displaying 61a, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the authentication service in the display area of the display device 16A, for example, "* Please read the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal to access the authentication service." It may be configured to display a prompting message.

FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the present embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is the above S1101.
In the two-dimensional code reading display processing of the above, the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 152 is displayed on the display operation unit 222.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the modification 3. In the password input display process (see FIG. 149) in step S3403, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL, and FIG. 1
The password input screen shown in 53 is displayed on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 153, "0" to "9", "*", and "#" are displayed on the password input screen.
, A password display field 222c displaying a password input by the numeric keypad 222b, and a message field 222d are displayed. In the message field 222d, a message prompting the user to enter the password is displayed, for example, "* Please enter the password. The set value will be displayed after entering the password." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the numeric keypad 2 is displayed on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 153.
It is possible to display the password converted into the hidden character "*" in the password display field 222c in which the password is entered by operating 22b.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the modification 3. As shown in FIG. 154, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102, for example, equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 154, the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the above-mentioned display format, the above-mentioned display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 154, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supports. As a result, the control unit 221 is in the process of setting change / confirmation history in FIG. 149, S1.
After the setting change / confirmation history display process in 107, it is possible to accept the page update request based on the operation of the enter button 222e and select button 222f displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information. Move to the state.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3407). To determine whether or not the page update operation has been performed, when it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page is determined. The update process is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the page refresh operation is performed (that is, the select button 222f is performed).
Is operated and the page is updated to continue scrolling the page (as long as it is determined that the last line has been reached) (step S3408).

When the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, the operation of the select button 222f is stopped, and the enter button 222e
If it is determined that is not pressed, the process proceeds to step S3409. This step S3409
When it is determined that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071),
The control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the gaming system 210 according to this embodiment, the setting is changed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A side.
The confirmation history information is converted into a two-dimensional code as it is as so-called raw data and displayed in the display area of the display device 16A (see steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 148), and the pachinko gaming machine 1A is displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 side. A process is performed in which the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the display device 16A is photographed and the setting change / confirmation history information is returned to the raw data (see steps S3401 and S3402 in FIG. 149).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped as standard with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220
A dedicated application is installed in the machine, and this dedicated application makes it possible to display in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine 1A side.

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it should be viewed in the same display format as the pachinko machine 1A side. It is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only an authorized person can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Can be secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, but the above data is as shown in FIG. 154 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Is displayed in. Therefore, if you do not have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string that reads the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and can be acquired only by an authorized person.

In the present embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Password from server device 240 Mobile wireless communication terminal 22
0 may judge whether the entered password is correct or not by judging the match between the entered password and the password received from the server device 240, and if it is desired to further secure the confidentiality. Setting change / confirmation history on the pachinko game machine 1A side After encrypting the setting change / confirmation history information, a two-dimensional code is generated and displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history corresponding to the above encryption is used for the dedicated application installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. It may be configured to add an information decryption function.

Next, the procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 151.

As shown in FIG. 151, as the first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is executed by the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. The hall menu screen is displayed when it is done. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is set to "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111).
"Setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted, and only the date / time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed. Setting change / setting change including confirmation history information. Display the preview screen (see FIG. 111) of the confirmation history screen (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is mainly in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 111) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the subwork RAM 2100a is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (FIG. 150). reference).

As a fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 152). After shooting the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220
Extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and the password is entered from the password input screen (see FIG. 153) provided by this dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the gaming system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 210 or each pachinko gaming machine 1A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 is the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.
Accepts the password entered from and collates it with the registered password to authenticate the password. Here, the server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a sixth procedure, when the authentication OK is obtained in the fifth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure on a screen in a predetermined display format (FIG. 154). (Refer to), the content including the set value is displayed on the display operation unit 222. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment has a display device 16A for displaying various images, a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving various operations, and a control for controlling the game. The main CPU 101, which is a unit, and the display device 16.
A host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of A, is provided, and the control unit is provided.
It is provided with a setting switch 332 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6), and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit, and the display control unit is provided with various data transmission means. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving data, a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the setting of the main CPU 101 is changed by the data transmitting means. Alternatively, the setting confirmation and the setting value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation. , The setting value and the date and time data from RTC209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed in the display area of the display device 16A. It has a configuration in which setting change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code when the main button 662, which is an operation unit, is operated while the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed by the display function. ..

With this configuration, the subwork RAM 2100a stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means as the setting change / confirmation history information, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. Then, when the main button 662 is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed by the two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Not only can you determine if an unnatural operation has been performed on the set value, but you can also do so.
It is possible to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed by the setting display function, the host control circuit 2100 uses the displayed date / time data as the browsing history. It may be configured to store in the subwork RAM 2100a and display the browsing history in the display area of the display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16A. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment is a predetermined server device 2 triggered by the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function being read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.
The setting change / confirmation history information may be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 based on the information from 40.

With this configuration, the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is the mobile wireless communication terminal 2.
The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is provided with the condition that the information from the predetermined server device 240, for example, the predetermined password and the password entered in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 match after being read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. Setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized one to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. This password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing or confirming the settings.

Further, the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 to manage a site for authentication, and the pachinko gaming machine 1A is a sub. The server device 240 further has a generation function of generating a two-dimensional code of setting change / confirmation history information and a site URL stored in the work RAM 2100a, and the server device 240 uses a password set in advance as a password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has a display operation unit 222 having display and operation functions and a display device 16 having an authentication service machine that compares and authenticates and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result.
A camera unit that captures the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of A, an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change / confirmation history information and URL, and a password input screen for entering a password. The input screen display control unit that displays the password, the authentication result acquisition unit that sends the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL, and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication. If the result is correct, change the settings.
The configuration includes a history information display control unit that displays confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the present embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A with the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 2
The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 after the authentication by 40.
Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also to make an illegal operation. You will be able to judge whether it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1A and a gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[10-25. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to pachislot machines. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachi-slot machine, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In pachislot, the setting change process can be performed on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is off, and the setting value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or it is detected that the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot has made the above-mentioned setting changes, input a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the setting key, and then operate the start lever. When the indicated signal is received, data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachislot machine constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed and RTC. The date and time data currently timed by the CPU, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change confirmation history information. The pachislot sub CPU constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit.
Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In pachislot, checking the set value means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and displaying the current setting value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. In this way, the pachi-slot machine shifts to the setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display.
The pachislot setting switch constitutes a setting means that enables the change or confirmation of the set value together with the main CPU.

In order to be able to display the confirmation history of the set value, the main CPU confirms the set value by the above operation, and when the signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key is input, the set value is confirmed. The data representing the above and the setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, are sub-C.
Send to PU.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating setting confirmation) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed. The date and time data currently clocked by the RTC, that is, the date and time data for which the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received, is used as the setting change confirmation history information.
It is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a that functions as a backup memory. The subwork RAM 2100a can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state.

The setting key of the sub CPU that received the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command is O.
It is determined that the FF has been turned on. Then, when the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachi-slot machine. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachislot is "total" instead of the "prize ball information" displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "medal information" being displayed, the screen is basically the same as the hall menu screen displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In pachislot, browsing means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. Subwork RAM 2 on condition that the main button is pressed while the main button is pressed.
The setting change confirmation history information stored in 100a is displayed, for example, as a setting change / confirmation history screen.

The sub CPU of the pachislot machine is the host control circuit 2100 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as hall menu processing, setting change / confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing.
It is possible to execute the same processing as the processing executed by. In addition, pachinko gaming machine 1
When the embodiment of the above is applied to the pachislot machine, the hall menu screen, setting change / confirmation history screen, error information history screen, guide menu screen, password request screen, and entered password described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are inappropriate. A screen similar to the screen displayed at the time of the above, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, or the like is displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pachislot machine or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In pachislot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by a bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Also, in pachislot, when a precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played, "
BB precursor flag "is turned on. In other words, the precursory games of "SBB" and "BB" are
It is managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, "SBB
The production of the precursory game corresponding to "BB" may be different from the production of the precursory game corresponding to "BB".

Further, in pachislot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART each end on the condition that the games of the number of staying games have been exhausted, but the first AR
The T and the second ART may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of the display assisting information) is performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART is set to, for example, "10".
It may be fixed to "0", or may be configured such that the number of games added to the number of staying games is added (added) to the number of staying games during "SBB" as in the case of "BB".

Further, in pachislot, the number of games for producing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" may be set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for producing additional A, B, and C may be variable. for example,
Depending on the type of additional addition effect (additional addition A, B, C), the value set in the additional addition game number counter may be different.

Further, in the pachislot, the number of staying games of the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games such as "50", or instead, a predetermined number of games is set as one set (for example,). , 1 set "50" games), the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of games staying in the second ART is set to 1.
The set "50" games may be set to two sets, i.e. a total of "100" games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed with, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine, as the accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rotary accessory unit 122 having the rotary accessory 123 rotated by the drive of the stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

[11. Addendum]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[11-1. Each gaming machine from Appendix 1-1 to Appendix 1-8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-0).
See Japanese Patent Publication No. 65977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, structural factors that influence the ball entry rate and the ball ejection tendency to the ball entrance port. Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game entertainment is necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving the interest. be.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-1 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which a variation display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is performed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time.
A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines a variation pattern performed in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
When,
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a symbol display control means that displays variation of the symbol (for example, variation display of a special symbol) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means, and stops and displays the result of the lottery. For example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93 and
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means is
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, a figure) defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is relatively determined to be a short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it stores the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol shown in 23).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the higher the set value, the larger the number of lottery times per unit time, and eventually the result of the lottery. Expectations will be raised, and it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further, a lottery number counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) for counting the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time is provided, and the lottery is further provided.
The fluctuation pattern table storage means is
Another variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 25) is defined so that the probability of being determined by the short variation pattern becomes higher than that of the variation pattern table as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. The fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored.
The fluctuation pattern determining means is
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery count means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a big hit lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the fluctuation pattern can be determined by using the other fluctuation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the number of times the lottery is executed counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using another fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the setting value, the greater the number of lottery times per unit time.
When the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times, the player's expectation is raised, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, when a jackpot lottery for a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the jackpot gaming state is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variable display of the symbol is being performed, a lottery for the variable display of the symbol is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in the mode showing the result.
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variation display of the symbol (for example, the variation display of the special symbol) is performed, the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability / unsuitability for the game information, It is configured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-2 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A display means (for example, a display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed by a predetermined symbol and the result of the lottery can be shown by the stop mode of the symbol.
A stop mode determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be shown in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
Stop mode table (stop mode table) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining means.
For example, a stop mode table storage means (for example, sub-main ROM 2050) for storing the decorative symbol determination table in FIG. 24, and
A symbol effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 210 capable of executing the process of step S207) for controlling the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means.
0) and
An embodiment (eg, first) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit).
When the symbol is displayed in the embodiment, the second aspect, or the specific aspect), any one of a plurality of benefits advantageous to the player (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot). A profit-giving means for giving a profit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 20) and
Equipped with
The profit-giving means is
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit) and the stop mode is the specific stop mode (for example, the specific mode), the plurality of benefits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) with a relatively high advantage.
The stop mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the more the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of benefits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the set value set by the setting change control means has the same probability that the specific profit is given regardless of the set value. It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the value increases.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means increases, the probability of being stopped in the specific stop mode increases, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means when the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. Even if it is determined by the stop mode determining means that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means for controlling the game from proceeding (for example, the process of step S722 is executed). Main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a specific result and the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is unsuitable for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information. If it is determined that the game cannot proceed, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-3 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118, including both a big hit lottery and a main symbol determination lottery).
A lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of FIG. 26 or FIG. 27 is a jackpot).
At least a display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which a variable display of a symbol is performed,
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variations in the symbols and stops and displays the results of the lottery.
The symbol is in an aspect (for example, Special Figure 1-1 to Special Figure 1-8, Special Figure 2-1 to Special Figure 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, multiple benefits in favor of the player (eg, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R)
A profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20) that grants any profit among the probabilistic jackpots), and
Equipped with
The lottery table storage means
A plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) having a relatively high advantage among the plurality of profits differ depending on the set value are stored.
The lottery means
It is characterized in that the lottery can be performed using the lottery table according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high advantage differ according to the set value, the lottery is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to make the degree of profit given to the player different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit-giving means is
As the specific profit, at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player and a high-probability gaming state in which the profit is given to the gaming state after the special gaming state ends with a relatively high probability are given. And
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that it stores a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the high probability gaming state differs depending on the set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The profit-giving means is
As the specific profit, a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which the lottery is promoted is further granted.
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that it stores a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state differs depending on the set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. Even if the result is the result of granting the specific benefit, the game control means for controlling the game so as not to proceed (for example, the main CP for executing the process of step S722).
U101) and
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery relating to the variable display of the symbol is the result of granting a specific profit, the game is configured so as not to proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-4 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area, and
Special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83,) in which a special lottery is performed in a different lottery mode based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into each of the plurality of starting ports.
The main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S118 and
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit).
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, main C) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game.
PU101) and
Equipped with
The special lottery means
When the special lottery is performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port, the probability that the specific result will be obtained depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently, as well as
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the frequency is higher when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the specific game can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the first The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. That is, if a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value on the premise that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port" is the first. When the game ball enters the starting port of, a winning judgment (including a probability of 0) is made for a specific result, but the probability that a specific result will be obtained in the winning judgment is the probability that the game ball has entered the second starting opening. It includes not only a mode lower than that of the case but also a mode in which a winning judgment situation for a specific result is not performed when the game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20).
When,
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable start control means (for example, for example) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the start opening. , Main CPU 101) and
The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), and the game ball is displayed in the second starting port (first starting port 440). Special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) that displays variation of the second special symbol based on the approach
)When,
A normal game in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF so long that the time for displaying the variation of the second special symbol (for example, an average time of 1000 sec) affects the progress of the game. State) or the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, average time 1s) rather than the variation display time of the first special symbol (for example, average time 10 sec).
A game state control means (for example, a main CP) that can be controlled to a second game state in which ec) is shorter (for example, an advantageous game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time reduction flag is set to OFF).
U101) and
It is characterized by further preparing.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the appropriate determination means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port (for example, the second start port). Even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot proceed without executing the specific game by the specific game executing means. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the gaming ball enters the starting port (for example, the second starting opening), a special lottery (for example, for example) is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening. Before the result of the second special lottery) is shown (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even so, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, a small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-5 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A starting port provided in the game area and
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, and
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit).
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20).
When,
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable start control means (for example, for example) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the start opening. , Main CPU 101) and
Within the specific area where the specific opening is provided based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result (for example, a small hit). A specific area variable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that the game ball can easily enter (for example, receive) the game ball into the game ball.
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the reception of a game ball in the specific mouth provided in the specific area, and a second special game execution means.
Equipped with
The specific area variable control means is
It is configured so that the predetermined movable piece can be operated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value. The operating frequency of the movable piece is different, and the opportunity for the privilege to be given can be made different according to the set value, which makes it possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is
The ease of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is made different according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of normal hit is made different).
By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value set, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. The feature is that it is performed so that it can be different depending on the set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is normal so that the ease of entry of the gaming ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of benefits given based on the entry of the game ball into a specific area will differ according to the set set value, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by making the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) different in the special lottery according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is characterized by being performed so as to be different depending on the set value set.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is normal so that the ease of entry of the gaming ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area differs according to the set set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
If it is determined by the appropriate determination means that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start opening. Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the process of step S722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed without operating the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means. The main CPU 101) to be executed and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine (4) above, even if the gaming ball enters the starting opening, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening is shown (for example, a special symbol). During the variable display), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-6 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A special game state control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20) that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) is executed. Main CPU101) and
Probability change in the game state control means (for example, step S169) capable of controlling the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Main CPU 101 that advances the game after setting the flag)
When,
A counting means (for example, main) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated without being controlled by the normal gaming state after being controlled to the special gaming state. CPU101) and
Equipped with
The game state control means
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, the special gaming state can be controlled and controlled.
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, the gaming state after the special gaming state ends is controlled to the normal gaming state.
The specified number of times
It is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to a specified number of times, and this specified number of times differs depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
The specified number of times determination means
It is characterized in that the lottery for determining the specified number of times is performed so that the expected value for the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Since it differs depending on the game, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the counting means is counted even if the number of times counted by the counting means is less than the specified number of times. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the game so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (that is, the number of loops) without being controlled by the normal gaming state does not reach the specified number of times (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without the number of loops reaching the specified number of times. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-7 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118). ,
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) to be executed and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control means that can at least execute an opening effect performed at the start of the special gaming state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state).
Host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300)) and
Equipped with
The lottery means
The higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the advantage, and the lottery is performed.
The effect control means is
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed so that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be longer as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized by being configured to do so.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the lottery is performed in a manner in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is higher. for that reason,
At a high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time while improving the entertainment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variations of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
Further prepare
The lottery means
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special gaming state, a random number can be extracted based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port, and the random number can be extracted.
The appropriateness determination means is
Even when the game is controlled to the special game state, it is configured so that the suitability / unsuitability of the game information can be discriminated.
The game control means is
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game progress is not permitted to control the game so that it cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state. Means (eg, main CP that executes the process of step S722)
It is characterized by having U101).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even when the game is controlled to the special gaming state, the suitability / unsuitability of the gaming information may be determined. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so that security is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-8 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
At least the first entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100) and the second entrance (for example, the second entrance (for example)
For example, a plurality of entrances and exits having a character continuous operation right gate 1110),
An approach permitting means (for example, a distribution device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any one of the plurality of entrances.
Different benefits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance (for example, if the number of rounds is different and there is a starting port below the entrance, a lottery will be held. With a profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20) that can give the player a profit-giving means (for example, whether or not it is executed).
Equipped with
The entry allowance means
Among the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. do.

According to the game machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the game entertainment. Can be suitably changed.

It should be noted that "a different benefit can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" means, for example, a game at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the big hit game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is the starting port that triggers the lottery, and the other entrance is a lottery. This is the case when it is a general winning opening that does not trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a lottery) for drawing a lot based on the acceptance of a game ball at the starting port.
Main CPU 1 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118
01) and
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
Game information related to the progress of the game including the information of the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Game information storage means that can store (for example, RWM (main RAM 1)
03)) and
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player is notified. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without giving a profit.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance but no profit has been given while the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, even though there is a possibility that a profit may be given to the player, when it is determined that the game information is unsuitable in the determination of suitability / unsuitability, the game proceeds without giving the player a profit. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, an approach enabling means (for example, a main for operating a condition device) for enabling the entry of a game ball at least for the first entrance and the second entrance. Further equipped with CPU101)
The profit-giving means is
When the game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state)
Can be given to the player
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R jackpot game state) having a higher profit than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the player will play the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Will be.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 1-1 to Appendix 1-8 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[11-2. Game machine of Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-0).
See Japanese Patent Publication No. 65977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Second issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table, for example, an abnormality may occur in the gaming setting value or the like, and the security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving security.

In order to solve the second problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 2 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
When,
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) for drawing a lot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440).
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variations of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
With appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving the game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
If it is determined by the appropriateness determination means that the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate while the variation display of the symbol is being performed, it is assumed that the variation display of the symbol has been performed. A game control means for controlling the game so that it cannot proceed (for example, step S722).
Main CPU 101) that executes the processing of
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the suitability / unsuitability of the gaming information may be determined when the variable display of the symbol is performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is disallowed even if the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It will be possible to improve.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 2 of the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[11-3. Game machine of Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-0).
See Japanese Patent Publication No. 65977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Third issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table, changing the ball ejection tendency according to the set value does not necessarily have a light design load. It's hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 3 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A random number generating means that generates a random number within a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 that generates a random number value by executing a program), and
A random number extraction means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73) that extracts random numbers based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
A table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) that stores a lottery table (for example, a big hit random number determination table) that defines a total random number (for example, a range of random numbers for big hit determination) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data). ,
A lottery (for example, the process of step S118) is performed using the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means, and when the extracted random numbers are specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data), the special gaming state is controlled. Possible special game state control means and
Equipped with
The table storage means
A lottery table in which at least the number of total random numbers differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means is stored.
The random number generation means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to generate a total random number of a number specified in the lottery table according to a set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot determination) having more digits than the molecule (number of jackpot determination value data)). Since the jackpot probability) will be changed, it is possible to set the jackpot probability for each set value in detail compared to the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the random number for jackpot judgment as a fixed value. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variations of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, an appropriateness determination means (step) for determining appropriateness / unsuitability for the total random number generated by the random number generation means by the time the variable display of the symbol is started. The main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S72 and step S82, and
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the game control means for controlling the game from proceeding (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be unsuitable, the game is configured so as not to proceed, so that the set value is ensured while ensuring security. It is possible to set the jackpot probability for each in detail.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 3 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[11-4. Each gaming machine in Appendix 4-1 and Appendix 4-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-0).
See Japanese Patent Publication No. 65977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table, while the player becomes suspicious because the ball ejection tendency can be arbitrarily set. , There is a risk that the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting. There is something in it.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 4-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 4-1 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first starting opening 420, second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including a starting opening.
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) for granting a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the acceptance of a game ball in any of the plurality of winning openings.
The main C capable of executing the processing of the lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118) capable of executing the lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port.
PU101) and
A display means in which at least a variation effect of a symbol performed based on the result of the lottery is performed (
For example, the display device 16) and
When the variable effect of the symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening among the plurality of winning openings is specified. Setting suggestion means (for example, host control circuit 21) capable of suggesting setting value information about the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the acceptance of the game ball.
00) and
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, setting change control is based on the fact that a gaming ball is accepted in a specific winning opening when a symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since setting value information about the setting value set by the means may be suggested,
It is possible to reduce the player from becoming a suspicious demon. Further, if the pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
A specific mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) for determining whether or not to perform the variation effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect).
When it is determined by the specific mode determining means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific mode, the specific winning opening determination means for randomly determining any one of the plurality of winning openings to the specific winning opening. (For example, main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by further preparing.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific winning opening is not a fixed winning opening but is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings, so that it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. note that,
Randomly determined specific winning openings are preferably kept secret without disclosure. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, it is set by the setting change control means. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value.
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the gaming information is stored when the symbol is varied or when the gaming ball is accepted in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information stored in the means may be determined. in this case,
Even if there is a possibility that the set value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the set value for the set value set by the setting change control means is determined. It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting information. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 4-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 4-2 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a lottery) for drawing a lot based on the acceptance of a game ball at the starting port.
Main CPU 1 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118
01) and
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) to be executed and
Settings for the set values set by the setting change control means based on the fact that the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port are satisfied (for example, the overflow point has reached the predetermined point). Setting suggestion means that can suggest value information (for example,
Host control circuit 2100) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the current setting value (setting value set by the setting change control means) is based on satisfying the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the gaming ball to the starting port.
Since the setting value information about can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming a suspicious demon. In addition, the execution of the game is urged so that the game ball is accepted at the starting port. note that,
"Satisfying the predetermined conditions for accepting the game ball to the starting port" means, for example, that the game ball was not held because it was the upper limit of holding even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. In some cases, it is assumed that points are accumulated and the points reach the specified points when the game ball is not held because it was held at the upper limit even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. , Not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
)When,
The main C that performs the processing of the appropriateness determination means (steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
PU101) and
Further prepare
The game control means is
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start port (). For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point)
Having a game progress disapproval means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start opening, in the determination of suitability / unsuitability of the game information performed by the acceptance of the game ball at the start opening. If it is determined to be unsuitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 4-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 4-2 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[11-5. Game machine of Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-0).
See Japanese Patent Publication No. 65977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, there is a risk that the payout management will not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 5 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). Multiple different setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 1 to
A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set in any of the six stages of setting 6), and
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
A payout means (for example, a payout device 3) that pays out a game medium based on a prize as a result of a game.
50) and
A special game execution means (for example, a special game execution means) capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 20 and
A data aggregation means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of aggregating data related to a game medium paid out by the payout means, and
The data aggregated by the data aggregation means is displayed in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334).
), And the data display control means (main CPU101).
Equipped with
The data aggregation means is
All history aggregation means that aggregates the above data based on all game history,
It has a history totaling means for each set value that aggregates the data based on the game history for each set value.
The data display control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and / and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means can be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means. Ball management can be easily performed.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 5 having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

[11-6. Game machine of Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means for storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect can be exchanged. Is no longer necessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 6 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 6 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game is played according to the set value. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game in a game-like manner based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
Equipped with
The game control means is
A lottery based on the game characteristics according to the set value set by the setting change control means (
For example, a lottery means capable of executing (processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) and
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, the jackpot game control of FIG. 20) to which a privilege corresponding to a set value set by the setting change control means is given based on the result of the lottery.
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the set value set by the setting change control means with one gaming machine, and the game machine management manager or the like can execute the game. It is possible to give a wide range of ways to utilize the gaming machines.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means is
When the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is reached. 1st game control means (for example, ST specification) for executing a game
For example, the main CPU 101) and
When the second set value is set among the plurality of set values, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability. A second game control player (for example, a probabilistic loop specification) that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, a probability variation loop specification).
For example, the main CPU 101) stage and
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the game machine of (2) above, although both the game characteristics by the first game control means and the game characteristics by the second game control means are controlled in a high-probability gaming state, the first game control means is used. The high-probability game state may end halfway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state in the game property by the second game control means. It differs greatly in that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that are similar at first glance but are substantially different, the manager of the gaming machine, etc. can use the pachinko gaming machine in a wider range of ways. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 6 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[11-7. Each gaming machine of Appendix 7-1 to Appendix 7-12]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(7th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, for example,
There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as illegally changing the set value or confirming the set value by an unauthorized person, or changing the set value due to noise or the like.

Further, since the above set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-1 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
It is characterized by having a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that limits the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Having limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316). It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-2 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, the setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed, and the one setting value Transmission means (for example, command output port 10) capable of transmitting the set value information of
6 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing the set value information as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The display control means is
First screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 124) in which history information that does not include the set value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the host control circuit 2 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124.
100) and
A second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 126) in which history information including at least the set value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the host control circuit 21 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126.
It is characterized by having 00) and.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed, and the first screen is displayed.
On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) showing the history information including the setting value information is configured to be displayed.

As the transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, the setting operation information and the set value information may be transmitted together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means is
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, only when a specific condition is satisfied, a second screen showing history information including setting value information is displayed, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being viewed for the purpose of fraud. The specific conditions are
For example, when an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The display control means is
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-3 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received) A second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store the information as history information.
A display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation.
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command to generate an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. Information screen display limiting means for limiting screen display (for example,
It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100) that executes the hall menu display prohibition process in step S318.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, although the displayed information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined conditions are met, the information screen cannot be viewed, so even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be easily viewed and security can be ensured. Will be.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the above-mentioned seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-4 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine administrator) can be viewed only. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2) capable of displaying one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed on the display means.
300) and
The display control means is
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on at least when the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized by being configured to be displayed in.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine administrator). An information screen that can be viewed only is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and at least the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. If not, it is configured not to be displayed. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being able to be viewed by an unspecified person when, for example, only the player who has registered as a member can view it, but as long as the member is registered, it may not be possible to view it. Since anyone can view it (that is, if they have the intention to view it), it can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person. On the other hand,
The information screen cannot be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by a person having authority such as a game machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen limiting means for limiting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301). It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined, and a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-5 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation.
It has an information erasing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S3066 and step S3160) for erasing the history information from the second storage means when receiving a specific operation.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to accept the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the "clear" item) is accepted, the history information is deleted, and the specific operation is specific. It can be accepted only when the conditions are met (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to delete the history of changing the setting value, confirming the setting value, or browsing for the purpose of fraud, such deletion cannot be executed unless specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraud history from being intentionally deleted. Further, for the authorized person, the history information can be deleted, so that the convenience can be enhanced.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means is
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means is
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which the setting value information is included in the history information.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that the history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, more useful information such as set value information can be browsed. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The information erasing means is
When erasing the history information from the second storage means, it is characterized in that only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means can be erased as the history information.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by an authorized person, so that the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed in association with one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (see, for example, FIG. 126). The information erasing means includes the associated history information (for example, FIG. 1).
It may be deleted for each item (for each No. 26), or for each item among the information of a plurality of items included in the history information (for example, the date and time item shown in FIG. 126, the operation type item). , All of the set value items may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-6 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The setting operation information is
It is information that can distinguish the operation type whether it is the information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed or the information indicating that the confirmation of the one set value has been performed. ,
The display control means is
A list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are shown as history information regardless of the type of the setting operation information.
It is possible to selectively display a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific type among the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, regardless of the type of setting operation information, the information screen of the list in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are shown as history information, and the setting operation information correspond to a specific type. Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the specific information screen in which the setting value information is shown as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, the gaming machine administrator) is enhanced. Can be done.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, when an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The transmission means is
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means is
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means is
It is characterized in that an information screen including the set value information in the history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, more useful information such as set value information can be browsed. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the above-mentioned seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-7 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not shown, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen in which the history information is shown (for example, a hall menu screen). For example, a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen).
Although the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S314, step S315 or step S316), the information screen can be displayed.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information screen display limiting means for limiting the display of the information screen (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316). ) And,
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, the browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Even if the information screen is displayed a plurality of times by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is restricted, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to be memorized.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

Further, the information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen.
At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one setting history information. Will be done. This makes it difficult for a person who changes settings, confirms settings, browses information screens, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or checking the set value, browsing is performed multiple times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). The effect is great because it is possible to do so and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the above-mentioned seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-8 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example,) that can distinguish whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed (for example).
It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting a setting operation command).
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And is a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 21) that can be stored as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information.
00a) and
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not shown, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen in which the history information is shown (for example, a hall menu screen). For example, it has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen).
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one setting value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed, while the above-mentioned browsing history information is displayed.
When the setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud by using a setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but regarding fraud involving a setting confirmation history. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. In addition, it is considered that the person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated and one setting value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are both. Is displayed, and when one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display means can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of histories from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud.

In addition, "when the change of the one setting value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" is ". Of the setting change history information and the browsing history information, only the browsing history information is stored in the second storage means, so that only the browsing history information is displayed. ”And“ Both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it may be stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information may be displayed by the control by the display control means among these information, but the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. Therefore, the former is preferable.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-9 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-9 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation.
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, history erasing means (for example, a history erasing means) that executes control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. , A host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S306.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the subwork RAM 2100a), but since there is an upper limit to the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of history information is large, there is a possibility that the history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to be recorded in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, new history information is recorded by erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. It prevents situations such as being unable to do so.

In addition, "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" is the second. By overwriting the new history information with respect to the history information already stored in the storage means, the history information may be deleted as a result, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. If there is a possibility that the amount may exceed a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be deleted and then the history information may be stored. Further, even when new history information is stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means when there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the second storage means. At least a part of the existing history information may be deleted.

In addition, the setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Having a screen limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316). It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-10 are
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed or the setting value of the one is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the setting confirmation state that can be performed, and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and also.
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 2300) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state is completed.
) And,
The display control means is
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without limiting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends (
For example, the processes of steps S312 and S313 can be executed) and
Even if the setting change state ends, it is possible to control so that the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends. The process of step S313 to step S316 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information can be browsed, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured that, for example, an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when controlled to the setting change state, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as the predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
At least when the one setting value is changed, the setting value information about the one setting value can also be transmitted.
The display control means is
It is characterized in that, in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, the information screen in which the setting value information about the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that a person with authority can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, the setting value information for one setting value is useful information for business purposes.
It will be useful for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display control means is
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, when the receiving means receives specific information related to the progress of the game, the information screen is displayed. Forced termination means for ending the display of (for example, step S31)
6 is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means. Because it ends in a targeted manner, the execution of the game is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to secure the convenience of operation by an authorized person and suppress fraud by an unauthorized third party while ensuring the state in which the game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, it is configured so that it can be grasped that the game can be executed without disturbing the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example). , While the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the LED 25 is fully lit in white, while when the setting change or setting confirmation is completed, the LED 25 is fully lit in red).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed without preventing the predetermined operation related to the information screen from being performed. Since it is possible to grasp that the game is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the game even though the game can be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-11 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-11 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (eg, for example) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value.
Main RAM 103) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
In the setting state, there is a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen, a hall menu item screen) on which various information can be displayed on the display means. death,
The information screen is
A history screen showing the history information (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Has multiple information screens, including at least (menu screen)
The display control means is
A screen updating means (for example, a step) for controlling the display of another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while the information screen of any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display means. A host control circuit 2100) that executes processing such as S3051, step S3057, and step S3073).
When the non-history screen is displayed in the setting state, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hall menu display process in step S302 is executed. When none of the items is selected in the process of step S303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, the specific display control means for controlling the display of the history screen to be terminated (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S3072).
It is characterized by having and.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed as history information, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by viewing the history screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

In addition, the non-history screen where the history information is not shown is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed, but the history screen where the history information is shown ends if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer. do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed by an unauthorized third party. note that,
The above-mentioned "continuous display" includes temporarily ending the display and redisplaying it. That is, is it displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer?
It is important that the display is not displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
At least when the one setting value is changed, the setting value information about the one setting value can also be transmitted.
The display control means is
When displaying the history screen on the display means in the setting state, the setting value information about the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that a person with authority can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, the setting value information for one setting value is useful information for business purposes.
It will be useful for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 7-12 are
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A first control means having one storage means (for example, a main control circuit 100) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the first storage means, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed is entered. The setting change state control means to be controlled (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, the setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the set value information after the change when the set value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. A transmission means capable of transmitting information indicating that (for example, an initialization command) (for example, a main CPU capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 or step S55).
101) and
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting change information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information on the display means at least in the setting change state.
Erasing execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, a voice / LED control circuit 2200 that controls the voice output of the display control circuit 2300, the speaker 24, and a voice / LED that controls the lighting mode of the LED 25). With a control circuit 2200),
The erasure execution information notification means is
When the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the first aspect (for example, for example) capable of grasping that the erasing process has been executed.
Character display such as "RAM has been cleared" and "RAM" in the display area of the display device 16.
The first notification means (host control circuit 2100) to notify by voice output such as "Cleared", all red lighting of LED25), and
It is more difficult to grasp than the first aspect that the erasing process is executed so that the visibility of the information screen is not obstructed when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state. A second notification means (host) that notifies by mode (for example, without displaying on the display device 16 but only the voice output such as "The setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized" and the LED 25 is fully lit in red). It is characterized by having a control circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information can be viewed as history information on the information screen, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, when there is a possibility that the set value has been changed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the above fraud has been committed. It will be possible to do. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, or is controlled by the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasing process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the erasing process is executed by a third party who does not have the authority, for example, because it is notified in the first mode that the erasing process can be grasped. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is done. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one setting value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second aspect, which is more difficult to grasp than the first aspect. Further, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second aspect, the visibility of the information screen is not obstructed. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A voice output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is further provided, and the sound is further provided.
The second control means is
A voice control means (for example, voice / LE) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output means.
It also has a D control circuit 2200).
The first notification means is
The fact that the erasing process has been executed is notified by using both the display means and the voice output means.
The second notification means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the erasing process has been executed by using only the voice output means among the display means and the voice output means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the erasing process (for example, is not controlled by the setting change state).
When the backup clear process) is executed, both the display means and the voice output means are used to notify the user, so that it is possible to clearly know that the erase process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control to the setting change state, the information screen is visually obstructed because only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means is used for notification. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the erasing process from being performed, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party while improving convenience.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 7-1 to Appendix 7-12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-8. Game machine of Appendix 8]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(8th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, for example,
Various problems may occur, such as illegally changing the set value or confirming the set value by an unauthorized person, changing the set value due to noise, etc., or illegally replacing the control board. Is a concern.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 8 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the setting operation means is operated, the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26). )When,
A storage means (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and transmission means capable of transmitting at least the set value information about the one set value (for example, command output port 106 or step S55).
With a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the set value information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
Based on the reception of the set value information by the receiving means, the suitability of the one set value is determined by using the received set value information and the set value information received prior to the set value information. Setting determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that determines whether or not the previous setting value and the current setting value match) and
An abnormal time processing execution means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes an abnormal setting value processing) that executes an abnormal time processing when the setting determination means determines that the one set value is inappropriate.
) And.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of one set value by using the set value information of one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if it is possible for the first control means to determine the suitability of one set value, for example, when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value is normal. Regardless of whether it is abnormal or abnormal, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the suitability of one set value, for example, even when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value can be determined. It is possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
It is also possible to send setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the above-mentioned one setting value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage means that can be stored as history information. Means (eg, subwork RAM 2100a) and
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation.
) And.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

When the transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means transmits both the setting operation information and the set value information, these information may be transmitted together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 8 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-9. Appendix 9 gaming machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a plurality of functions with one device has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, in order to be pressed by a player and to have an impact on the player, the pachinko / pachislot machine may be pushed out to a position greatly protruding from the main body of the game machine regardless of the player's operation. The push button that was used is disclosed.

(Ninth issue)

By the way, when checking the operation of accessories and various sensors, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-1705
There is a concern that the maintainability of a single device having a plurality of functions, such as the push button described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 05, may deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions. be.

In order to solve the ninth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 9 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 9 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
A character that can be operated based on the result of the lottery (for example, a character group 1000) and
A compound means having a plurality of functions in one (for example, an effect button 62) and
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
At least, the maintenance item determining means (for example, the process of step S3084) for determining the maintenance item to be executed among the plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the accessory, the function confirmation of the composite means, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Executable host control circuit 2100) and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, FIG. 132) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the composite means, and detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected can be selected. A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least a maintenance screen).
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means is
The combined means having one but having a plurality of functions is configured to be displayable so that an item can be selected for each function on the selection screen (for example, the item of "effect button 1" in FIG. 132). It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, for a composite means having a plurality of functions even though it is one, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen in which one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The combined means
It has at least an operation function and an effect function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery.
The maintenance item determination means is
When the operation function item (for example, the effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the effect function item (for example, the effect button 2) is selected. In some cases, it is characterized in that it can be determined as a maintenance item related to the effect function.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be decidable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 9 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-10. Appendix 10 gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine equipped with a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery has been known. There is.

As this type of gaming machine, as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of a lottery, a gaming machine including a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory having different drive sources is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273 (see No. 2018-15273).

(10th issue)
By the way, in the gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273, which includes a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is especially true when multiple movable objects with different drive sources can interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources are provided. It is to provide a game machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 10 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
The first accessory and the second accessory, which can operate based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
At least, a maintenance item determining means (for example, a step) for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S3084 and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, a selection screen in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected can be selected. , The maintenance screen display control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least the maintenance screen (maintenance screen of FIG. 132).
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means is
Not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated is selected on the selection screen. It is configured to be displayable so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of "directing accessory 1 + 2" in FIG. 132 is displayed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, not only the operation check of each of the first and second bonuses independently, but also the operation check when both the first and second bonuses are operated. Can be selected on the selection screen, so it is possible to reduce the troublesome maintenance work.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means is
It is configured so that the operation check when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Direction accessory 1 → 2" in FIG. 132. Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check when the machine is operated can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesome maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a third accessory that can operate based on the result of the lottery and has a different drive source from both the first accessory and the second accessory is provided.
The maintenance screen display control means is
When the first accessory and / and the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory and / and the second accessory The selection screen is configured to be displayable in a manner in which neither the third accessory nor the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "directing accessory 1 + 3" in FIG. 132 cannot be selected. )
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory and / or the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory is displayed on the selection screen. Since it is not possible to select an mode in which either the 1st accessory or / and the 2nd accessory and the 3rd accessory are operated, it is possible to improve maintainability.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 10 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-11. Each gaming machine of Appendix 11-1 and Appendix 11-2]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(11th issue)

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball ejection. However, for example, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to the occurrence of power failure or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 11-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 11-1 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
Equipped with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the state control means (for example, a state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed). , Has a main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S24.
The state control means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is controlled to the setting change state. It is possible to restore power in the setting change state when it is possible or the power supply is stopped (for example, when it is determined as NO in step S21, step S24
Executes the processing of)
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if, for example, a power failure occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, the setting change state is controlled or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the state where the setting is changed when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is maintained properly. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means is
After the setting value of one is changed in the setting change state, the setting operation means is OF.
When the F operation is performed, the setting value fixing means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2480) for fixing the one set value to the changed set value is further provided.
The set value fixing means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is O.
It is characterized in that when the N operation is further performed and then the OFF operation is performed, the set value of the above one is fixed to the set value after the change.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 11-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 11-2 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means having the means (for example, the main control circuit 100) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
Equipped with
The control means is
The setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed and the one setting in the state after the power is turned on according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing processing such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) that can control any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which the value can be confirmed. death,
The state control means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, it is controlled to one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. (For example, the processes of steps S22 to S28 are executed), and
When the power supply was stopped in the setting change state and then turned on, the setting controllable state or the power supply was stopped regardless of the operation state of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. It is possible to restore power in the state where the setting is changed at the time (for example, when NO is determined in step S21, the process of step S24 is executed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, while ensuring the convenience of the operator. That is, since the setting confirmation state is a state in which only one setting value can be confirmed and one setting value cannot be changed, for example, even if an unintended power failure occurs, one setting value is not possible. It is unlikely that it will affect. On the other hand, since the setting change state is a state in which one setting value can be changed, for example, if an unintended power failure occurs, the one setting value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on thereafter, one of a plurality of states is set according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By recovering the power, the convenience of the operator is ensured, and the situation where the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means is
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, the setting is controlled to the changed state.
The control means is
After the setting value of one is changed in the setting change state, the setting operation means is OF.
When the F operation is performed, the set value fixing means for fixing the one set value to the changed set value is further provided.
The set value fixing means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is O.
It is characterized in that when the N operation is further performed and then the OFF operation is performed, the set value of the above one is fixed to the set value after the change.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 11-1 and Appendix 11-2 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[11-12. Appendix 12 gaming machines]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of the player's advantage or disadvantage in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set, and thereafter, A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(12th issue)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball ejection. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 12 are
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
Equipped with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the setting change state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
An appropriateness determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the information stored in the storage means, and
An abnormality control means (for example, a state in which the processes of steps S722 to S727 are executed) is controlled when the information stored in the storage means is determined to be inappropriate.
The main CPU 101) that executes the processes of steps S722 to S727, and
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state and the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. Control not to be possible (for example, in step S1770, N
When it is determined to be O, the process of step S1790 is not executed. On the other hand, it is controlled so that the game can be executed when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on (for example, step S17).
When it is determined to be YES in 70 and YES in step S1780, step S
It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S17) for executing the process of 1790).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, the game cannot be executed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that the one setting value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the setting change state is controlled so that the one setting value is always changed. The game can be executed and the set value is maintained properly.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the set value.

[11-13. Appendix 13 gaming machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(13th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, for example,
There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as illegally changing the set value or confirming the set value by an unauthorized person, or changing the set value due to noise or the like.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 13 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 13 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value.
When,
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on with the setting operation means turned on (for example, the setting key is ON), the state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing processes such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) and
Although the game cannot be executed in the set state, the game is executed in the setting process of step S20 in which the game execution means can be controlled so that the game can be executed when the set state is completed (for example, the game return process of step S30 has not been executed yet). When the setting process of step S20 is completed, the game return process of step S30 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables the game to be executed, although it cannot be done.
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). Main C capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55
With PU101),
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, relay board 2010) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means.
When,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, the setting operation effect executing means (for example,) that can execute the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed in the set state in which the game cannot be executed. , A host control circuit 2100) that executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200.
The setting operation effect executing means is
Even if the set state is completed and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed until the predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a set state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the set state is completed and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect such fraud when the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed illegally, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation effect executing means is
After the setting state is completed and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the first set value has been performed can be visually grasped as the state in which the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable in.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually grasp that the gaming is in a state where the game can be executed, one is performed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The state control means is
It has a setting change state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value, and also has
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). With a storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can be stored as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state is completed. Further, a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of limiting the display is provided.
The display control means is
When the receiving means receives the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. Information screen can be displayed (for example, step S312 to step S316)
It is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the processing of.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the set state, and the display of the information screen is restricted when the set state is completed. Therefore, in the set state, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales. Furthermore, while the display of the information screen is restricted when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display an information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is committed, it is possible to easily detect the fraud and to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 13 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-14. Appendix 14 gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a big hit game is performed when the result of this lottery is a big hit.

As this type of gaming machine, a long-press effect that changes the execution mode of a specific game effect is performed on the operating means on condition that a predetermined long-press operation is performed by the player, and is shorter than the long-press operation. There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a continuous striking effect on condition that a continuous striking operation in which a pressing operation is performed a plurality of times is performed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-05977).
In the gaming machine of JP-A-2015-065977, if the long-press operation is performed within the long-press operation acceptance valid period for determining whether or not the long-press operation is performed, the long-press effect is executed.

(14th issue)
It is not preferable to control by determining whether a long press operation is performed or a continuous striking effect is performed on the operating means, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, because the control load becomes large. ..

However, in recent years, by performing a production that can give a further visual impact,
A gaming machine that can enhance the interest is desired.

In order to solve the 14th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 14 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 14 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a main process (for example, a main loop process) in which various processes (for example, various request control processes) are performed every predetermined time (for example, 33.3 msec).
With a predetermined operation means (for example, main button),
Control capable of performing interrupt processing every time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 1 msec) and generating input information in the main process based on the input state of the operating means detected by the interrupt process. Means (eg, host control circuit 2100) and
Equipped with
The control means is
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state,
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state,
After it is determined that the ON state has continued for a certain period of time (for example, 10 frames), as long as the input state of the operating means continues for a time shorter than the fixed time (for example, 4 frames), the ON state is periodically performed. An input information generation means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1309) that generates information that can be determined that an ON state has occurred (for example, ON edge information with a repeat function).
A device control means (for example, a device control means capable of executing control of a predetermined device based on the information generated by the input information generation means (for example, the ON edge information with a repeat function)).
It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state based on the input state of the operating means (for example, the input information of the subdevice), the ON state is constant. By generating information that can be determined to have occurred periodically as long as the input state of the operating means continues for a period shorter than a certain period of time after it is determined that the time has continued. It is possible to easily perform controls such as control of the continuous hitting effect of the sub-device and control of the long-pressing effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 14, it is possible to execute control according to the mode of the operating means while reducing the control load.

[11-15. Each gaming machine in Appendix 15-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine including a display device that emits light by a backlight is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(15th issue)
However, for example, if the brightness of the light emitting means of the backlight is unstable, the display of the effect image on the display device may become unstable, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the fifteenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 15-1 is
A light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
Drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to the light emitting mode emitted by the light emitting means.
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores data in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the process of step S1346).
Equipped with
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be set in the predetermined area, a new drive data is set. And.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 of the above (1), when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area can be stored in the predetermined area becomes the reference data number, new drive data is used. Is set, so that a control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of the SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means is transmitted via a driver. It is possible to emit light stably without using it.

The above "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When, for example, two or more luminance data can be set in the FIFO data area in this way, the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is the first number (1st number (.
If the number is less than (for example, 2), the luminance data of the second number (for example, 1) may be supplemented.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 15-2 is
A light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
Drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to the light emitting mode emitted by the light emitting means.
Is stored in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area) as a data storage means (for example, F).
IFO data area) and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in a predetermined area of the data storage means to the light emitting means.
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the process of step S1346).
A host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1356 (for example, a time measuring means capable of measuring the elapsed time since the drive data is set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, step S1356).
)When,
Equipped with
The data setting means is
It is characterized in that the driving data can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (the process of step S1354 can be executed) based on the elapse of the time measured by the time measuring means for a predetermined time or more. And.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2 of the above (1), the drive data is data based on the elapsed time from the setting of the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage means to the predetermined time or more. It is set in a predetermined area of the storage means. For example, when some processing takes time, the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means disappears until the timing of setting the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage means is reached. There is a risk that it will end up. In this regard, according to this gaming machine, even if it is not the timing to set the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage means, the drive data is determined by the data storage means based on the elapse of the above time or more. Since it is set in the area of, it is possible to prevent the drive data set in the predetermined data area from becoming empty. Therefore, it is possible to output a control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI), and the light emitting means can be stably output without going through a driver. It is possible to make it emit light.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2, it is possible to suppress the unstable light emission of the light emitting means.

[11-16. Each gaming machine in Appendix 16-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a production image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of this lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine used for directing or decorating by emitting light in a predetermined manner by a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(16th issue)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy, including a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the brightness of the light emitting device is high, it may be stressful for some players. If the brightness of the light emitting device can be operated by the player or the like, the player can adjust the brightness to a desired brightness, but that alone may not be sufficient.

In order to solve the 16th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 16-1 and the gaming machine of blowing 16-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 16-1 is
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages.
A host control circuit that executes the process of the first light emitting control means (for example, step S1384) in which the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side L) provided separately from the first light emitting means.
ED) and
A second light emitting control means (for example, step S138) capable of changing the brightness of the second light emitting means.
Host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of 5 and
Equipped with
The second light emission control means is
The brightness of the second light emitting means is changed to one of the plurality of steps at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the operating means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the second light emitting means is changed at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed. While the brightness of the light emitting means is also changed, the brightness of the second light emitting means is also changed to one of a plurality of stages, so that the degree of freedom for the player to change the brightness can be further increased. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the process of step S1346).
Equipped with
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the luminance is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area can be stored in the predetermined area becomes the reference data number, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting drive means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It is possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When, for example, two or more luminance data can be set in the FIFO data area in this way, the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is the first number (1st number (.
If the number is less than (for example, 2), the luminance data of the second number (for example, 1) may be supplemented.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 16-2 is
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S45) that draws a lot based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) and
Based on the result of the lottery, a symbol (for example, an identification symbol for effect) in the display means.
Fluctuation display control means (for example, display control circuit 2300) for displaying the variation of
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages.
Host control for executing the process of the first light emitting control means (for example, step S1394) in which the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. Circuit 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side L) provided separately from the first light emitting means.
ED) and
A second light emitting control means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1392) that controls the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means based on a predetermined request.
Equipped with
The second light emission control means is
Based on the operation of the operating means, the brightness of the second light emitting means is set to the first.
It is characterized in that it can be changed (for example, the process of step S1399 is executed) after the luminance of the light emitting means of the above is changed and after the variation display of the symbol is completed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed when the operating means is operated. Further, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variation display of the symbol is completed. Here, since the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is controlled based on a predetermined request, the control load is minimized by changing the brightness of the second light emitting means after the variable display of the symbol is completed. It is possible to change the brightness of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means while suppressing the limit.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the process of step S1346).
Equipped with
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the luminance is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area can be stored in the predetermined area becomes the reference data number, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting drive means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It is possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When, for example, two or more luminance data can be set in the FIFO data area in this way, the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is the first number (1st number (.
If the number is less than (for example, 2), the luminance data of the second number (for example, 1) may be supplemented.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 16-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 16-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the brightness of the light emitting device can be more preferably adjusted by a player or the like.

[11-17. Appendix 17 game machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a production image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of this lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine used for directing or decorating by emitting light in a predetermined manner by a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(17th issue)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy, including a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the intensity of the light received from the light emitting device is high, it may be stressful depending on the player.

In order to solve the 17th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 17 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 17 is
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages.
A host control circuit that executes the process of the first light emitting control means (for example, step S1394) in which the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side L) provided separately from the first light emitting means.
ED) and
A second light emitting control means (for example, step S1) capable of changing the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means.
The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of 406, and
Equipped with
The second light emission control means is
The mode of the light emitting effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited and executed at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the operating means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the mode of the light emitting effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the intensity of the light received from the second light emitting means by a simple process.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the process of step S1346).
Equipped with
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the luminance is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area can be stored in the predetermined area becomes the reference data number, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting drive means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It is possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more brightness data can be set. When, for example, two or more luminance data can be set in the FIFO data area in this way, the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is the first number (1st number (.
If the number is less than (for example, 2), the luminance data of the second number (for example, 1) may be supplemented.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 17, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player or the like can suitably adjust the intensity of the light received from the light emitting device.

[11-18. Appendix 18 game machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming machine in which an effect depending on an RTC (real-time clock) is performed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, the RTC abnormality is determined when the power is turned on, and if there is an abnormality, the date and time are notified, and if an RTC abnormality is found, a gaming machine that can quickly deal with this is available. It is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-51853 (for example, paragraph [0094])).

(18th issue)
According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-51853, if there is an abnormality in the RTC, the date and time will be notified, so there is a possibility that it can be dealt with quickly. There is a risk that it will not be possible to perform the production.

In order to solve the above-mentioned eighteenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 18 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 18 is
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) that can output time information,
A time information management means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1413) capable of acquiring time information from the real-time clock and updating the acquired time to the current time information.
An effect executing means (for example, a host control circuit 210) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, RTC effect) based on the current time information being specific time information (for example, a designated time).
0) and
Anomaly determination means for determining an abnormality of the real-time clock (for example, step S141).
Host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of 4 and
Equipped with
The time information management means is
When it is determined that the real-time clock is abnormal, the previous time information previously acquired by the time information management means is maintained as the current time information (for example, step S1415).
However, when it is determined that the real-time clock is normal, the previous time information can be updated to the current time information (for example, the process of step S1416).
The effect executing means is
The current time information is the specific time information (YES in step S1417).
The previous time information and the current time information do not match (YES in step S1418).
It is characterized in that the specific effect is executed on the condition that the specific effect is executed (step S1419).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to suitably perform an effect depending on the RTC.

[11-19. Each game machine of Appendix 19-1 and Appendix 19-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and an effect image is displayed on a display device or the like based on the result of this lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine in which compressed image data is decoded, the decoded image data is appropriately converted, stored in a frame buffer, and output to a display device. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-87402 (for example, paragraph [0100]).
reference)).

(19th issue)
In recent years, the variation of the effect image displayed on the display device has increased, and the control of the effect image tends to be complicated. In such a case, it is desired to efficiently control the effect image.

In order to solve the 19th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 19-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 19-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 19-1 is
Between the drawing output destination buffer having the drawing function and the frame buffer having the display function,
A gaming machine capable of performing a process of switching between functions (for example, bank flip).
Image information (for example, composition) related to the effect image displayed on a predetermined display means.
With a registration means that can be registered in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that can execute step S1449 or step S1458).
After the drawing output destination buffer is switched to the frame buffer (for example, after the processing of step S1446 is performed), the effect image is displayed on the predetermined display means based on the image information registered by the registration means. Effect image display control means for controlling display (
For example, the display control circuit 2300) and
Equipped with
The registration means is
When the image information registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer includes image information for pausing the image (for example, step S).
When it is determined to be YES in 1447), the display control circuit 23 that executes the process of the first registration means (for example, step S1449) for registering the image information in the drawing output destination buffer.
00) and
Even if there is no image information registered in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, even if it is determined to be NO in step S1444), the effect image displayed in the predetermined display means is registered in the frame buffer. When the upper limit of the image information is reached (for example, when YES is determined in step S1450), the second registration means (for example, step S1458) for registering the image information in the drawing output destination buffer can be executed. It is characterized by having a display control circuit 2300).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, while the image information is registered on the condition that the image information is not registered, even if the image information is registered, it is specific to the registered image information. Since the image information is registered when the image information is included, it is possible to efficiently control the effect image.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 19-2 is
A plurality of display means (for example, a display) capable of reproducing a predetermined effect image, and
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of controlling image information related to an effect image reproduced by the plurality of display means, and a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300).
Equipped with
The display control means is
The display control circuit 23 that executes the process of step S1441 (for example, the display control circuit 23) for determining the appropriateness of the number of layers related to the image information reproduced at the same time in the display means.
00) and
When the number of layers is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S1441), the number of display means determining means (for example, step) for determining the appropriateness of the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image. Display control circuit 2300 that executes the processing of S1442)
When,
When the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image is appropriate (for example, step S).
When it is determined to be YES in 1442), the display means existence determination means (for example, the display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1443) for determining the existence of the display means for which the image information is to be registered, and the display control circuit 2300.
When there is a display means for which the image information is to be registered (for example, step S1443).
(When YES is determined in
After the image information to be reproduced in one of the plurality of display means is registered by the image information registration means, the image information is registered in another display means different from the one display means. It is characterized in that the determination by the display means number determination means and the determination by the display means existence determination means (the process of step S1459 is executed and then the process of returning to step S1442 is performed).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when there are a plurality of display means and the number of layers required for the image information is appropriate, the image information related to the effect image displayed on one display means is registered. Since the image information related to the effect image displayed on another display means different from one display means is registered, it is possible to efficiently register the image information determined to have an appropriate number of layers. Become.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 19-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 19-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently controlling the effect image.

[11-20. Each gaming machine of Appendix 20-1 and Appendix 20-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, an audio effect is also output.

As a gaming machine of this type, it is determined whether or not the timing for determining an abnormality of the digital amplifier has been reached. For example, when the operation determination timing determined at a time interval of about several seconds has been reached, the input port Pi2 is used. A gaming machine that acquires an abnormality notification signal ERR and determines whether or not the digital amplifier is at an abnormal level is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-209723 (for example, paragraphs [0178] and [0179])).

(20th issue)
In recent years, due to an increase in variations of production images displayed on liquid crystal displays and the like, the production content has become more sophisticated and the interest has been improved. However, with the sophistication of the production content, the production content of the game sound tends to be more sophisticated, and in order to output a normal game sound, it is necessary to appropriately perform the determination process of the amplification device that amplifies the game sound. There is.

In order to solve the twentieth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 20-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 20-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, a digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying a game sound output from the output means, and
An abnormality determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515) that performs abnormality determination processing as to whether or not the amplification move is normal.
Equipped with
The abnormality determination means is
The abnormality determination process is performed a plurality of times of the abnormality determination process (for example, step S1503, step S).
It can be executed separately (processing of 1511, step S1515, etc.) and can be executed.
In the predetermined process (for example, one frame) executed once within the predetermined time, the abnormality determination process (for example, step S1503, step S1511) divided into the plurality of times is performed.
It is characterized in that a part of step S1515) is executed, and a part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time onward.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination process of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). , It becomes possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, a digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying a game sound output from the output means, and
A setting information confirmation means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as steps S1506 to S507 and steps S1522 to S523) for confirming setting information about the amplification means.
Equipped with
The setting information confirmation means is
The confirmation process can be divided into a plurality of confirmation processes and executed, and the confirmation process can be executed.
A part of the confirmation process (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S1506 to S507, steps S1522 to S523, etc.) in the predetermined process once executed within the predetermined time. Is executed, and a part or all of the remaining confirmation processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time onward.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation process of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire confirmation process of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, a digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying a game sound output from the output means, and
The abnormality determination process of whether or not the amplification means is normal can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, a process of check status = 0, 2, 3), and the plurality of abnormalities can be executed. Abnormality determination means (for example, step S15) in which the determination process is performed over the predetermined process a plurality of times.
Host control circuit 21 that executes processing such as 03, step S1511, and step S1515.
00) and
A progress management means for managing the progress of the abnormality determination process (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for managing the check status) and
Equipped with
The progress management means is
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, check status = 0, 2, 3 processes) is completed in one predetermined process.
The abnormality determination means is
When the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) is completed in the one predetermined process, another abnormality determination process different from the one abnormality determination process is performed in the next and subsequent predetermined processes (for example, after the next frame). The abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 2) is executed, and the abnormality determination process (for example, check status 0) is executed in the predetermined process.
When the process) is not completed, the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) can be executed again in the predetermined process from the next time onward.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination process of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). , It becomes possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one abnormality determination process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one abnormality determination is performed in the next and subsequent predetermined processes (for example, after the next frame). Since the processing is executed again, any abnormality determination processing will be executed until it is completed.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, a digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying a game sound output from the output means, and
The confirmation process of the setting information about the amplification means can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of confirmation processes (for example, a process of check status = 1, 5), and the plurality of confirmation processes are performed a plurality of times of the predetermined process. Setting information confirmation means (for example, steps S1506 to S507)
, The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processes of steps S1522 to S523 and the like.
A progress management means for managing the progress of the confirmation process of the setting information (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for managing the check status) and
Equipped with
The progress management means is
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of confirmation processes (for example, check status = 1, 5 processes) is completed in one predetermined process.
The setting information confirmation means is
When the one confirmation process (for example, the process of check status = 1) is completed in the one predetermined process, another confirmation process (for example, check status = 1) different from the one confirmation process in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. 5) is executed, and when the one confirmation process is not completed in the one predetermined process, the one confirmation process can be executed again in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. ..

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation process of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire confirmation process of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one confirmation process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the next time or later (for example, for example).
Since the one confirmation process is executed again in the predetermined process (after the next frame), each confirmation process will be executed until it is completed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 20-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 20-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing the determination process of the amplification device.

[11-21. Each gaming machine of Appendix 21-1 and Appendix 21-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such a production image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine that operates a simple access controller by writing a SAC number to a voice control register and outputs voice data such as game sounds from a voice memory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-79971).

(21st issue)
In recent years, as the variation of the production image has increased, the variation of the game sound has also increased. However, for example, when a plurality of game sounds overlap, the effect of the game sound may be halved.

In order to solve the 21st problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 21-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 21-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 21-1 is
Setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) that can assign and set sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel, and
A sound output means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit) capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel, and
Equipped with
The setting means is
When a plurality of sound information is set for the one channel when allocating the sound information to the one channel (for example, when it is determined as YES in the process of step S1542).
In
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction chain reproduction), the sound information of any one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is provided for at least a predetermined time. A first setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) for setting with a delay of (for example, one frame) or more, and
The plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example,).
The second is to set the plurality of sound information without delaying for the predetermined time or more (for example, in the frame) on condition that it is determined to be NO in the process of step S1543.
It is characterized by having a setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 and step S1547).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of sound information is set for one channel, if the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Since it is set, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect by delaying (for example, the sound effect by muting). On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific sound information is
It includes at least the first sound information (for example, SHOT reproduction) that is reproduced only once and the second sound information (LOOP reproduction) that is reproduced multiple times.
The first setting means is
It is characterized in that the second sound information can be set with a delay of a predetermined time or more after the first sound information is set.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the first sound information to be reproduced only once is set and then delayed by a predetermined time or more, the second sound information to be reproduced multiple times is set. It is possible to prevent the first sound information, which is reproduced only once, from becoming difficult to hear.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 21-2 is
Setting means (for example, voice / LED control circuit) that can assign sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel and set it,
A sound output means capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel, and a sound output means.
Equipped with
The setting means is
When a plurality of sound information is set for the one channel when allocating the sound information to the one channel (for example, when it is determined as YES in the process of step S1542).
In
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT + loop chain reproduction), the sound information of any one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is used for at least a predetermined time (for example, loop reproduction). A first setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) for setting with a delay of 1 frame or more).
The plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example,).
The second is to set the plurality of sound information without delaying for the predetermined time or more (for example, in the frame) on condition that it is determined to be NO in the process of step S1543.
With the setting means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 and step S1547),
Have,
The second setting means is
When mute is set for all channels (for example, when it is determined to be YES in the process of step S1545), sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting (for example, the process of step S1546 is performed). On the other hand, when the mute setting is not for all channels but for one channel (for example, NO in step S1545).
When it is determined that the sound information is set by overwriting the mute setting (for example, step S1).
It is characterized in that it is configured to be possible (performing 547 processing).

(1) According to the gaming machine of 1 above, when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel and the plurality of sound information are specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect by delaying (for example, the sound effect by muting). On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay. Furthermore, when a plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting when the mute setting is set for all channels.
When the mute setting is not for all channels but for one channel, the mute setting is overwritten and the sound information is set. It is possible to secure (until the variable display is started).

As described above, according to the gaming machines of Appendix 21-1 and Appendix 21-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably outputting a gaming sound.

[11-22. Appendix 22 gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such a production image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine that outputs a sound that excites the game in conjunction with an effect image displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144066).

(22nd issue)
However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144066, the secondary volume is maintained at a fixed value and the volume of the effect sound is controlled by the primary volume. There is a limit.

In order to solve the 22nd problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 22 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 22 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
Sound data setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of setting sound data (for example, voice data) related to the game sound output from the output means, and
A volume control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request) having a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, CH1 to CH31) and capable of controlling the volume output from the output means, and the like.
Equipped with
The volume control means
A first volume control means (for example,) capable of changing information related to volume for all of the plurality of playback channels based on a predetermined operation (for example, a hardware switch operation or a screen operation by a user). , Volume control by hardware switch 2
810, the host control circuit 2100) that executes the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging, and
A second volume control means (for example, first playback channel primary control 2840) capable of changing information related to the volume for each of the plurality of playback channels.
, The second playback channel primary control 2850, and the host control circuit 2100)) that executes the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data.
The volume output from the output means can be changed by multiplying the information related to the volume by the first volume control means and the information related to the volume by the second volume control means. ,
The second volume control means
Volume control (first playback channel primary control 2840) that controls the information related to the volume to be changed when the predetermined operation is performed for each playback channel.
A volume that controls the output of information related to a certain volume (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) before and after the predetermined operation is performed for each playback channel. It is characterized in that it is configured to be operable with control (second reproduction channel primary control 2850).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the gaming sound output from the output means is defined by multiplying the information related to the volume by the first volume control means and the information related to the volume by the second volume control means. Therefore, it is possible to give diversity to the volume of the game sound. Moreover, the second volume control means controls each reproduction channel so that information related to a certain volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if a predetermined operation is performed. As a result, even if a predetermined operation is performed, it is possible to control the output of information related to a certain volume before and after the operation is performed only on a specific playback channel, not the entire channel. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The first volume control means
The feature is that the information related to the volume can be controlled by the debug volume control at the time of debugging.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the gaming sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and the work efficiency at the time of debugging can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 22, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a variety of variations in the volume of the effect sound.

[11-23. Appendices 23-1 to 23-58]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such a production image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of adjusting the volume of the gaming sound output from the speaker by the operation of the player is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229766).
..

(23rd issue)
However, if the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating the game sound, it may affect sounds that you do not want to change, such as error sounds and warning sounds. , Not desirable.

In order to solve the 23rd problem, Appendices 23-1 to 23-5 have the following configurations.
Providing a gaming machine.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 23-1 is
A plurality of output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means, and
Equipped with
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Audio signal to be output) and second information having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840). Being done
The plurality of output means include a dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound (for example, a dedicated speaker) and a shared output means used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound (for example, a shared speaker). And at least are included,
The sound control means is
Regarding the dedicated output means, even if the operation means is operated, the specific sound control means (for example, a step) capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. The host control circuit 2100) that executes S1559 and
Regarding the shared output means, a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host that executes step S1558) that can execute control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a control circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound is
Even if an operator who can control the volume is operated, it is controlled so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. That is, although the volume can be controlled, a constant volume is output without changing the volume before and after the operation of the operating means. Further, as for the shared output means used for outputting sounds other than specific sounds, the second information whose volume information is changed based on the operation of the operator who can control the volume is output. It becomes possible to suitably adjust the volume.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The dedicated output means is characterized by being a vibration speaker.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to output a specific sound (for example, an error sound, a warning sound, etc.) from the vibration speaker at a constant volume.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
When the power is turned on (for example, at the time of various initialization processes of step S1201), the dedicated output setting means (for example, the process of step S1201) for setting which of the plurality of output means is to be the dedicated output means is executed. Host control circuit 2100)
The data related to the specific sound (for example, the voice data related to the specific sound specified by the SAC number) is characterized in that it is specified that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated output means. And.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the power is turned on, the output destination of the data related to a specific sound is defined by the dedicated output means, so it is possible to set which output means is used as the dedicated output means. At the same time, since it is stipulated that the audio data related to a specific sound to which a constant volume is output is output from the dedicated output means, it is possible to enhance the versatility.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 23-2 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a plurality of playback channels and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
Equipped with
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Audio signal to be output) and second information having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840). Being done
The plurality of playback channels include at least a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound.
The sound control means is
Regarding the dedicated channel, the specific sound control means (for example, step S1580) capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. Host control circuit 2100) that executes
For the shared channel, a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host control for executing step S1581) capable of executing control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if the operating means is operated for the dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound, it is controlled so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. .. That is, although the volume can be controlled, constant volume information is output without changing the volume before and after the operation of the operating means. Also, for shared channels used to output sounds other than specific sounds, it is preferable to adjust the volume because the volume is controlled so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operator who can control the volume. It becomes possible to do it.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A dedicated channel (eg, CH31,) used to output the particular sound when the power is turned on.
CH32) and a shared channel (eg, CH) used to output sounds other than the specific sound.
1 to CH30) and a channel setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1201) and
Sound information (eg, for example) related to the data of the specific sound and the sound other than the specific sound.
A sound information registration means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for registering a SAC number) for registering a SAC number) in the dedicated channel or the shared channel.
It is characterized by further preparing.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the power is turned on, a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound are set, and at the same time, a shared channel is set.
Since the sound information related to the data of the specific sound and the sound other than the specific sound is registered in each channel, it is possible to enhance the versatility.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 23-3 are
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A host control circuit 210 having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means (for example, a host control circuit 210 for executing a sound request control process).
0) and
Equipped with
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Audio signal to be output) and second information having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840). Being done
The sound control means is
A data determination means for determining whether or not the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data of the specific sound (for example, the host control circuit 210 for executing step S1599).
0) and
When the data discriminating means determines that the data of the game sound being played on the playback channel is the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation even if the operating means is operated. A specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1600) capable of executing control to output the first information, and
When the data discriminating means determines that the data of the game sound being played on the playback channel is non-specific data, the second information is changed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operating means. Non-specific sound control means (for example, step S1) capable of executing control to output
It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100) that executes 601.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is determined that the data of the gaming sound being played is specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operating means is operated. When it is determined that the data of the gaming sound being played is non-specific data, the volume is controlled to be changed based on the operation of the operating means, so the volume can be adjusted. It becomes possible to perform it suitably.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 23-4 are
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A host control circuit 210 having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means (for example, a host control circuit 210 for executing a sound request control process).
0) and
Equipped with
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Audio signal to be output) and second information having volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840). Being done
The sound control means is
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced in the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. A specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1621) capable of setting the first information in the reproduction channel, and
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the reproduction is such that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a non-specific sound control means capable of setting the second information in a channel (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing step S1623).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the sound information corresponding to the sound output reproduced in the reproduction channel (
For example, when the SAC number) is specific sound information, it is controlled so that a constant volume is output even if the operating means is operated, and sound information corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel (for example,). When the SAC number) is non-specific sound information, the volume is changed based on the operation of the operating means, so that the volume can be preferably adjusted.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 23-5 are
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A host control circuit 210 having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means (for example, a host control circuit 210 for executing a sound request control process).
0) and
Equipped with
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 285) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. A second information (for example, a voice signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840) having information on the volume changed based on the operation of the operation means, and the above-mentioned voice signal. A third information having volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, an audio signal output by the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data). ) And
The sound control means is
When the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel is the specific sound data (for example, the sound data not affected by the volume adjustment), the specific sound data is used. With identification information setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1632) that presets identification information (for example, a flag indicating whether or not each channel is affected by volume adjustment) that can be identified as being present. ,
When setting the volume to the reproduction channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) can be identified by the identification information as the specific sound data (for example, YES in step S1637). (When), even if the operation means is operated, the first volume setting means (for example, a step) that can set the first information to the reproduction channel so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. Host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S1641 and
When setting the volume to the reproduction channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information can be identified by the identification information if it is not the specific sound data (for example, step S1).
(When it is determined to be NO in 637), the second volume setting means (when the operation means is operated), the second information can be set to the reproduction channel so that the volume is changed.
For example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the process of step S1638 and
When setting the volume in the reproduction channel, it is characterized by having a third volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1644) for setting the third information in the reproduction channel.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, identification information that can identify that the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel is specific sound data is set in advance, and the sound information is specified. When the sound information can be identified by the identification information as specific sound data, it is set so that a constant volume is output even if the operating means is operated. In addition, the volume is set to be changed based on the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel. Further, the third information having the volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is set in the reproduction channel. In this way, the volume can be suitably adjusted.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the playback channel is used.
When the sound data specified from the above can be identified by the identification information as specific sound data (for example, when YES is determined in step S1637), even if the operating means is operated, before and after the operation is performed. A constant volume is output, but the constant volume in this case may always be information related to the maximum volume. However, even if the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel is specific sound data (first information related to a certain volume), the sound information registered in the playback channel (for example, SAC number). )
Since it is multiplied by the volume incorporated in the sound data specified from, the output volume may not be a constant volume.

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably adjusting the volume.

[11-24. Appendix 24 gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a game in which a light emitting means composed of a light emitting body such as an LED is provided on the front side of the game machine, and the light emitting means is turned on or blinked in a predetermined mode. ing.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine in which the brightness of the light emitting means can be adjusted by, for example, an operation by a player or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(24th issue)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551, the brightness of the light emitting means can be challenged by an operation by a player or the like, but when the light emitting means can emit light in full color, it emits light when the brightness is changed. Even the color may change significantly.

In order to solve the 24th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 24 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 24 is
A predetermined light emitting means (for example, a lamp (LED) group 25) and
An operation means that can be operated so that the brightness of the light emitting means can be selected (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) and
A storage means (for example, an attenuation table) for storing a luminance information table (for example, an attenuation table) in which luminance information is set for each of a plurality of colors (for example, RGB) as luminance information (for example, luminance attenuation rate) related to the luminance of the light emitting means. Sub-main ROM 2050) and
When the luminance is selected by the operating means, the luminance control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the luminance of the light emitting means based on the luminance information table
Equipped with
The storage means
A luminance information table in which the luminance information is set for each of the plurality of colors is stored corresponding to the luminance that can be selected by the operating means.
The brightness control means is
Based on the luminance information table corresponding to the luminance selected by the operating means, the luminance of the light emitting means can be controlled so that the attenuation factor of blue is the largest and the attenuation factor of red is the smallest among the plurality of colors. It is characterized by being configured in.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the light emitting means is used so that the blue attenuation factor is the largest and the red attenuation factor is the smallest among the plurality of colors based on the luminance information set for each of the plurality of colors. Since the light emission is controlled, for example, even if the brightness of the light emitting means is changed by an operation of a player or the like, it is possible to suppress the change in the light emitting color, that is, to maintain the white balance.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the brightness while suppressing the change of the emission color.

[11-25. Appendix 25 game machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine in which a movable body is arranged on a gaming board and the movable body is operated to give an impact to the player and increase the motivation for the game has been proposed. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-288649).

(25th issue)
For example, in a game machine in which a movable body is operated as in JP-A-2006-288694, the movement of the movable body has been diversified in recent years, and the control for operating the movable body has become complicated accordingly. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of suppressing a control load while giving diversity to the movement of a movable body.

In order to solve the 21st problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 25 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 25 is
With the prescribed character,
A control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the operation of the predetermined accessory and
An actuating member (for example, a solenoid) capable of actuating a member constituting the accessory, and
With multiple light emitting means (eg, LEDs),
A plurality of connection portions (for example, Port0 to Port23) capable of transmitting a signal to the connected light emitting means by being connected to any of the plurality of light emitting means.
A light emitting control means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the light emitting means by transmitting a signal to the light emitting means through the connecting portion.
Equipped with
The operating member is
It is connected to any one of the plurality of connection portions, and is configured to be able to operate a member constituting the accessory by a signal from the light emission control means.
The control means is
It is characterized in that an actuating member connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions can be actuated in synchronization with the predetermined accessory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if the number of operating members increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, the control for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory. It is possible to suppress the load and synchronize the accessory and the operating member.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a control load.

[11-26. Appendix 26 game machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As this type of gaming machine, image data to be read from a CGROM that stores compressed data of still images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display, decompress the read compressed data, and output to the liquid crystal display. Is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-15).
See Japanese Patent Publication No. 9026).

(26th issue)
However, as described in JP-A-2016-159026, for example, CGRO
When the compressed data is read from M and the image data to be output is generated, if the amount of data is large, the loading process takes time. In this case, the watchdog reset may be applied even though the load process is proceeding normally, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the above-mentioned 26th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 26 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 26 is
A read-only storage area (for example, a sub-main ROM) in which game data related to the game is stored.
2050 and CGROM2060)
A volatile storage area (for example, SRAM 210) in which game data related to the game can be read and written.
0b and built-in VRAM2370)
A transfer execution means for executing a load process of reading the game data stored in the read-only storage area and writing the game data to the volatile storage area (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the data load process of FIG. 93).
Watchdog timer and
A clearing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) that clears the clock of the watchdog timer after a lapse of a predetermined time,
Equipped with
The transfer executing means is
It is characterized by having a load reprocessing means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1656) that resets the watchdog timer and executes the load process again when the load process exceeds a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the time required for the load processing by the transfer executing means exceeds a predetermined upper limit, the load processing is terminated and the load processing is executed again. Therefore, the load processing is performed. Even if it takes time, it is possible to automatically recover.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 26, even if the loading process takes time,
Preferably, it becomes possible to proceed with the loading process.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The clearing means
When the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is cleared (for example, the process of step S1655), and only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is timed. It is configured so that error processing (for example, processing in step S1656) is executed without clearing.
The transfer executing means is
It is characterized in that the load process is executed again as the error process.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the watchdog timer is cleared when the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, but the watchdog timer is not cleared only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time. Since the error processing is executed in, it is possible to grasp that the loading processing could not be completed due to the occurrence of the error.

[11-27. Each gaming machine of Appendix 27-1 and Appendix 27-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, for example, a liquid crystal display for displaying an effect image is provided, and the effect image determined by lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display.

In this type of gaming machine, lottery is performed in various situations, and the lottery is performed by generating and acquiring random numbers. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-023629, the number of digits of a newly acquired random number value is determined, a one-digit numerical value is calculated from the reference random number value by the determined number of digits, and the calculated value is used as each digit. It describes how to place and get new numbers.

(27th issue)
In the random number acquisition process for acquiring random numbers, it is required that the acquired random numbers are less likely to have regularity. However, if the processing is complicated, the control load becomes large, which is not preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a random number acquisition process in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in the control load.

In order to solve the 27th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 27-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 27-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 27-1 is
It is a gaming machine that draws lots using a predetermined random number.
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) that can output time information,
A random number generation means for generating random numbers used in a predetermined lottery (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of FIGS. 95 and 96) and
Equipped with
The random number generation means
An initialization means (for example, a host control circuit 21 that executes a random number initialization process) that acquires time information from the real-time clock and generates an initial value of a random number using the acquired time information.
00) and
A non-stationary update means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 96) that updates the random number when the generated random number is used in the lottery, and
A steady-state update means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 95) that periodically updates the random number even if the generated random number is not used in the lottery.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the initial value of the random number is generated using the time information acquired from the real-time clock, the acquired random number can be randomized and is biased to the acquired random number. Can be suppressed. In particular, since the initial value of the random number is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to make the initial value different each time.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 27-2 is
It is a gaming machine that draws lots using a predetermined random number.
A random number table in which a plurality of random numbers are registered is subjected to a plurality of random number seeds (for example, random number seeds a to
A random number table creating means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1704) created by using one of the random number seeds in h).
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers to be subjected to a predetermined lottery with reference to the random number table created by the random number table creation means (for example, in the random number acquisition process of step S1706, from the random number table created in step S1704). Host control circuit 2 to acquire random numbers
100) and
Reference position updating means for updating the reference position of the random number table at a timing different from the timing at which the random number table is created (in step S1706, a host control circuit that updates the reference position of the random number table when a random number is acquired from the random number table. 2100) and
Equipped with
The random number acquisition means is
After acquiring a random number by referring to the random number table, it is possible to acquire a random number to be subjected to the predetermined lottery by referring to the same random number table whose reference position is updated without creating the random number table (for example). It is characterized in that it is configured in the packet reception loop of FIG. 98 and the random number acquisition process of step S1706 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if there are multiple random number acquisition opportunities, the random numbers are acquired because the reference position is only updated using the same random number table already created and the random numbers are acquired. It is possible to reduce the control load while giving irregularities to random numbers.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 27-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 27-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing processing in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in the control load. ..

[11-28. Appendix 28 game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variation display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol stops at a specific combination, it shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the variable display of the design is performed, various effects are performed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a gaming machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, a process for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry process) when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs. ) Has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2007-26).
See Publication No. 8038).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is present at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of this reference position sensor. Retry processing is in progress. Then, when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry processing is continuously performed, an error is determined and a predetermined error is determined. The process is being executed.

(28th issue)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that can be resolved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that the error is even in the case of such a minor error, there is a problem that unnecessary error processing increases.

In order to solve the 28th problem, the gaming machine of the appendix 28 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 28 is
A game control means (for example, a game control means capable of executing one game by starting the variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and stopping the variable display of the symbol when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. For example, the main CPU 101) of the main control circuit 100) and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member (for example, a accessory group 1000 or the like), and
Equipped with
The game control means is
At least, the start information of the variation display of the symbol and the stop information of the variation display of the symbol can be transmitted to the effect control means (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means is
A first determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19141) for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started.
If it is determined in the determination by the first determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the first restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) can be executed so as to be normalized. First recovery control means (for example, step S19147)
Host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of
A second determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19171) for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is stopped.
If it is determined in the determination by the second determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the second restoration process (for example, the motor driver reset process in step S19176) can be executed so as to be normalized. 2 Recovery control means (for example, step S1917)
Has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of 6.
The first determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started.
The first recovery control means is
The first recovery process can be executed each time the first determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The second determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is stopped.
The second recovery control means is
The second recovery process can be executed each time the second determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A first counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144) that counts the number of times the first recovery process is executed by the first recovery control means.
A second counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19177) that counts the number of times the second recovery process is executed by the second recovery control means.
The result of counting by the first counting means is the first specified number of times (for example, 10 times), and the result of counting by the second counting means is the second specified number of times (for example, 10 times). If at least one of the above is satisfied, the movable member cannot operate (inoperable state (inoperable state).
For example, it is characterized by having an accessory non-operable means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) for setting an error motor operation stop state).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), if it is determined by the first determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled, and the first restoration process is performed. Similarly, if it is determined by the second determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled, and the second restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, or when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, the movable member is moved. It is in an inoperable state. Therefore, it does not become an inoperable state even if a minor error occurs, but it is made an inoperable state when the first recovery process or the second recovery process is executed over a plurality of games but cannot be recovered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

Moreover, whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is determined at each of the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is started and the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped. Then, the number of games in which the recovery process and the recovery process are executed is counted separately at the timing when the symbol variation display is started and the timing when the symbol variation display is stopped, and the number of times the recovery process is executed. However, when the specified number of times is reached, the operation is disabled, so that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A position detection means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, an initial position), and
A driving means capable of operating the movable member from the specific position toward a specified position (for example, the maximum range of motion).
Further prepare
The first determination means is
When the movable member is not present at least in the specific position, it is determined that the movement is not normal.
The second determination means is
It is characterized in that it is determined that it is not normal when the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is determined whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal, which is performed at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started, and the timing when the variation display of the symbol is stopped. Since the determination of whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member performed in 1 is normal is performed from different viewpoints, the accuracy of the error occurrence determination can be improved. as a result,
With higher accuracy, while avoiding inoperability with only minor errors
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

As described above, according to the appendix 28, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing error processing.

[11-29. Each gaming machine of Appendix 29-1 to Appendix 29-3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variation display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol stops at a specific combination, it shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the variable display of the design is performed, various effects are performed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a gaming machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, a process for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry process) when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs. ) Has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2007-26).
See Publication No. 8038).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is present at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of this reference position sensor. Retry processing is in progress. Then, when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry processing is continuously performed, an error is determined and a predetermined error is determined. The process is being executed.

(29th issue)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that can be resolved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that the error is even in the case of such a minor error, unnecessary error processing increases, which is not appropriate. On the other hand, the production using movable characters is an important factor in enhancing the interest of the game, so if the game is played on a gaming machine in which an error related to the operation of the movable characters occurs, the decrease in the interest is denied. do not have. Therefore, it is preferable that the gaming machine in which the movable accessory cannot operate normally is managed by an authorized hall-related person, including the determination of whether to continue or stop the operation.

In order to solve the 29th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 29-1 to the gaming machine of Appendix 229-3 having the following configurations is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 29-1 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the variable display of the symbol when the end condition is satisfied.
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value,
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
Equipped with
The game control means is
When the power-on operation is performed at least while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed (for example, in step S24). It has a main CPU 101) capable of executing processing, and can transmit various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means is
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, step S19141 or step S1914).
Host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of 7 and
If it is determined by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a restoration process (for example, an initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 or a motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) that can execute
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means.
The determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means (for example, for example) that counts the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means.
Host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of steps S19144 and S19177
)When,
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor inoperable state) in which the movable member cannot be operated (for example, an error motor operation stop state) is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
Release means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, step S).
It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of 311.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the production using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the interest in the game, it is undeniable that the interest is reduced when the game is played on a gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the gaming machine of (1) above, the movable member operates by making it possible to cancel the inoperable state based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Important decisions such as whether or not to operate a gaming machine that can no longer be made can be made by an authorized hall-related person, and the error motor operation stop state cannot be canceled by an unauthorized person.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member is present at a specific position (for example, an initial position).
The determination means is
It has a position determining means for determining that the movable member is not normal when it does not exist at least at the specific position.
The recovery control means
Every time the position determination means determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) is executed. Position recovery control means (for example, step S19)
It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of 147.
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
The number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, the process of step S323).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, this position restoration process is performed when the position restoration process for returning the movable member to a specific position is executed once or more even if the movable member is not in an inoperable state. Can be reset based on the receipt of setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times the position restoration process is executed is also performed by an authorized hall-related person and is not performed by an unauthorized person, so that the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means is
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
An operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means each time the operation determining means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal (for example, step S191).
It has an operation recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that executes 76 motor driver reset processes).
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
The number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, the process of step S323).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the operation is not inoperable, the operation recovery process is performed when the operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means is executed once or more. The number of executions can be reset based on the receipt of setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is also performed by an authorized hall-related person and is not performed by an unauthorized person, so that the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 29-2 is
A storage means (for example, a main RO) that can execute control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values and can store game information related to the progress of the game.
It has M102), and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is stopped.
A game control means capable of executing a game of times (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100).
When,
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value,
At least a specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) operated when erasing the game information stored in the storage means, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
Equipped with
The game control means is
When the operation of the specific operation means and the power-on operation are performed while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed is performed. Means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
A game information erasing means (for example, step S) capable of erasing the game information stored in the storage means when at least the operation of the specific operating means and the power-on operation are performed.
The main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of 2420, and
And various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed, information indicating that the game information has been deleted) is used as the effect control means. It can be transmitted (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means is
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, step S19141 or step S1914).
Host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of 7 and
If it is determined by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a restoration process (for example, an initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 or a motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) capable of executing.
The determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means (for example, for example) that counts the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means.
Host control circuit 210 that executes the processing of step S191444 and step S19177
0) and
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor inoperable state) in which the movable member cannot be operated (for example, an error motor operation stop state) is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
It has a release means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S311) for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The release means is
When the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is not released. It is characterized in that it is configured to release the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, execute the process of step S311) when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the production using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the interest in the game, it is undeniable that the interest is reduced when the game is played on a gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the game machine of (1) above, when the setting change state is not controlled, the inoperable state is not released even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, and the setting is made. The inoperable state is released when it is controlled to the changed state. This will result in
The important decision as to whether or not to operate the gaming machine in which the movable member has become inoperable should be made by the authorized hall personnel, and the error motor operation stop state cannot be canceled by the unauthorized person. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from the specific position to a specified position.
The determination means is
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
Even if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled until the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times). It has a character effect disapproval means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19180) that makes the character effect disapproval state so that the effect using the movable member cannot be executed.
The release means is
Even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed when the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is not released. It is characterized in that the state in which the character production is disallowed by the character effect disapproval means can be canceled.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not possible until the number of times the recovery process is executed reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times). It is in a state where the character production is not permitted so that the production using the movable member cannot be performed without setting the state. Then, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed when the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the inoperable state is not released, but the character production is not permitted. I am trying to cancel. As a result, important decisions can be made by authorized hall personnel, and when the error is not so serious as to be inoperable, such as when the character production is not permitted, the game information is deleted. Convenience can be ensured by canceling the production disapproval state.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 29-3 are
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is started, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the variable display of the symbol, and
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value,
A display means (for example, a display device 16) on which a predetermined image is displayed, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
Equipped with
The game control means is
When the power-on operation is performed at least while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed (for example, in step S24). It has a main CPU 101) capable of executing processing, and can transmit various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means is
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, step S19141 or step S1914).
Host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of 7 and
If it is determined by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a restoration process (for example, an initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 or a motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) that can execute
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means.
The determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means (for example, for example) that counts the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means.
Host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of steps S19144 and S19177
)When,
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor inoperable state) in which the movable member cannot be operated (for example, an error motor operation stop state) is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
Release means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, step S).
The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of 311 and
A storage means that can store the time information in the inoperable state as history information based on the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, step S306).
And the subwork RAM 2100a) that stores the history information when the history recording process of step S307 is performed.
A display control means (display control means) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation.
For example, it is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100) that displays the error information history screen of FIG. 116 via the display control circuit 2300.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the information screen in which the time information in the inoperable state is shown as the history information is displayed, it is possible to manage the history of serious errors.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member is present at a specific position (for example, an initial position).
The determination means is
When the movable member is not present at least in the specific position (for example, step S19).
Position determination means (for example, host control circuit 210) that is not normal to NO in 141)
Has 0)
The recovery control means
Each time the position determination means determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position (for example, NO is determined in step S19141), a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, for example). It has a position recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that executes the initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147.
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
The number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, the process of step S323 is executed).
The storage means
It is possible to store at least one of the position recovery process history information including the time information in which the position recovery process is executed and the position recovery process count reset history information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed is reset. ,
The display control means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
It is characterized in that an information screen showing at least one of the position recovery processing history information and the position recovery processing count reset history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, each time it is determined that the movable member does not exist at a specific position,
The position restoration process for returning the movable member to a specific position is executed, and the number of times the position restoration process is executed is reset based on the change of one set value. Then, based on the change of one setting value, the position recovery process history information including the time information in which the position recovery process is executed and the time information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed are reset are input. An information screen showing at least one of the reset history information including the number of times of position recovery processing is displayed. Therefore, although it has not reached a serious error such as an inoperable state, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as an inoperable state by viewing the position recovery processing history information and the position recovery processing count reset history information. And it becomes possible to manage the gaming machine appropriately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means is
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
An operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means each time the operation determining means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal (for example, step S191).
It has an operation recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that executes 76 motor driver reset processes).
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
The number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, the process of step S323 is executed).
The storage means
It is possible to store at least one of the operation recovery process history information including the time information in which the operation recovery process is executed and the operation recovery process count reset history information in which the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is reset. ,
The display control means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the above-mentioned one setting value has been performed.
The feature is that an information screen showing at least one of the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing number reset history information can be displayed (for example, the hall menu display processing in step S302 can be executed). And.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, every time it is determined that the state related to the movable member is not normal, the operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means is executed, and one set value is changed. Based on this, the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is reset. Then, based on the change of one setting value, the operation recovery process history information including the time information in which the operation recovery process is executed and the time information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed are reset are input. An information screen showing at least one of the reset history information including the number of operation recovery processes is displayed. Therefore, although it has not reached a serious error such as an inoperable state, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as an inoperable state by viewing the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing count reset history information. And it becomes possible to manage the gaming machine appropriately.

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 29-1 to Appendix 29-3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing error processing and management of the gaming machine.

[12. Other expansion examples, etc.]
In this embodiment, the embodiment when applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described.
All the inventions described in the present specification are pachinko machines, to the extent that they do not deviate from the gist of the invention.
It can be applied to game machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines.

In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, examples, and modifications, including the above-mentioned appendix, is an example. It goes without saying that the configurations shown in each embodiment, each embodiment and each modification can be partially replaced or combined in other embodiments, other embodiments and other modifications. stomach. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each embodiment, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 Liquid crystal display 24 Speaker 35 Power switch 100 Main control circuit 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 RWM (main RAM)
106 Command output port 201 Sub CPU
203 Subwork RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 338 Power supply circuit 662 Main button 664 Select button 1000 Character group 1002 Character detection sensor group 2010 Relay board 2100 Host control circuit

Claims (1)

A read-only storage area in which game data related to the game is stored, and
A volatile storage area that can read and write game data related to the game,
A transfer execution means for executing a load process of reading the game data stored in the read-only storage area and writing the game data to the volatile storage area.
Watchdog timer and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The transfer executing means is
An upper limit value setting means for setting an upper limit value of the time required for the load process, and
When the execution time of the load process does not exceed the upper limit value set by the upper limit value setting means, the watchdog timer has a clear means for clearing the timing.
The gaming machine is
An abnormality determination process that can determine whether or not the amplification means capable of amplifying the game sound is normal is provided, and the abnormality determination process can be executed by a plurality of different processes, and a plurality of different processes are performed in one predetermined process. A gaming machine characterized in that when a part of the abnormality determination processing divided into is executed, a part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time onward.

Images